MINI 2022 Mini Hardtop 2 Door Owner's Manual

Owner's Manual for MINI models including: 2022 Mini Hardtop 2 Door

MINI HARDTOP 2 DOOR / 4 DOOR. OWNER'S MANUAL.

Owner's Manual and the Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle. Notes on updates can be found in the ap-pendix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle. Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Enter-tainment, and Communication can be ob-tained as a printed book from the service center.

MINI HARDTOP 2 DOOR / 4 DOOR. OWNER'S MANUAL.

Mini hardtop 2 door / 4 door | OWNER'S MANUAL.

Owner's manual. Mini hardtop 2 door / 4 door. Online Edition for Part no ... Owner's manual. Thank you for choosing a MINI. The more familiar you are with your...

Not Your Device? Search For Manuals / Datasheets:

File Info : application/pdf, 320 Pages, 5.32MB

Document

MINI Owners Manual F55 F56 SOP 3-2022

LINK: CONTENT & A-Z
OWNER'S MANUAL. MINI HARDTOP 2 DOOR / 4 DOOR.
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

WELCOME TO MINI.
OWNER'S MANUAL.
Thank you for choosing a MINI. The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control you will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest: Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new MINI. Also use the Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It contains important information on vehicle operation that will help you make full use of the technical features available in your MINI. The manual also contains information designed to enhance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to maintaining the value of your MINI. Any updates made after the editorial deadline can be found in the appendix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle. Get started now. We wish you driving fun and inspiration with your MINI.
3 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Navigation, Entertainment and Communication can be called up via the Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
NOTES
Information.............................................................................................................................. 6
QUICK REFERENCE
Entering.................................................................................................................................. 16 Set-up and use.......................................................................................................................20 On the road............................................................................................................................ 24
AT A GLANCE
Cockpit.................................................................................................................................... 32 Central Information Display (CID)..................................................................................36 Voice activation system.................................................................................................... 44 General settings................................................................................................................... 48 Owner's Manual media.......................................................................................................60
CONTROLS
Opening and closing........................................................................................................... 62 Seats, mirrors and steering wheel.................................................................................. 82 Transporting children safely............................................................................................ 92 Driving.................................................................................................................................... 98 Displays................................................................................................................................ 123 Lights.................................................................................................................................... 145 Safety.....................................................................................................................................151 Driving stability control systems.................................................................................175 Driving comfort................................................................................................................. 179 Climate control...................................................................................................................200

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Interior equipment............................................................................................................209 Storage compartments.....................................................................................................220 Cargo area............................................................................................................................224
DRIVING TIPS
Things to remember when driving.............................................................................. 230 Reducing fuel consumption........................................................................................... 235
MOBILITY
Refueling..............................................................................................................................242 Fuel........................................................................................................................................ 244 Wheels and tires................................................................................................................246 Engine compartment........................................................................................................268 Engine oil.............................................................................................................................271 Coolant..................................................................................................................................275 Maintenance....................................................................................................................... 277 Replacing components.................................................................................................... 279 Breakdown assistance..................................................................................................... 285 Care........................................................................................................................................293
REFERENCE
Technical data.................................................................................................................... 298 Appendix.............................................................................................................................. 302 Everything from A to Z....................................................................................................304

© 2021 Bayerische Motoren Werke Aktiengesellschaft Munich, Germany Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written consent of BMW AG, Munich. US English ID5 II/21, 03 21 490 Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

NOTES
Information

Information

Using this Owner's Manual
Orientation
The fastest way to find information on a particular topic is by using the index. An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in the first chapter.
Updates made after the editorial deadline
Due to updates after the editorial deadline, differences may exist between the printed Owner's Manual and the Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle. Notes on updates can be found in the appendix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.
Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication
The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, and Communication can be obtained as a printed book from the service center. The topics are also discussed in the Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
Additional sources of information
Service center
A service center will be glad to answer questions at any time.

Internet
Vehicle information and general information on MINI, e.g., on technology, are available on the Internet: www.miniusa.com.
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
The Integrated Owner's Manual specifically describes features and functions found in the vehicle. The Integrated Owner's Manual can be displayed on the Control Display. Additional information, refer to page 60.
MINI Motorer's Guide app
The app specifically describes features and functions found in the vehicle. The app can be displayed on smartphones and tablets.
MINI Motorer's Guide Web
Driver's Guide Web shows the most suitable information for the selected vehicle. If possible, only equipment and functions that are actually installed in the vehicle will be explained. Driver's Guide Web can be displayed in any current browser.
Symbols and displays
Symbols in the Owner's Manual
Icon Meaning Precautions that must be followed in order to avoid the possibility of injury to yourself and to others as well as serious damage to the vehicle. Measures that can be taken to help protect the environment.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Information

NOTES

Icon Meaning "..." Control Display texts used to select
individual functions. >...< Verbal instructions to use with the
voice activation system. >>...<< Responses generated by the voice
activation system.
Action steps
Action steps to be carried out are presented as a numbered list. The steps must be carried out in the defined order. 1. First action step. 2. Second action step.
Enumerations
Enumerations without mandatory order or alternative possibilities are presented as a list with bullet points. First possibility. Second possibility.
Icons on vehicle components
This symbol on a vehicle component indicates that further information on the component is available in the Owner's Manual.
Vehicle features and options
This Owner's Manual describes all models and all standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series. Therefore, this Owner's Manual also describes and illustrates features and functions that are not available in a vehicle, for example because of the selected optional features or the country-specific version.

This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed. For any options and equipment not described in this Owner's Manual, refer to the Supplementary Owner's Manuals. Your dealer's service center is happy to answer any questions that you may have about the features and options applicable to your vehicle.
Status of the Owner's Manual
Basic information
The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a policy of constant development that is conceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to embody the highest quality and safety standards. In rare cases, therefore, the features described in this Owner's Manual may differ from those in your vehicle.
Updates made after the editorial deadline
Due to updates after the editorial deadline, differences may exist between the printed Owner's Manual and the Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle. Notes on updates can be found in the appendix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.
For Your Own Safety
Manufacturer
The manufacturer of this MINI is Bayerische Motoren Werke Aktiengesellschaft, BMW AG.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

NOTES

Information

Intended use
Heed the following when using the vehicle: Owner's Manual. Information on the vehicle. Do not re-
move stickers. Technical vehicle data. The traffic, speed, and safety laws where
the vehicle is driven. Vehicle documents and statutory docu-
ments.
Warranty
Your vehicle is technically configured for the operating conditions and registration requirements applying in the country of first delivery, also known as homologation. If your vehicle is to be operated in a different country it might be necessary to adapt your vehicle to potentially differing operating conditions and registration requirements. If your vehicle does not comply with the homologation requirements in a certain country you may not be able to lodge warranty claims for your vehicle there. Further information on warranty is available from a service center.
Maintenance and repairs
Advanced technology, for instance the use of modern materials and high-performance electronics, requires suitable maintenance and repair work. The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that you entrust corresponding procedures to a MINI dealer's service center. If you choose to use another service facility, the manufacturer of your vehicle recommends use of a facility that performs work, e.g., maintenance and repair, according to MINI specifications with properly trained personnel, referred to in the Owner's Manual as "another qualified service center or repair shop".

If work is performed improperly, for instance maintenance and repair, there is a risk of subsequent damage and related safety risks. Improperly performed work on the vehicle paint can lead to a failure or malfunction of components, e.g., the radar sensors, and thereby result in a safety risk.
Parts and accessories
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends the use of parts and accessory products approved by the manufacturer of the MINI. Approved parts and accessories, and advice on their use and installation are available from a MINI dealer's service center. MINI parts and accessories were tested by the manufacturer of the MINI for their safety and suitability in MINI vehicles. The manufacturer of your vehicle warrants genuine MINI parts and accessories. The manufacturer of your vehicle does not evaluate whether each individual product from another manufacturer can be used with MINI vehicles without presenting a safety hazard, even if a country-specific official approval was issued. The manufacturer of your vehicle does not evaluate whether these products are suitable for MINI vehicles under all usage conditions.
California Proposition 65 Warning
For vehicles sold in California, the law requires vehicle manufacturers to provide the following warning:
Warning Engine exhaust and a wide variety of Automobile components and parts, including components found in the interior furnishings in a vehicle, contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Information

NOTES

cause cancer and birth defects and reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Batteries also contain other chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer. Wash your hands after handling. Used engine oil contains chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and water. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
Warning Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a wellventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
Service and warranty
We recommend that you read this publication thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the following warranties: New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Rust Perforation Limited Warranty.

Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty.
Federal Emissions Performance Warranty.
California Emission Control System Limited Warranty.
Detailed information about these warranties is listed in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models. Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and designed to meet the particular operating conditions and homologation requirements in your country and continental region in order to deliver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle is operated under those conditions. If you wish to operate your vehicle in another country or region, you may be required to adapt your vehicle to meet different prevailing operating conditions and homologation requirements. You should also be aware of any applicable warranty limitations or exclusions for such country or region. In such case, please contact Customer Relations for further information.
Maintenance
Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the road safety, operational reliability and the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Specifications for maintenance measures: MINI Maintenance system. Service and Warranty Information Book-
let for US models. Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models. If the vehicle is not maintained or is improperly maintained, this could result in serious damage to the vehicle. Such damage is not covered by the MINI New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

NOTES

Information

Refer to section on engine oil change regarding recommended service intervals for oil changes.
Data memory
General information
Electronic control devices are installed in the vehicle. Electronic control units process data they receive from vehicle sensors, selfgenerate or exchange with each other. Some control units are necessary for the vehicle to function safely or provide assistance during driving, for instance driver assistance systems. Furthermore, control units facilitate comfort or infotainment functions. Information about stored or exchanged data can be requested from the manufacturer of the vehicle, in a separate booklet, for example.
Personal reference
Each vehicle is marked with a unique vehicle identification number. Depending on the country, the vehicle owner can be identified with the vehicle identification number, license plate and corresponding authorities. In addition, there are other options to track data collected in the vehicle to the driver or vehicle owner, for instance via utilized services.
Operating data in the vehicle
Control units process data to operate the vehicle. For example, this includes: Status messages for the vehicle and its
individual components, e.g., wheel rotational speed, wheel speed, deceleration, lateral acceleration, engaged safety belt indicator.

Ambient conditions, e.g., temperature, rain sensor signals.
The processed data is only processed in the vehicle itself and generally volatile. The data is not stored beyond the operating period. Electronic components, e.g. control units and ignition keys, contain components for storing technical information. Information about the vehicle condition, component usage, maintenance recommendations, events or faults can be stored temporarily or permanently. This information generally records the state of a component, a module, a system, or the environment, for instance: Operating states of system components,
for instance, fill levels, tire inflation pressure, battery status. Malfunctions and faults in important system components, for instance lights and brakes. Responses by the vehicle to special situations such as airbag deployment or engagement of the driving stability control systems. Information on vehicle-damaging events. The data is required to perform the control unit functions. Furthermore, it also serves to recognize and correct malfunctions, and helps the vehicle manufacturer to optimize vehicle functions. The majority of this data is stored temporarily and is only processed within the vehicle itself. In some circumstances the vehicle may store some data for an additional but limited period of time. When servicing, for instance during repairs, service processes, warranty cases, and quality assurance measures, this technical information can be read out from the vehicle to-

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Information

NOTES

gether with the vehicle identification number. A dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop can read out the information. The socket for OBD Onboard Diagnosis required by law in the vehicle is used to read out the data. The data is collected, processed, and used by the relevant organizations in the service network. The data documents technical conditions of the vehicle, which can be used to determine vehicle maintenance status, and facilitate quality improvement. Fault and event memories in the vehicle can be reset when a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop performs repair or servicing work.
Data entry and data transfer into the vehicle
General information Depending on the vehicle equipment, comfort and individual settings can be stored in the vehicle and modified or reset at any time. For example, this includes: Settings for the seat and steering wheel
positions. Chassis and climate control settings. If necessary, data can be transferred to the entertainment and communication system of the vehicle, for instance via smartphone. This includes the following depending on the respective equipment: Multimedia data such as music, films or
photos for playback in an integrated multimedia system. Address book data for use in conjunction with an integrated hands-free system or an integrated navigation system. Entered navigation destinations.

Data on the use of Internet services. This data can be stored locally in the vehicle or is found on a device that has been connected to the vehicle, e.g., a smartphone, USB stick or MP3 player. If this data is stored in the vehicle, it can be deleted at any time. This data is only transmitted to third parties upon personal request as part of the use of online services. The transmission depends on the selected settings for the use of the services.
Incorporation of mobile devices Depending on the vehicle equipment, mobile devices connected to the vehicle, for instance smartphones, can be controlled via the vehicle control elements. The sound and picture from the mobile device can be played back and displayed through the multimedia system. Certain information is transferred to the mobile device at the same time. Depending on the type of incorporation, this includes, for instance position data and other general vehicle information. This optimizes the way in which selected apps, for instance navigation or music playback, work. There is no further interaction between the mobile device and the vehicle, such as active access to vehicle data. How the data will be processed further is determined by the provider of the particular app being used. The extent of the possible settings depends on the respective app and the operating system of the mobile device.
Services
General information If the vehicle has a wireless network connection, this enables data to be exchanged between the vehicle and other systems. The wireless network connection is realized via

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

NOTES

Information

an in-vehicle transmitter and receiver unit or via personal mobile devices brought into the vehicle, for instance smartphones. This wireless network connection enables 'online functions' to be used. These include online services and apps supplied by the vehicle manufacturer or by other providers.
Services from the vehicle manufacturer Where online services from the vehicle manufacturer are concerned, the corresponding functions are described in the appropriate place, for instance the Owner's Manual or manufacturer's website. The relevant legal information pertaining to data protection may also be found on the manufacturer's website. Personal data may be used to perform online services. Data is exchanged over a secure connection, for instance with the IT systems of the vehicle manufacturer intended for this purpose. Any collection, processing, and use of personal data above and beyond that needed to provide the services must always be based on a legal permission, contractual arrangement or consent. It is also possible to activate or deactivate the data connection as a whole. That is, with the exception of functions and services required by law such as Assist systems.
Services from other providers When using online services from other providers, these services are the responsibility of the relevant provider and subject to their data privacy conditions and terms of use. The vehicle manufacturer has no influence on the content exchanged during this process. Information on the way in which personal data is collected and used in relation to services from third parties, the scope of such data, and its purpose, can be obtained from the relevant service provider.

Event Data Recorder EDR
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crashlike situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: How various systems in your vehicle
were operating. Whether or not the driver and passen-
ger safety belts were fastened. How far, if at all, the driver was depress-
ing the accelerator and/or brake pedal. How fast the vehicle was traveling. This data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data is recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data, for instance name, gender, age, and crash location, are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation. To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Information

NOTES

Vehicle identification number

General information
Depending on the national-market version, the vehicle identification number is located in different positions in the vehicle. This chapter describes all possible positions for the series.
Engine compartment

The vehicle identification number can be found on the nameplate, on the right-hand side of the vehicle.

Left nameplate
For 3-door models:

The engraved vehicle identification number can be found in the engine compartment, on the right-hand side of the vehicle.

Right nameplate
For 3-door models:

The vehicle identification number can be found on the nameplate, on the left-hand side of the vehicle. For 5-door models:

The vehicle identification number can be found on the nameplate, on the right-hand side of the vehicle. For 5-door models:

The vehicle identification number can be found on the nameplate, on the left-hand side of the vehicle.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

NOTES

Information

Windshield
The vehicle identification number can also be found behind the windshield.

other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov
For Canadian customers
Canadian customers who wish to report a safety-related defect to Transport Canada, Defect Investigations and Recalls, may call the toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/ roadsafety.

Reporting safety defects
For US customers
The following only applies to vehicles owned and operated in the US. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA, in addition to notifying MINI of North America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone 1-800-831-1117. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or MINI of North America, LLC. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http:// www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Information

NOTES

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

QUICK REFERENCE
Entering

Entering

Opening and closing
Buttons on the vehicle key

Buttons for the central locking system Overview

1 Unlocking 2 Locking 3 Unlocking the tailgate 4 Panic mode
Unlocking the vehicle
Press the button on the vehicle key.
Depending on the settings, either only the driver's door or all vehicle access points are unlocked. If only the driver's door is unlocked, press the button on the vehicle key again to unlock the other vehicle access points.
Press and hold the button on the vehicle key after unlocking. The windows and the glass sunroof are opened, as long as the button on the vehicle key is pressed.
Locking the vehicle
Press the button on the vehicle key.
All vehicle access points are locked.

Buttons for the central locking system.
Locking Pressing the button locks the vehicle if the front doors are closed.
Unlocking Pressing the button unlocks the vehicle.
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find yourself in a dangerous situation.
Press the button on the vehicle key and hold for at least 3 seconds. To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Comfort Access
Concept The vehicle can be accessed without operating the vehicle key. Carrying the vehicle key with you, e.g., in your pants pocket, is sufficient.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Entering

QUICK REFERENCE

The vehicle automatically detects the vehicle key when it is in close proximity or in the car's interior. Unlocking the vehicle

Unlock the vehicle and then press the button on the outside of the tailgate.

Press and hold the button on the

vehicle key for approx. 1 second.

Depending on the setting, the doors may also be unlocked.

Closing Closing the tailgate manually.

On the driver's or front passenger's door handle, press the button. Locking the vehicle

Displays and control elements
In the vicinity of the steering wheel

On the driver's or front passenger's door handle, press the button.
Tailgate Unlocking

1 Low beams, fog lights 2 High beams, headlight flasher, turn sig-
nal 3 Instrument cluster 4 Wiper system
Indicator/warning lights
The indicator/warning lights can light up in a variety of combinations and colors. Several of the lights are checked for proper functioning and light up temporarily when the engine is started or the ignition is switched on.
Driver's door
For 3-door models:

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

QUICK REFERENCE

Entering

1 Power windows 2 Exterior mirrors For 5-door models:
1 Safety switch 2 Power windows 3 Exterior mirrors
All around the selector lever

Central Information Display (CID)

Concept The Central Information Display (CID) combines the functions of a multitude of switches. These functions can be operated via the Controller.

Buttons on the Controller

Button

Function Press once: calls up the main menu. Press twice: displays all menu items of the main menu. Goes to the Communication menu. Goes to the Media/Radio menu.

Goes to destination input menu for navigation. Goes to navigation map.

Press once: opens the previous display. Press and hold: open the menus used last.
Goes to the Options menu.

1 Selector lever 2 Controller with buttons 3 Parking brake, manual or electric

Voice control
Activating the voice control system
Press the button on the steering wheel. Wait for the signal. Say the command.
This icon indicates that the voice control system is active.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

If no other commands are available, operate the function via the Central Information Display (CID).
Terminating the voice control system Press the button on the steering wheel or >Cancel<.

Entering

QUICK REFERENCE

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

QUICK REFERENCE

Set-up and use

Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
Manually adjustable seats

Adjusting the exterior mirrors

1 Forward/backward 2 Thigh support 3 Height 4 Backrest tilt
Adjusting the head restraint
Height

1 Adjusting 2 Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Mon-
itor 3 Folding in and out
Adjusting the steering wheel
In four directions

To raise: push the head restraint up. To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
push the head restraint down.

1. Fold the lever down. 2. Move the steering wheel to the prefer-
red height and angle to suit your seat position. 3. Fold the lever back up.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Set-up and use

QUICK REFERENCE

Entering the rear
1. Pull lever up to the stop.

Button Function Programmable memory buttons.

Changing the waveband/satellite radio.

Navigation destination input

Entering a destination via address

2. Fold backrest forward. 3. Push the seat forward.
Original position 1. Push the seat back into the original po-
sition. 2. Fold back the backrest to lock the seat.
Infotainment
Radio
Buttons and functions Depending on the country and equipment version, the radio has the following buttons. Button Function
Press: switches sound output on/ off. Turn: adjusts the volume. Change the entertainment source. Press once: changes the station/ track. Press and hold: fast forward/ rewind the track.

State/province 1. "Navigation" 2. "Enter address" 3. "State/Province?" 4. Select the country from the list.

Entering the address The address can be entered in any order. Example: entering the address via the town/ city

1. "City/Postal code?"

2. Enter the town/city.

The list is narrowed down further with each entry.

Select the icon.

4. Select a town/city from the list.

5. If necessary, enter the street.

6. Select the street as you would the town/ city.

7. If necessary, enter a house number.

Select the icon.

9. Select a house number or range of house numbers from the list.

Starting destination guidance "Start guidance" Destination guidance is started to the town/ city center if no street is entered.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

QUICK REFERENCE

Set-up and use

Pairing the mobile phone
After the mobile phone is paired once with the vehicle, the mobile phone can be operated using the Central Information Display (CID), the steering wheel buttons and spoken instructions.
1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 3. "Mobile devices" 4. "Connect new device"
The vehicle's Bluetooth name is displayed on the Control Display. 5. Select the functions for which the mobile phone is to be used. 6. To perform additional steps on the mobile phone, refer to the operating instructions for the mobile phone: for instance search for or connect the Bluetooth device or a new device. The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears on the mobile phone display. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle. 7. Depending on the mobile device, a control number is displayed or the control number must be entered. Compare the control number dis-
played on the Control Display with the control number on the display of the device. Confirm the control number on the device and on the Control Display. Enter and confirm the same control number on the device and via the Central Information Display (CID). The device is connected and displayed in the device list. The mobile phone is connected and will appear at the top of the list of mobile phones.

Using the telephone

Accepting a call Incoming call can be accepted via the Central Information Display (CID) or the button on the steering wheel.

Via the Central Information Display (CID) "Accept"

Via the button on the steering wheel Press the button.

Via the instrument cluster Use the OK button on the steering wheel to select: "Accept"

Dialing a number 1. "Communication" 2. "Dial number" 3. Select the numbers individually. 4. Select the icon. Establish the connection via the additional telephone:

Press the button.

2. "Call via"

Apple CarPlay preparation

Concept CarPlay allows certain functions of a compatible Apple iPhone to be used via Siri voice operation and the Central Information Display (CID).

Functional requirements Compatible iPhone: iPhone 5 or later
with iOS 7.1 or later. Corresponding mobile contract.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Set-up and use
Bluetooth, WLAN, and Siri voice operation are activated on the iPhone.
If necessary, the setting for mobile data must be activated on the iPhone.
WLAN and Bluetooth are enabled in the vehicle.
Switching on Bluetooth and CarPlay Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 3. "Mobile devices" 4. "Settings" 5. Select the following settings:
"Bluetooth®" "Apple CarPlay"
Pairing the iPhone with CarPlay Pair iPhone via Bluetooth with the vehicle. Select CarPlay as the function:
"Apple CarPlay" The iPhone is connected to the vehicle and displayed in the device list.

QUICK REFERENCE

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

QUICK REFERENCE
On the road

On the road

Driving
Starting and stopping the engine
Ignition on/off On: press the Start/Stop button. Most of the indicator/ warning lights light up for a varied length of time.
Off: press the Start/Stop button again. All indicator lights go out.
Radio-ready state: when the ignition is switched off, press the ON/OFF button on the radio or when the engine is running, press the Start/Stop button. Some electrical consumers remain ready for operation.
Start/stop engine
Steptronic transmission: starting 1. Depress the brake pedal. 2. Engage selector lever position P or N. 3. Press the Start/Stop button.
Manual transmission: starting 1. Depress the brake pedal. 2. Press on the clutch pedal and shift to
neutral. 3. Press the Start/Stop button.
Steptronic transmission: switching off 1. When the vehicle is stationary, apply
the parking brake. 2. Engage selector lever position P.

3. Press the Start/Stop button. Manual transmission: switching off 1. With the vehicle at a standstill, press
the Start/Stop button. 2. Shift into first gear or reverse. 3. Set the parking brake. Auto Start/Stop function Steptronic transmission: switches the engine off automatically while stationary to save fuel. The engine starts automatically when the brake pedal is released. Manual transmission: switches the engine off automatically while stationary to save fuel. As soon as the clutch pedal is depressed, the engine starts automatically.
Parking brake Engage manual parking brake
The lever automatically engages after being pulled up. Releasing
Raise lever slightly, press the button and guide the lever down.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

On the road

QUICK REFERENCE

Set the electrical parking brake Pull the switch when the vehicle is stationary.
The LED and indicator light light up.
Releasing Manual transmission: press the switch while the brake pedal is pressed.
Steptronic transmission: press the switch while the brake is pressed or selector lever position P is set. The LED and indicator light go out. The parking brake is released.
Manual transmission
Shifting When shifting into 5th or 6th gear, push the gearshift lever to the right in order to prevent inadvertent shifting into the 3rd or 4th gear.
Reverse gear Select only when the vehicle is stationary. To overcome the resistance push the gearshift lever dynamically to the left and engage reverse gear with a forward shifting movement.
Steptronic transmission
Selector lever positions Parking position P. R is reverse. Neutral N. Gear position D. Engage selector lever position P or R only when the vehicle is stationary. To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you select a gear position or reverse, main-

tain pressure on the brake pedal until you are ready to start. Selector lever lock A lock prevents an inadvertent change from selector lever position P to another selector lever position and, depending on the transmission version, inadvertent switching to selector lever position P or R. To release the lock: with the brake pedal depressed, press the button on the side of the selector lever.
Steptronic transmission, Sport and manual mode
Sport program: Press the selector lever to the left from selector lever position D. Manual mode: To shift down: press the selector lever
forward. To shift up: pull the selector lever rear-
wards.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

QUICK REFERENCE

On the road

Turn signal, high beams, headlight flasher, roadside parking lights Turn signal

Canada: roadside parking light

On: press the lever past the resistance point.
Off: lightly tap the lever to the resistance point.
Off: press the lever past the resistance point in the opposite direction.
Triple turn signal activation: lightly tap the lever up or down.
Brief signaling: press the lever to the resistance point and hold it there for as long as you want the turn signal to flash.

To illuminate the vehicle on one side. On: with the radio-ready state switched
off, press the lever either up or down past the resistance point for approx. 2 seconds. Off: briefly press the lever to the resistance point in the opposite direction.
Lights and lighting
Light functions
Icon Function Bad weather light.

High beams, headlight flasher

Automatic headlight control. Cornering light.
Lights off. Daytime running lights.
Parking lights.

Press the lever forward or pull it backward. High beams on, arrow 1.
The high beams light up when the low beams are switched on. High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2.

Low beams. Instrument lighting.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

On the road

QUICK REFERENCE

Wiper system Switching the wipers on/off and brief wipe
Switching on

Rain sensor Activating/deactivating

Press the lever up until the desired position is reached. Resting position of the wipers: posi-
tion 0. Rain sensor: position 1. Normal wiper speed: position 2. Fast wiper speed: position 3.

To activate: press the lever up once from its standard position, arrow 1. To deactivate: press the lever back into the standard position.
Set interval or sensitivity of the rain sensor

Switching off and brief wipe

Turn the thumbwheel on the wiper lever. Cleaning the windshield

Press the lever down. Switching off: press the lever down until
it reaches its standard position. Brief wipe: press the lever down from
the standard position.
Pull the lever.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

QUICK REFERENCE

On the road

Canada: wiper system Switching the wipers on/off and brief wipe
Switching on

Rain sensor Activating/deactivating

Tap up the lever or press it past the resistance point. Normal wiper speed: tap up once. Fast wiper speed: tap up twice or tap
once beyond the resistance point.
Switching off and brief wipe

Press the button on the wiper lever. Set interval or sensitivity of the rain sensor

Turn the thumbwheel on the wiper lever. Cleaning the windshield

Press the lever down. To switch off fast wipe: press down
twice. To switch off normal wipe: press down
once. Brief wipe: press down once.

Pull the lever.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Climate control

Air conditioner

Button

Function Temperature.

On the road

QUICK REFERENCE

Button

Function Air recirculation mode.
Controls the air flow, manual.

Air conditioning. Air recirculation mode. Controls the air flow, manual.

Air distribution, manual.
Defrosts and defogs the windows. Windshield defroster.
Rear window defroster.

Controls the air distribution manually.

Windshield defroster.

Automatic climate control

Button

Function Temperature.

Refueling stop
Refueling Fuel cap
1. Grasp the fuel filler flap at the rear edge and open it.

Air conditioning. Maximum cooling. AUTO program.

2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise. 3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket at-
tached to the fuel filler flap.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

QUICK REFERENCE

On the road

Gasoline For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline should be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content. Refuel only with unleaded gasoline without metallic additives. Information on the recommended fuel grade can be found in the Owner's Manual. Wheels and tires Tire inflation pressure specifications
For 5-door models: The tire inflation pressure values can be found on the sign on the door pillar.

Before embarking on an extended trip.

After correcting the tire inflation pressure Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor. Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor.

Electronic oil measurement

Requirements A current measured value is available after approx. 30 minutes of driving. During a shorter trip, the status of the last, sufficiently long trip is displayed.

Displaying the engine oil level Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

"Engine oil level"

The engine oil level is displayed.

Adding engine oil

General information Switch off the ignition and safely park the vehicle before engine oil is added.

Adding engine oil

For 3-door models: The tire inflation pressure values can be found on the sign on the door pillar.

Checking the tire inflation pressure Regularly check the tire inflation pressure and correct it as needed: At least twice a month.

Only add engine oil when the message is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

On the road
Observe the quantity to be added in the message. Take care not to add too much engine oil. Observe recommended engine oil types.
Providing assistance
Hazard warning flashers

QUICK REFERENCE

The button is located above the Control Display.
Breakdown assistance
MINI Roadside Assistance This service can be reached around the clock in many countries. 1. "MINI Connected" 2. "MINI Assist" 3. "MINI Roadside Assistance"
The contact to the MINI Roadside Assistance is established. A telephone number is displayed, if needed. Select to dial the telephone number on a connected mobile phone.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

AT A GLANCE
Cockpit

Cockpit

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

In the vicinity of the steering wheel

1 Power windows 77 2 Exterior mirror operation 89 3 Buttons of the central locking sys-
tem 68 4 Lights
Bad weather light 148
Light switch 145

Lights off Daytime running lights 147 Parking lights 145
Low beams 145

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Cockpit

AT A GLANCE

Automatic headlight control 146 Cornering light 147 High-beam Assistant 147 Instrument lighting 149
5 Steering wheel buttons, left Camera-based cruise control on/off 179 Cruise control on/off 186
Speed Limiter 171
Pausing, continuing cruise control Cruise control: increase speed
Cruise control: reduce speed
Camera-based cruise control: reduce distance Camera-based cruise control: increase distance 6 Steering column stalk, left Turn signal 106
High beams, headlight flasher 106 High-beam Assistant 147

Roadside parking lights 146
Trip computer 136
7 Instrument cluster 123 8 Steering column stalk, right
Wipers 107 Wiper on Canadian models 111 Rain sensor 108 Rain sensor on Canadian models 111 Cleaning windows 109
Rear window wiper in Canadian models 109 Rear window wiper 109
Clean the rear window 109
9 Steering wheel buttons, right Voice control 44
Telephone
Confirm the selection 136
Move selection up 136
Move selection down 136

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

AT A GLANCE

Cockpit

Increase volume Reduce volume

Horn, entire surface

11 Heated steering wheel 91 12 Adjusting the steering wheel 91 13 Unlocking the hood 269 14 Depending on the equipment: using tail-
gate 70

In the vicinity of the center console

Hazard warning system 285 6

Intelligent Safety 162

2 Control Display 36 3 Radio/Multimedia 4 Glove compartment 220 5 Climate control 200

PDC Park Distance Control 189 Rearview camera 192 Parking assistant 195 Auto Start/Stop function 101
Start/stop the engine and switch the ignition on/ off 98

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Cockpit

AT A GLANCE

DSC Dynamic Stability Control 175 MINI Driving Modes switch 177 7 Steptronic transmission selector lever 116

Manual transmission gearshift lever 115 8 Controller with buttons 39 9 Parking brake, manual 104 Parking brake, electric 104

In the vicinity of the roofliner

Emergency Call, SOS 286

Ambient light 149

Indicator light, front-seat pas- 5

Panoramic glass sunroof 79

senger airbag 154

Reading lights 149

Interior lights 149

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

AT A GLANCE

Central Information Display (CID)

Vehicle features and options Input and display

Main menu
General information The main menu is divided into two areas. The left area contains menu items that can be used to call up all functions from the onboard monitor. The menu items in the right area show dynamic contents that enable quick access to certain functions.

Concept
The Central Information Display (CID) combines the functions of a multitude of switches. These functions can be operated via the Controller.

Safety information
Warning Operating the integrated information systems and communication devices while driving can distract from traffic. It is possible to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Only use the systems or devices when the traffic situation allows. As warranted, stop and use the systems and devices while the vehicle is stationary.

Media/Radio All functions for the entertainment system, for instance radio stations or pairing with external devices.
Communication Telephone and message function, e-mail and calendar and also pairing and managing mobile devices, for instance smartphones.
Navigation Access to the navigation system, destination input and traffic bulletins. Configurable map views and other functions, such as Points of Interest.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Central Information Display (CID)

AT A GLANCE

My MINI Information on the vehicle status and available settings for vehicle and on-board monitor. Access to the Integrated Owner's Manual.

MINI Connected Access to apps and vehicle functions. Additional apps and vehicle functions can be purchased from the MINI Connected Store.

Messages Access to all incoming messages in the vehicle, for instance Check Control messages.

Letters and numbers
Depending on the menu, you can switch between entering upper and lower case letters, numbers and characters:

Icon

Function

Change between capital and lower-case letters.

Insert blank space.

Use voice control.

Confirm entry.

Without navigation system Select the icon.
Entry comparison
When entering names and addresses, the choice is narrowed down with every letter entered and letters may be added automatically. Entries are continuously compared with data stored in the vehicle. Only those letters are offered during en-
try for which data is available.

Destination search: place names can be entered in all languages that are available on the Control Display.

Activating/deactivating the functions
Several menu items are preceded by a checkbox. The checkbox indicates whether the function is activated or deactivated. Selecting the menu item activates or deactivates the function.
Function is activated. Function is deactivated.

Status information

General information The status field can be found in the upper area of the Control Display. Status information is displayed in the form of symbols.

Radio

Icon

Meaning

HD Radio station is being received.

Satellite radio is switched on.

Telephone
Icon Meaning Incoming or outgoing call. Missed call. Signal strength of cellular network. Symbol flashes: network search. Cellular network is not available. Roaming is active. SMS text message received. Message received.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

AT A GLANCE

Central Information Display (CID)

Icon Meaning Reminder. Sending not possible.

Entertainment
Icon Meaning Bluetooth audio. USB audio interface. Mobile phone audio interface. Apple CarPlay.

Other symbols
Icon Meaning Check Control message. The sound output has been switched off. Encrypted connection not active. Request for the current vehicle position. Checking the current vehicle position.

Split screen

General information Additional information can be displayed on the right side of the split screen, for instance information from the trip computer. In the divided screen view, the so-called split screen, this information remains visible even when switching to another menu.

Switching the split screen on/off

Press the button.

2. "Split screen"

Selecting the display The display can be selected in menus which support the split screen function. 1. Tilt the Controller to the right until the
split screen is selected. 2. Press the Controller. 3. Select the desired setting. Specifying the number of displays It is possible to specify the number of displays. 1. Tilt the Controller to the right until the
split screen is selected. 2. Press the Controller. 3. "Personalize menu" 4. Select the desired setting. 5. Tilt the Controller to the left.
Control elements
Overview
1 Control Display with touchscreen 2 Controller with buttons
Control Display General information
To clean the Control Display, follow the care instructions, refer to page 296.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Central Information Display (CID)

AT A GLANCE

In the case of very high temperatures on the Control Display, for instance due to intense solar radiation, the brightness may be reduced down to complete deactivation. Once the temperature is reduced, for instance through shade or air conditioning, the normal functions are restored. Safety information
NOTICE Objects in the area in the front of the Control Display can shift and damage the Control Display. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Do not place objects in the area in front of the Control Display.

Controller
General information The buttons can be used to open the menus directly. The Controller can be used to select menu items and enter the settings.
Operation Turn to switch between menu items, for
example.

Switching on/off automatically The Control Display is switched on automatically when the vehicle is unlocked or as soon as the Control Display is needed for operation. In certain situations, the Control Display is switched off automatically, for instance if no operation is performed on the vehicle for several minutes.

Press to select a menu item, for example.

Switching on/off manually The Control Display can also be switched off manually.

Press the button.

2. "Turn off control display"

Press the Controller or any button on the Controller to switch it back on again.

With navigation system: tilt in four directions to switch between displays, for example.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

AT A GLANCE

Central Information Display (CID)

Without navigation system: tilt in two directions to switch between displays, for example.

Operating via the Controller
Opening the main menu
Press the button.

Buttons on the Controller

Button

Function Press once: calls up the main menu. Press twice: displays all menu items of the main menu. With navigation system: opens the Communication menu. With navigation system: opens the Media/Radio menu. Without navigation system: open the Audio menu. Without navigation system: opens the Telephone menu. With navigation system: opens destination input menu for navigation. With navigation system: opens navigation map. Press once: opens the previous display. Press and hold: open the menus used last. Goes to the Options menu.

The main menu is displayed. All Central Information Display (CID) functions can be called up via the main menu.

Adjusting the main menu

Press the button twice.

All menu items of the main menu are displayed.

2. Select a menu item.

3. To move the menu item to the desired position, tilt the Controller to the right or left.

Selecting menu items
Highlighted menu items can be selected.
1. Turn the Controller until the desired menu item is highlighted.
2. Press the Controller.

Adjusting menu contents
The display of menus "Media/Radio", "Communication" and "MINI Connected" can be adjusted, for instance to remove the entries of functions that are not used from the menu.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Central Information Display (CID)

AT A GLANCE

Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. Select the menu. 2. "Personalize menu" 3. Select desired menu contents to be dis-
played.
Dynamic contents
You can display dynamic contents within the menu items. The contents of the menu items update automatically, e.g., the active destination guidance in the navigation. Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. "My MINI" 2. "Contents of main menu"

The "Options" menu is displayed. The menu consists of various areas, for instance: "Split screen": screen settings. "Media/Radio": control options for the
selected main menu. "Save station": if applicable, further con-
trol options for the selected menu.

Entering letters and numbers

Input

1. Turn the Controller: select letters or numbers.

: confirm entry.

Changing between displays
After a menu item is selected, for instance "System settings", a new display appears. Tilt the Controller to the left.
The current display closes and the previous display is shown.

Press the button.

The previous display re-opens.

Tilt the Controller to the right.

The new display opens.

An arrow indicates that additional displays can be opened.

Opening recently used menus
The recently used menus can be displayed.
Press and hold this button. The recently used menus are displayed.

Going to the Options menu
Press the button.

Deleting Icon
or

Function Press the Controller: delete letters or number. Hold the Controller down: delete all letters or numbers.

Using alphabetical lists
For alphabetical lists with more than 30 entries, the letters for which there is an entry are displayed at the left edge.
1. Turn the Controller to the left or right quickly. All letters for which there are entries are displayed on the left edge.
2. Select the first letter of the desired entry. The first entry of the selected letter is displayed.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

AT A GLANCE

Central Information Display (CID)

Operation via touchscreen
General information
The Control Display is equipped with a touchscreen. Touch the screen with your fingers. Do not use any objects.
Opening the main menu
Tap on the icon.

The main menu is displayed. All Central Information Display (CID) functions can be called up via the main menu.

Adjusting the main menu

Tap on the icon.

2. Drag the menu item to the desired position on the right or left.

Selecting menu items
Tap the desired menu item.

Dynamic contents
You can display dynamic contents within the menu items. The contents of the menu items update automatically, e.g., the active destination guidance in the navigation. Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI" 2. "Contents of main menu"

Changing between displays
After a menu item is selected, a new display opens. An arrow indicates that additional displays can be opened. Swipe to the left. Tap arrow. The new display opens.
Entering letters and numbers

Input 1. Tap the icon on the touchscreen.
A keyboard is displayed on the Control Display. 2. Enter desired letters and numbers.
Deleting
Icon Function Tapping the icon: deletes the letter or number. Tapping and holding the icon all letters: deletes all letters or numbers.

Operating navigation map
The navigation map can be moved using the touchscreen.

Function

Operation

Enlarge/shrink Drag in or out with the

map.

fingers.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Central Information Display (CID)

Programmable memory buttons

General information
The Central Information Display (CID) functions can be stored on the programmable memory buttons and called up directly, for instance radio stations, navigation destinations, phone numbers and menu entries. Settings are stored for the driver profile currently used.

Storing a function
1. Select the function via the Central Information Display (CID).

Press and hold the desired but-

ton, until a signal sounds.

Executing a function
Press the button. The function will work immediately. This means, for instance that the number is dialed when a phone number is selected.

Displaying the key assignment
Touch buttons with finger. Do not wear gloves or use objects. The assignment of the buttons is displayed in the upper area of the Control Display.
Deleting the button assignments
1. Press buttons 1 and 6 simultaneously for approx. 5 seconds.
2. "OK"

AT A GLANCE

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

AT A GLANCE

Voice activation system

activation system. To set the language, refer to page 48. Always say commands in the language of the voice activation system.
Using the voice activation system
Activating the voice control system
Press the button on the steering wheel. Wait for the signal. Say the command.
This icon indicates that the voice control system is active. No other commands may be available. In this case, operate the function via the Central Information Display (CID).

General information
Functions that can only be used when the vehicle is stationary can only be operated via the voice activation system to a limited extent.
The system uses a special microphone on the driver's side.
>...< in the Owner's Manual denotes verbal instructions to use with the voice activation system.
Functional requirements
A language must be set via the Control Display that is supported by the voice

Terminating the voice control system
Press the button on the steering wheel or >Cancel<.
Possible commands
General information
Most menu items on the Control Display can be spoken as commands. Commands from other menus can also be spoken. You can also select list entries such as phone list entries via voice activation. Read

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Voice activation system

AT A GLANCE

these list entries out loud exactly as they are shown in the respective list.
Displaying possible commands
The following is displayed in the top area of the Control Display: Some possible commands for the current
menu. Some possible commands from other
menus. Status of the voice recognition. Encrypted connection is not availa-
ble.
Help on the voice activation system
>General information on voice control<: have information on the operating principle of the voice activation system read out loud.
>Help<: have help for the current menu read out loud.

Example: going to the sound settings

The commands of the menu items are spoken just as they are selected via the Controller. 1. Switch on the Entertainment sound out-
put, if needed.

Press the button on the steering

wheel.

3. >Media and radio<

4. >Tone<

Settings
Setting the voice control
You can set the system to use standard dialog or a short version. The short version of the voice control plays back short messages in abbreviated form. Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 3. "Language" 4. "Speech mode:" 5. Select the desired setting.
Activating voice recognition via the server
The voice recognition feature via the server provides a dictation function and a natural method of destination input while improving the quality of voice recognition. To use the functions, data is transmitted to a service provider via an encrypted connection and stored locally there. Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 3. "Language" 4. "Server speech recognition"
Adjusting the volume
Turn the volume button during the spoken instructions until the desired volume is set. The volume remains constant even if the
volume of other audio sources is changed. The volume is stored for the profile currently used.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

AT A GLANCE

Voice activation system

Information on Emergency Requests

If it was not possible to activate voice command response, the list of Bluetooth devices appears on the Control Display.

Do not use the voice activation system to initiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situations, the voice and vocal pitch can change. This can unnecessarily delay the establishment of a telephone connection. Instead, use the SOS button, refer to page 286, close to the interior mirror.

System limits
Certain noises can be detected and may lead to problems. Keep the doors, windows, and glass sunroof closed.
Noises from the front passenger or the rear seat bench can impair the system. Avoid making other noise in the vehicle while speaking.
Major language dialects can cause problems with the voice recognition feature. Speak loud and clear.

Using the voice activation system of the smartphone

A smartphone connected to the vehicle can be used via voice control. Activate voice command response on the smartphone for this purpose.

Press and hold the button on the

steering wheel for approx. 3 seconds.

Voice command response is activated on the smartphone.

Release the button.

If activation is successful, a confirmation appears on the Control Display.

Voice assistants from thirdparty providers

Concept
Some third-party providers provide digital voice assistants. Supported voice assistants can be used in the vehicle.

General information
Some of the functions are limited in the vehicle to prevent any impairment of safety while driving.

Functional requirements
If applicable, corresponding Connected Service subsequently purchased via MINI Connected Store.
Vehicle added in the MINI app. Third-party provider account and MINI
account connected in the MINI app. Smartphone connected to the vehicle via
Bluetooth audio.

Activation in the MINI app
Third-party assistants are set up in the MINI app. Follow the instructions in the app.

Activation in the vehicle

Press the button on the steering

wheel.

2. Wait for the signal.

3. Say the specific activation word of the third-party provider and the desired command.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Voice activation system
Information about the active function is displayed on the Control Display.
Malfunction
In case of a malfunction, switch off the engine and start the engine again.

AT A GLANCE

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

AT A GLANCE

General settings

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.
Setting the time
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 3. "Date and time" 4. "Time:" 5. Turn the Controller until the desired
hours are displayed. 6. Press the Controller. 7. Turn the Controller until the desired mi-
nutes are displayed. 8. Press the Controller.
Setting the time format
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 3. "Date and time" 4. "Time format:" 5. Select the desired setting. The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Setting the time zone
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 3. "Date and time" 4. "Time zone:" 5. Select the desired setting.

Date
Setting the date
Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 3. "Date and time"

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

General settings

AT A GLANCE

4. "Date:" 5. Turn the Controller until the desired day
is displayed. 6. Press the Controller. 7. Make the settings for the month and
year.
Setting the date format
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 3. "Date and time" 4. "Date format:" 5. Select the desired setting. The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Activating/deactivating the display of the current vehicle position
Concept
If vehicle tracking has been activated, the current vehicle position can be displayed in the MINI Connected app.
Activating/deactivating
Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. "My MINI" 2. "Vehicle settings" 3. "Data privacy" 4. "Vehicle tracking" 5. Select the desired setting.

Setting the units of measurement
You can set the units of measurement for some values, for example, consumption, distances and temperature. Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 3. "Units" 4. Select the desired menu item. 5. Select the desired setting. The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Activating/deactivating popups
For some functions, pop-ups are displayed automatically on the Control Display. Some of these pop-ups can be activated or deactivated. Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 3. "Pop-ups" 4. Select the desired setting. The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Control Display

Brightness
Via the Central Information Display (CID):

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

AT A GLANCE

General settings

1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 3. "Displays" 4. "Control display" 5. "Brightness at night" 6. Turn the Controller until the desired
brightness is set. 7. Press the Controller. The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used. Depending on the light conditions, the brightness settings may not be clearly visible.
Screensaver
If no entries are made via the Central Information Display (CID), a screensaver can be displayed after an adjustable time. Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 3. "Displays" 4. "Control display" 5. "Screensaver" 6. Select the desired setting. The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.
Instrument cluster with enhanced features: color world
Concept
The display of the display content can be configured individually, for instance in a harmonic color style.

General information
The setting of the color world effects the following display content: On-board monitor. Instrument cluster. Head-up Display. Depending on the equipment, the color world can be applied as basic display for the LED ring on the central instrument. LED ring on the central instrument cluster, refer to page 140.
Setting the color world
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 3. "Displays" 4. "Color scheme" 5. Select the desired setting.
Messages
Concept
The menu centrally displays all messages arriving in the vehicle in list form.
General information
The following messages can be displayed: Traffic messages. Communication messages, for example
e-mails, SMS text messages or reminders. Check Control messages. Messages on service notifications. Messages from the vehicle manufacturer. Messages are additionally displayed in the status field.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

General settings

AT A GLANCE

Retrieving messages
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "Notifications" 2. Select the desired notification. The menu in which the notification is displayed will open.

Deleting messages
All messages, except Check Control messages or messages from the vehicle manufacturer, can be deleted from the list. Check Control messages or messages from the vehicle manufacturer are displayed as long as they are relevant. Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "Notifications" 2. Select the desired message.

Press the button.

4. "Delete this notification" or "Delete all notifications"

Settings
The following settings can be adjusted: Select the applications, from which mes-
sages will be permitted. Sort the messages according to date or
priority. Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 3. "Notifications" 4. Select the desired setting.

Data protection
Data transfer
Concept The vehicle offers various functions which require data to be transferred to MINI or a service provider. The data transfer can be deactivated for some functions.
General information With data transfer deactivated, the respective function cannot be used. Only make these settings while stationary.
Activating/deactivating Follow the instructions on the Control Display. Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 3. "Data privacy" 4. Select the desired setting.
Deleting personal data in the vehicle
Concept Depending on the usage, the vehicle stores personal data, such as stored radio stations. This personal data can be permanently deleted via the Central Information Display (CID).
General information Depending on the vehicle equipment, the following data is deleted: Driver profile settings. Stored radio stations. Stored programmable memory buttons.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

AT A GLANCE

General settings

Travel and trip computer information. Music collection. Navigation, for instance stored destina-
tions. Phone book. Office data, for instance voice memos. Login accounts. Altogether, the deletion of the data can take up to 15 minutes.
Functional requirement Data can only be deleted while stationary.
Deleting data Note and follow the instructions on the Control Display. Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 3. "Data privacy" 4. "Delete personal data" 5. "Delete personal data" 6. "OK" 7. Exit and lock the vehicle. The deletion process takes 15 minutes to complete. If not all data was deleted, repeat the deletion.
Canceling deletion Start the engine to cancel deletion of the data.
Connections
Concept
Various connection types are available for using mobile devices in the vehicle. The

connection type to select depends on the mobile device and the desired function.

General information
The following overview shows possible functions and the suitable connection types for them. The scope of functions depends on the mobile device.

Function

Connection type

Making calls via the handsfree system. Using phone functions via the Central Information Display (CID). Using the smartphone Office functions.

Bluetooth.

Playing music from the smartphone or the audio player.

Bluetooth or USB.

Using compatible apps via Bluetooth the Central Information Dis- or USB. play (CID).

USB storage device:

USB.

Exporting and importing driver profiles.

Update the software.

Playing music.

Playing videos from the

USB.

smartphone or the USB de-

vice.

Using Apple CarPlay apps via the Central Information Display (CID) and voice operation.

Bluetooth and WLAN.

The following connection types require onetime pairing with the vehicle: Bluetooth. Apple CarPlay.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

General settings

AT A GLANCE

Paired devices are automatically recognized later on and connected to the vehicle.
Safety information
Warning Operating the integrated information systems and communication devices while driving can distract from traffic. It is possible to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Only use the systems or devices when the traffic situation allows. As warranted, stop and use the systems and devices while the vehicle is stationary.
Compatible devices
General information Malfunctions may occur with devices not listed or deviating software versions.
Displaying the vehicle identification number and software part number When looking for compatible devices, you may have to state the vehicle identification number and the software part number. These numbers can be displayed in the vehicle. Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 3. "Mobile devices" 4. "Settings" 5. "Bluetooth® info" 6. "System information" A software update, refer to page 58, can be performed.

Bluetooth connection
Functional requirements Compatible device, refer to page 53,
with Bluetooth interface. The vehicle key is in the vehicle. The device is ready for operation. Bluetooth is activated on the device and
in the vehicle, refer to page 53. Bluetooth presettings, such as visibility,
may be required on the device; refer to the owner's manual of the device.
Switching on Bluetooth Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 3. "Mobile devices" 4. "Settings" 5. "Bluetooth®"
Activating/deactivating telephone functions To use all supported functions of a mobile phone, the following functions must be activated prior to pairing. Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 3. "Mobile devices" 4. "Settings" 5. Select the desired setting:
"Office" Activate function to transmit short messages, e-mails, calendars, tasks, memos, and reminders to the vehicle. Costs can be incurred by transmitting all data to the vehicle.
"Contact images"

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

AT A GLANCE

General settings

Activate function to show the contact pictures.

Pairing the mobile device with the vehicle Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Mobile devices"

4. "Connect new device"

5. Select the functions for which the device will be used:

"Telephone"

"Bluetooth® audio"

"Apps"

"Apple CarPlay"

The vehicle's Bluetooth name is displayed on the Control Display.

6. On the mobile device, search for Bluetooth devices in the vicinity.

The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears on the mobile device display.

Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle.

7. Depending on the mobile device, a control number is displayed or the control number must be entered.

Compare the control number displayed on the Control Display with the control number on the display of the device.

Confirm the control number on the device and on the Control Display.

Enter and confirm the same control number on the device and via the Central Information Display (CID).

The device is connected and displayed in the device list.

If connection was not successful: Frequently Asked Questions, refer to page 54.

Frequently Asked Questions All requirements are met and all required steps were completed in the specified order. Despite that, the mobile device does not function as expected. In this case, the following explanations can help: Why could the mobile phone not be paired or connected? There are too many Bluetooth devices
connected to the mobile phone or vehicle. Delete Bluetooth connections with other devices. Delete all known Bluetooth connections from the device list on the mobile phone and start a new device search. The mobile phone is in power-save mode or has only a limited remaining battery life. Charge the mobile phone. Why does the mobile phone no longer react? The applications on the mobile phone do not function anymore. Switch the mobile phone off and on again. Possibly too high or too low ambient temperatures for mobile phone operation. Do not subject the mobile phone to extreme ambient temperatures. Why can phone functions not be used via the Central Information Display (CID)? The mobile phone may not be properly configured, for instance as Bluetooth audio device. Connect the mobile phone with the telephone or additional phone function. Why are no or not all telephone book entries displayed or why are they incomplete?

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

General settings

AT A GLANCE

Transmission of the telephone book entries is not yet complete.
It is possible that only the telephone book entries of the mobile phone or the SIM card are transmitted.
It may not be possible to display telephone book entries with special characters.
It may not be possible to transmit contacts from social networks.
The number of phone book entries to be stored is too high.
Data volume of the contact too large, for instance due to stored information such as memos. Reduce the data volume of the contact.
A mobile phone is only connected as an audio source. Reconfigure the mobile phone and connect it with the telephone or additional phone function.
How can the telephone connection quality be improved? The strength of the Bluetooth signal on
the mobile phone can be adjusted, depending on the mobile phone. Insert the mobile phone into the wireless charging tray. Adjust the volume of the microphone and loudspeakers separately. If all points in this list have been checked and the required function is still not available, contact the hotline, a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.
USB connection
General information The following mobile devices can be connected to the USB port: Mobile phones.

Audio devices with USB port, for instance MP3 players.
USB storage devices. Common file systems are supported. FAT32 and exFAT are the recommended formats.
A connected USB device will be supplied with charge current via the USB port if the device supports this. Follow the maximum charge current of the USB port. The following uses are possible on USB ports with data transfer: Exporting and importing driver profiles,
refer to page 71. Playing music files via USB audio. Playing videos via USB video. Loading of software updates, refer to
page 58. Follow the following when connecting: Do not use force when plugging the con-
nector into the USB port. Use a flexible adapter cable. Protect the USB device against mechani-
cal damage. Due to the large number of USB devices
available on the market, it cannot be guaranteed that every device is operable on the vehicle. Do not expose USB devices to extreme environmental conditions, such as very high temperatures; refer to the owner's manual of the device. Due to the many different compression techniques, proper playback of the media stored on the USB device cannot be guaranteed in all cases. To ensure proper transmission of the stored data, do not charge a USB device via the onboard socket, when it is connected to the USB port. Depending on how the USB device is being used, settings may be required on

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

AT A GLANCE

General settings

the USB storage device, refer to the owner's manual of the device. Not compatible USB devices: USB hard drives. USB hubs. USB memory card readers with multiple slots. HFS-formatted USB devices. Devices such as fans or lamps.
Functional requirement Compatible device, refer to page 53, with USB port.
Connecting the device Connect the USB device using a suitable adapter cable to a USB port, refer to page 216. The USB device is connected to the vehicle and displayed in the device list.
Apple CarPlay preparation
Concept CarPlay allows certain functions of a compatible Apple iPhone to be used via Siri voice operation and the Central Information Display (CID).
Functional requirements Compatible iPhone, refer to page 53.
iPhone 5 or later with iOS 7.1 or later. Corresponding mobile contract. Bluetooth, WLAN, and Siri voice opera-
tion are activated on the iPhone. Booking the MINI Connected service:
Apple CarPlay preparation. If necessary, the setting for mobile data
must be activated on the iPhone.

Switching on Bluetooth and CarPlay Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 3. "Mobile devices" 4. "Settings" 5. Select the following settings:
"Bluetooth®" "Apple CarPlay"
Pairing the iPhone with CarPlay Pairing an iPhone with the vehicle, refer to page 54, via Bluetooth Select CarPlay as the function:
"Apple CarPlay" The iPhone is connected to the vehicle and displayed in the device list, refer to page 57.
Operation For more information, refer to the Integrated Owner's Manual or the Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication.
Frequently Asked Questions All requirements are met and all required steps were completed in the specified order. Despite that, the mobile device does not function as expected. In this case, the following explanations can help: The iPhone has already been paired with Apple CarPlay. When a new connection is established, CarPlay can no longer be selected. Delete the iPhone concerned from the
device list.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

General settings

AT A GLANCE

On the iPhone, delete the vehicle concerned from the list of stored vehicles under Bluetooth and under WLAN.
Pair the iPhone as a new device. If the steps listed have been carried out and the required function is still not available: contact the hotline, a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.
Managing mobile devices
General information After one-time pairing, the devices are
automatically recognized and reconnected when the ignition is switched on. The data stored on the SIM card or in the mobile phone is transferred to the vehicle after recognition. For some devices, certain settings may be necessary, for instance authorization, see owner's manual of the device.
Displaying the device list All devices paired and/or connected with the vehicle are displayed in the device list. Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 3. "Mobile devices" A icon indicates, for which function a device is used. Icon Function
"Telephone" "Additional telephone" "Bluetooth® audio" "Apps" "Apple CarPlay"

Configuring the device Functions can be activated or deactivated for paired and connected devices. Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 3. "Mobile devices" 4. Select the desired device. 5. Select the desired setting. If a function is assigned to a device, the function will be deactivated where appropriate for a device that is already connected and the device will be disconnected.
Disconnecting the device The device's connection to the vehicle is disconnected. The device remains paired and can be connected again, refer to page 57. Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 3. "Mobile devices" 4. Select device. 5. "Disconnect device"
Connecting the device A disconnected device can be reconnected. Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 3. "Mobile devices" 4. Select device. 5. "Connect device" The functions that were assigned to the device before disconnecting are assigned to the device when it is reconnected. The func-

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

AT A GLANCE

General settings

tions may be deactivated on a device already connected.
Deleting the device Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 3. "Mobile devices" 4. Select device. 5. "Delete device" The device is disconnected and removed from the device list.
Swapping the telephone and additional telephone If two mobile phones are connected to the vehicle, the functions of the telephone and additional telephone can be switched. Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 3. "Mobile devices" 4. "Settings" 5. "Swap telephone/additional tel."
Software update
General information The vehicle supports a large number of mobile devices, for example mobile phones and MP3 players. Software updates are available for many of the supported devices. The vehicle is kept up-to-date via regular vehicle software updates. Contact a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop for information on available software updates.

Displaying the version of the installed software The software version installed in the vehicle is displayed. Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 3. "Software update" 4. "Show current version" If an update has been carried out before, select the desired version to display additional information.
Updating software via USB The software may only be updated when the vehicle is stationary. Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. Store the file for the software update in the main folder of a USB device.
2. Connecting USB device to the USB port. 3. "My MINI" 4. "System settings" 5. "Software update" 6. "Update software" 7. "USB" 8. "Install software" 9. "OK" 10. Wait for the update to complete. 11. Confirm system restart.
Restoring the software version You can restore the software to the version prior to the last update or to its factory settings. The software may only be restored when the vehicle is stationary. Via the Central Information Display (CID):

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

General settings
1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 3. "Software update" 4. "Restore software" 5. "Previous version"
The previous software version is restored. "Default software settings" The first software version is restored. 6. "Remove software" 7. "OK" 8. Wait for restore. 9. Confirm system restart.

AT A GLANCE

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

AT A GLANCE

Owner's Manual media

Supplementary Owner's Manuals
Also follow the Supplementary Owner's Manuals, which are included in addition to the onboard literature.
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
Concept
The Integrated Owner's Manual specifically describes features and functions found in the vehicle. The Integrated Owner's Manual can be displayed on the Control Display.

You can use the following media formats to call up the content in the Owner's Manual: Printed Owner's Manual, refer to
page 60. Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehi-
cle, refer to page 60.
Printed Owner's Manual
Concept
The printed Owner's Manual describes all standard, country-specific, and optional features offered with the series.

Selecting the Owner's Manual

Press the button.

2. "My MINI"

3. "Owner's Manual"

4. Select the desired method of accessing the contents.

Scrolling through the Owner's Manual
Turn the Controller, until the next or previous contents are displayed.

Context help

General information
The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, and Communication can be obtained as a printed book from the service center.

General information The section of the Owner's Manual relating to the function that is currently selected can be displayed directly.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Owner's Manual media

Opening via Central Information Display (CID) Change directly to the Options menu from the function on the Control Display:

Press the button.

2. "Owner's Manual"

Opening when a Check Control message is displayed Directly from the Check Control message on the Control Display:
"Owner's Manual"
Changing between a function and the Owner's Manual To switch from a function, for instance radio, to the Owner's Manual on the Control Display and to alternate between the two displays:

Press the button.

2. "Owner's Manual"

3. Select the desired page in the Owner's Manual.

Press the button again to return to

the last displayed function.

Press the button to return to the

page of the Owner's Manual displayed

last.

To alternate continuously between the last displayed function and the last displayed page of the Owner's Manual, repeat steps 4 & 5. Opens a new display every time.

AT A GLANCE

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

CONTROLS

Opening and closing

Vehicle features and options Safety Instructions

Warning The vehicle key has a button cell battery. Batteries or button cells can be swallowed and lead to serious or fatal injuries within two hours, for example, due to internal burns or chemical burns. There is an injury hazard or danger to life. Keep the vehicle key and batteries out of reach for children. Immediately seek medical help if there is any suspicion that a battery or button cell has been swallowed or is located in any part of the body.

General information
The vehicle is supplied with two vehicle keys with integrated key. Each vehicle key contains a replaceable battery, refer to page 65. Depending on the equipment and country version, various settings, refer to page 74, can be configured for the button functions. A personal driver profile, refer to page 71, for each vehicle key is stored in the vehicle. To provide information on maintenance recommendations, the service data is stored in the vehicle key, refer to page 277. To prevent possible locking in of the vehicle key, take the vehicle key with you when exiting the vehicle.

Warning People or animals in the vehicle can lock the doors from the inside and lock themselves in. In this case, the vehicle cannot be opened from the outside. There is a risk of injury. Take the vehicle key with you so that the vehicle can be opened from the outside.
Warning Unattended children or animals in the vehicle can cause the vehicle to move and endanger themselves and traffic, for instance due to the following actions: Pressing the Start/Stop button. Releasing the parking brake. Opening and closing the doors or
windows. Engaging selector lever position N. Using vehicle equipment.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Opening and closing

CONTROLS

There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exiting and lock the vehicle.
Overview
1 Unlocking 2 Locking 3 Unlocking the tailgate 4 Panic mode
Unlocking
Press the button on the vehicle key. Depending on the settings, refer to page 74, the following access points are unlocked. Driver's door and fuel filler flap.
Press the button on the vehicle key again to unlock the other vehicle access points. All doors, tailgate, and fuel filler flap. In addition, the following functions are executed: Unlocking is confirmed by the turn signals and the horn. This function must be activated in the settings, refer to page 74. The settings stored in the driver profile, refer to page 71, are applied.

The interior lights, refer to page 149, and the MINI logo projection are switched on, provided that the interior lights were not switched off manually.
Depending on the settings, the welcome light and pathway lighting, refer to page 146, are switched on.
The alarm system, refer to page 75, is switched off.
The light functions may depend on the ambient brightness.

Convenient opening
Press and hold the button on the vehicle key after unlocking. The windows and the glass sunroof are opened, as long as the button on the vehicle key is pressed.

Locking
1. Close the driver's door.

Press the button on the vehicle

key.

The following functions are executed:

All doors, the tailgate, and the fuel filler flap are locked.

Locking is confirmed by the turn signals and the horn. This function must be activated in the settings, refer to page 74.

The alarm system, refer to page 75, is switched on.

If the engine or ignition is still switched on when you lock the vehicle, the vehicle horn honks twice. In this case, the engine or ignition must be switched off by means of the Start/Stop button.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

CONTROLS

Opening and closing

With Comfort Access: convenient closing
Safety information
Warning With convenient closing, body parts can be jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the doors is clear during convenient closing.
Closing Press and hold the button on the vehicle key in the area close to the vehicle.
The windows and the glass sunroof are closed, as long as the button on the vehicle key is pressed.
Switch on interior lights and courtesy light
Press the button on the vehicle key with the vehicle locked. The MINI logo projection is also switched on. These functions are not available if the interior lights were switched off manually. The light functions may depend on the ambient brightness. After locking, wait 10 seconds before pressing the button again.
Tailgate
General information To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle, do not place the vehicle key in the cargo area. Depending on the vehicle equipment and country version, it is possible to specify

whether the tailgate can be unlocked with the vehicle key and how the vehicle doors will respond to this. To perform settings, refer to page 74. Safety information
Warning Body parts can be jammed when operating the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the tailgate is clear during opening and closing.
NOTICE The tailgate swings back and up when it opens. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Make sure that the area of movement of the tailgate is clear during opening and closing.
NOTICE Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the windows and heat conductors while driving. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Cover the edges and ensure that pointed objects do not hit the windows.
Opening Press and hold the button on the vehicle key for approx. 1 second.
The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung upward.
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find yourself in a dangerous situation.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Opening and closing

CONTROLS

Press the button on the vehicle key and hold for at least 3 seconds.
Briefly press the button on the vehicle key three times in succession.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Replacing the battery

3. Slide the integrated key in the cover of the battery compartment and raise the cover.

NOTE Improper batteries in the vehicle key can damage the vehicle key. There is a danger of damage to property. Always replace the discharged battery with a battery with the same voltage, the same size and the same specification.
1. Remove the integrated key from the vehicle key, refer to page 67.
2. Slide the integrated key into the opening and raise the cover. The battery compartment is accessible.

4. Push battery in arrow direction using a pointed object and lift it out.
5. Insert a type CR 2032 3V battery with the positive side facing up.
6. Insert lid and cover. 7. Push the integrated key into the vehicle
key until it engages. Have old batteries disposed of by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or specialist
workshop or take them to a collection point.

Additional vehicle keys
Additional vehicle keys are available from a service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.
Loss of vehicle keys
A lost vehicle key can be blocked and replaced by a dealer's service center or an-

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

CONTROLS

Opening and closing

other qualified service center or repair shop.
Malfunction

Starting the engine via emergency detection of the Vehicle key

General information A Check Control message is displayed. Vehicle key recognition by the vehicle may malfunction under the following circumstances: The battery of the vehicle key is dis-
charged. For replacing the battery, refer to page 65. Interference of the radio connection from transmission towers or other equipment with high transmitting power. Shielding of the vehicle key due to metal objects. Do not transport the vehicle key together with metal objects. Interference of the radio connection from mobile phones or other electronic devices in direct proximity to the vehicle key. Do not carry the vehicle key in close proximity to other electronic devices. Interference of radio transmission by a charging process of mobile devices, for instance charging of a mobile phone. The vehicle key is in direct proximity of the wireless charging tray. Place the vehicle key in a different location. In the case of interference, the vehicle can be unlocked and locked from the outside with the integrated key, refer to page 67.

It is not possible to start the engine if the vehicle key has not been detected. Proceed as follows in this case:
1. Hold the vehicle key against the mark on the steering column as shown. Pay attention to the display in the instrument cluster.
2. If the vehicle key is detected: Start the engine within 10 seconds.
If the vehicle key is not recognized, slightly change the position of the vehicle key and repeat the procedure.
Frequently Asked Questions
What precautions can be taken to be able to open a vehicle with an accidentally locked in vehicle key? The options provided by the Remote
Services of the MINI Connected app include the ability to lock and unlock a vehicle. This requires an active MINI Connected contract and the MINI Connected app must be installed on a smartphone. Unlocking the vehicle can be requested via the MINI Connected Call Center. An active MINI Connected contract is required.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Opening and closing

CONTROLS

Integrated key
General information
The driver's door can be locked and unlocked without the vehicle key using the integrated key.
Safety information

Removing

Warning Unlocking from the inside is only possible with special knowledge. Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehicle while being exposed to extreme temperatures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock the vehicle from the outside when there are people in it.
NOTICE The door lock is permanently joined with the door. The door handle can be moved. When pulling the door handle with the integrated key inserted, paint or the integrated key can be damaged. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Remove the integrated key before pulling the external door handle.

Press the button, arrow 1, and pull out the integrated key, arrow 2.
Locking/unlocking via the door lock
1. Remove lid on the door lock. To do this, slide the integrated key into the opening from below and remove the lid.
2. Unlock or lock the door lock using the integrated key.
The other doors must be unlocked or locked from the inside.
Alarm system
The alarm system is not switched on if the vehicle is locked with the integrated key. The alarm system is triggered when the door is opened, if the vehicle has been unlocked via the door lock.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

CONTROLS

Opening and closing

Buttons for the central locking system
General information
In the event of a severe accident, the vehicle is automatically unlocked. The hazard warning system and interior lights come on.
Overview

Back doors: pull twice on the door handle on the door to be opened; the first time unlocks the door, the second time opens it. The other doors remain locked.
Comfort Access
Concept
The vehicle can be accessed without operating the vehicle key. Carrying the vehicle key with you, e.g., in your pants pocket, is sufficient. The vehicle automatically detects the vehicle key when it is in close proximity or in the car's interior.

Buttons for the central locking system.
Locking
Press the button with the front doors closed. The fuel filler flap remains unlocked. The vehicle is not secured against theft when locking.
Unlocking
Press the button.

General information
Comfort Access supports the following functions: Unlocking and locking the vehicle. Convenient closing. Open the tailgate.
Functional requirements
To lock the vehicle, the vehicle key must be outside of the vehicle near the doors.
The next unlocking and locking cycle is not possible until after approx. 2 seconds.

Opening

Press button to unlock the doors

together, and then pull the door handle

above the armrest.

Front doors: pull the door handle on the door to open the door. The other doors remain locked.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Opening and closing

CONTROLS

Unlocking

Convenient closing Safety information

Warning With convenient closing, body parts can be jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the doors is clear during convenient closing.

On the driver's or front passenger's outer door handle, press the button. Depending on the settings, refer to page 74, only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap may be unlocked. Unlike when unlocking using the vehicle key, pressing the button on the outer door handle again does not unlock the other vehicle access points. Rather, the vehicle is locked again. If the vehicle was locked automatically after driving off or with the button of the central locking system from the inside, note the following: if a door on a locked vehicle is opened from the inside with the door opener, pressing the button on the outer door handle will first lock the vehicle again. To unlock, the button on the outer door handle must be pressed again.
Locking

Closing
Press and hold down the button on the driver's or front passenger's outer door handle. In addition to locking, the windows and glass sunroof will be closed.
To open the tailgate General information
If the tailgate is opened via Comfort Access, locked doors are not unlocked. To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle, do not place the vehicle key in the cargo area.

On the driver's or front passenger's outer door handle, press the button.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

CONTROLS

Opening and closing

Safety information Warning
Body parts can be jammed when operating the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the tailgate is clear during opening and closing.
NOTICE The tailgate swings back and up when it opens. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Make sure that the area of movement of the tailgate is clear during opening and closing.
NOTICE Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the windows and heat conductors while driving. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Cover the edges and ensure that pointed objects do not hit the windows.
Opening

Malfunction
Vehicle key recognition by the vehicle may malfunction under the following circumstances: The battery of the vehicle key is dis-
charged. For replacing the battery, refer to page 65. Interference of the radio connection from transmission towers or other equipment with high transmitting power. Shielding of the vehicle key due to metal objects. Do not transport the vehicle key together with metal objects. Interference of the radio connection from mobile phones or other electronic devices in direct proximity to the vehicle key. Do not carry the vehicle key in close proximity to other electronic devices. Wet or snowy conditions may disrupt the locking request recognition function on the door handles. In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lock the vehicle using the buttons of the vehicle key or use the integrated key, refer to page 67.

Press button next on tailgate. The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung upward.

Tailgate
General information
To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle, do not place the vehicle key in the cargo area. Depending on the vehicle equipment and country version, it is possible to specify whether the tailgate can be unlocked with the vehicle key and how the vehicle doors will respond to this. To perform settings, refer to page 74.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Opening and closing

CONTROLS

Safety information
Warning Body parts can be jammed when operating the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the tailgate is clear during opening and closing.
NOTICE The tailgate swings back and up when it opens. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Make sure that the area of movement of the tailgate is clear during opening and closing.
NOTICE Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the windows and heat conductors while driving. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Cover the edges and ensure that pointed objects do not hit the windows.

Press and hold the button on the

vehicle key for approx. 1 second.

Depending on the setting, the doors may also be unlocked. Unlocking using the vehicle key, refer to page 64.

The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung upward.

Opening from the inside
With Steptronic transmission: With the vehicle stationary, press the button in the driver's floor area. If the vehicle is locked, selector lever position P must be engaged first.

With manual transmission: With the vehicle stationary, press the button in the driver's floor area twice in quick succession.

Closing

Opening and closing Opening from the outside

Recessed grips on the interior trim of the tailgate can be used to conveniently pull down the tailgate.

Driver profiles

Without Comfort Access: unlock vehicle. With Comfort Access: unlock the vehicle or have the vehicle key with you. Press button next on tailgate.

Concept
In the driver profiles, individual settings for several drivers can be stored and called up again when required.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

CONTROLS

Opening and closing

General information
There are three driver profiles with which personal vehicle settings can be stored. Every vehicle key has been assigned one of these driver profiles. If the vehicle is unlocked using the vehicle key, the assigned personal driver profile will be activated. All settings stored in the driver profile are automatically applied. If several drivers use their own vehicle keys, the vehicle will apply the personal settings as it is being unlocked. These settings are also restored, if the vehicle has been used in the meantime by a person with a different vehicle key. Changes to the settings are automatically stored in the driver profile currently activated. If another driver profile is selected via the Central Information Display (CID), the settings stored in it will be applied automatically. The new driver profile is assigned to the vehicle key that is currently in use. There is an additional guest profile available that is not assigned to any vehicle key: it can be used to apply settings in the vehicle without changing the personal driver profiles.
Functional requirements
For the system to be able to identify the driver profile associated to a particular driver, the detected vehicle key must be clearly allocated to the driver. This is the case when: The driver is only carrying his or her
own vehicle key. The driver unlocks the vehicle. The driver gets into the vehicle through
the driver's door.

Settings
The settings, for instance for the following systems and functions, are stored in the active profile. The scope of storable settings depends on country and equipment. Unlocking and locking. Lights. Radio. Instrument cluster. Programmable memory buttons. Volumes, sound. Control Display. Climate control. Navigation. PDC Park Distance Control. Rearview camera. Head-up Display. MINI Driving Modes. Intelligent Safety.
Profile management
Selecting a driver profile Regardless of the vehicle key in use, a different driver profile may be activated. This allows you to call up personal vehicle settings, even if you did not unlock the vehicle with your own vehicle key. Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI" 2. "Driver profiles" 3. Select driver profile. 4. "OK" All settings stored in the selected driver
profile are automatically applied. The called-up driver profile is assigned
to the vehicle key being used at the time.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Opening and closing

CONTROLS

If the driver profile is already assigned to a different vehicle key, this driver profile will apply to both vehicle keys.
Using a guest profile The guest profile is for individual settings that are stored in none of the three personal driver profiles. Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI" 2. "Driver profiles" 3. "Drive off (guest)" 4. "OK" The guest profile cannot be renamed. It is not assigned to the vehicle key currently in use.
Renaming a driver profile A personal name can be assigned to the active driver profile to avoid confusion between the driver profiles. Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI" 2. "Driver profiles" 3. Select driver profile.
The driver profile marked with this icon can be renamed. 4. "Change driver profile name" 5. Enter profile name. 6. Select the icon.
Resetting a driver profile The settings of the driver profile currently in use are reset to their factory settings. Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI" 2. "Driver profiles" 3. Select driver profile.

The driver profile marked with this icon can be reset. 4. "Reset driver profile" 5. "OK"
Exporting driver profiles Most settings of the active driver profile can be exported. Exporting is helpful when storing and retrieving personal settings, for instance before delivering the vehicle to a workshop. The stored driver profiles can be taken into another vehicle. Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI" 2. "Driver profiles" 3. Select driver profile.
The driver profile marked with this icon can be exported. 4. "Export driver profile (USB)" Select USB storage device as needed.
Importing driver profiles Profiles stored on a USB device can be imported via the USB port. The existing settings of the active driver profile are overwritten with the settings of the imported driver profile. Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI" 2. "Driver profiles" 3. Select the driver profile to overwrite.
The driver profile marked with this icon can be overwritten. 4. "Import driver profile (USB)" Select USB storage device as needed. 5. Select the driver profile to be imported.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

CONTROLS

Opening and closing

Displaying driver profiles during start The driver profiles can be displayed at each startup to select the desired profile. Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. "My MINI" 2. "Driver profiles" 3. "Show driver profiles at startup"
System limits
A clear assignment between the vehicle key and driver may not be possible in the following cases, for example. The passenger unlocks the vehicle with
his or her own vehicle key, but another person is driving. The driver unlocks the vehicle via Comfort Access and has multiple vehicle keys with him or her. The driver changes, but the vehicle is not locked and unlocked. Multiple vehicle keys are located outside of the vehicle.
Settings
General information
Depending on the package and country version, various settings are available for the vehicle key functions. These settings are stored for the driver profile, refer to page 71, currently used.
Unlocking
Doors Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. "My MINI" 2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Doors/Key" 4. "Driver's door" or "All doors" 5. Select the desired setting:
"Driver's door only" Only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap are unlocked. Pressing again unlocks the entire vehicle.
"All doors" The entire vehicle is unlocked.
Tailgate Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI" 2. "Vehicle settings" 3. "Doors/Key" 4.
The text next to the icon indicates the current setting. 5. Select the desired setting: "Tailgate"
Only the tailgate is unlocked. "Tailgate and door(s)"
The tailgate and the doors are unlocked. "Tailgate opens after unlocking" The vehicle must be unlocked before the tailgate can be used with the vehicle key. "Button lock" It is not possible to use the tailgate via the vehicle key. Depending on the vehicle equipment and country version, this setting may not be offered.
Automatic locking
Via the Central Information Display (CID):

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Opening and closing

CONTROLS

1. "My MINI" 2. "Vehicle settings" 3. "Doors/Key" 4. Select the desired setting:
"Lock automatically" The vehicle locks automatically after a while if no door is opened after unlocking.
"Lock after starting to drive" The vehicle locks automatically after you drive off.
Automatic unlocking
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI" 2. "Vehicle settings" 3. "Doors/Key" 4. "Unlock at end of trip"
After the engine is switched off by pressing the Start/Stop button, the locked vehicle is automatically unlocked.
Confirmation signals from the vehicle
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI" 2. "Vehicle settings" 3. "Doors/Key" 4. Deactivate or activate the desired con-
firmation signals. "Flash for lock/unlock"
Unlocking is signaled by two flashes, locking by one. With alarm system: "Acoustic signal for lock/unlock" Unlocking is signaled by one honk of the horn.

Alarm system
General information
When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarm system reacts to the following changes: Unauthorized opening of a door, the
hood or the tailgate. Movements in the vehicle interior. Changes in the vehicle tilt, for instance,
during attempts at stealing a wheel or when towing the vehicle. Disconnected battery voltage. Improper use of the socket for Onboard Diagnosis. Locking the vehicle while a device is connected to the socket for the OBD Onboard-Diagnosis. For socket for the OBD Onboard Diagnosis, refer to page 278. The alarm system signals these changes visually and acoustically: Acoustic alarm: Depending on local regulations, the acoustic alarm may be suppressed. Visual alarm: By flashing of the hazard warning system and headlights, where required. Do not modify the system to ensure function of the alarm system.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

CONTROLS

Opening and closing

Overview
Indicator light on the interior mirror.
Switching on/off
The alarm system is switched on or off as soon as the vehicle is locked with the vehicle key or unlocked or locked via Comfort Access.
Opening the doors with the alarm system switched on
The alarm system is triggered when a door is opened if the door was unlocked using the integrated key in the door lock. Switching off the alarm, refer to page 77.
Opening the tailgate with the alarm system switched on
The tailgate can be opened even when the alarm system is switched on. After the tailgate is closed, it is locked and monitored again provided the doors are locked. The hazard warning system flashes once.
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find yourself in a dangerous situation.
Press the button on the vehicle key and hold for at least 3 seconds.

Briefly press the button on the vehicle key three times in succession.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Signals of the indicator light
The indicator light flashes briefly every 2 seconds: The alarm system is switched on.
Indicator light flashes for approx. 10 seconds, then it flashes briefly every 2 seconds: Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor are not active, as doors, hood, or tailgate are not correctly closed. Correctly closed access points are secured. Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor are not active, as doors, hood, or trunk lid are not correctly closed. Correctly closed access points are secured. When the still open access points are closed, the interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor will be switched on.
The indicator light goes out after unlocking: The vehicle has not been tampered with.
The indicator light flashes after unlocking until the engine ignition is switched on, but no longer than approx. 5 minutes: An alarm has been triggered.
Tilt alarm sensor
The tilt of the vehicle is monitored. The alarm system responds in situations such as attempts to steal a wheel or when the vehicle is towed.
Interior motion sensor
The windows and the glass sunroof must be closed for the system to function properly.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Opening and closing

CONTROLS

Avoiding unintentional alarms

Power windows

General information The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor can trigger an alarm, although no unauthorized action occurred. Possible situations for an unwanted alarm: In automatic car washes. In duplex garages. During transport on trains carrying ve-
hicles, at sea or on a trailer. With animals in the vehicle. When the vehicle is locked after start of
fueling. The tilt alarm sensor and the interior motion sensor can be switched off in such situations.
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
Press the button on the vehicle key within 10 seconds as soon as the vehicle is locked. The indicator light lights up for approx. 2 seconds and then continues to flash. The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor are switched off until the vehicle is locked again.

General information
If an accident of a certain severity occurs, the windows are automatically closed except a gap.
Safety information
Warning When operating the windows, body parts and objects can be jammed. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the windows is clear during opening and closing.
Overview On 3-door models

Switching off the alarm
Unlock the vehicle with the vehicle key. Unlock the vehicle with the integrated
key and switch on the ignition using the emergency detection of the vehicle key, refer to page 66. With Comfort Access: if you have the vehicle key with you, unlock the vehicle using the button on the driver's side or passenger side door.

Power windows

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

CONTROLS

Opening and closing

On 5-door models

Closing via Comfort Access, refer to page 69.

Jam protection system

Power windows Safety switch

Concept The jam protection prevents objects or body parts becoming jammed between the door frame and window while a window is being closed.
General information If resistance or a blockage is detected while a window is being closed, the closing action is interrupted.

Opening

Safety information

Press the switch to the resistance

point.

The window opens while the switch is being held.

Press the switch beyond the resist-

ance point.

The window opens automatically. Pressing the switch again stops the motion.

Convenient opening with the vehicle key, refer to page 63.

Closing

Pull the switch to the resistance

point.

The window closes while the switch is being held.

Pull the switch beyond the resist-

ance point.

The window closes automatically if the door is closed. Pulling the switch again stops the motion.

Convenient closing with the vehicle key, refer to page 64.

Warning Accessories on the windows such as antennas can impact jam protection. There is a risk of injury. Do not install accessories in the area of movement of the windows.

Closing without the jam protection system In case of danger from the outside or if ice might prevent normal closing, proceed as follows:

Pull the switch past the resistance

point and hold it there.

The window closes with limited jam protection. If the closing force exceeds a specific threshold, closing is interrupted.

Pull the switch past the resistance

point again within approx. 4 seconds

and hold it there.

The window closes without jam protection.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Opening and closing

CONTROLS

On 5-door models: safety switch
General information The safety switch can be used to prevent children, for instance from opening and closing the rear windows using the switches in the rear. If an accident of a certain severity occurs, the safety function is switched off automatically.

During initialization, the affected window closes without jam protection.
Warning When operating the windows, body parts and objects can be jammed. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the windows is clear during opening and closing.

Switching on/off
Press the button. The LED lights up if the safety function is switched on.

1. Open the affected window completely.

Pull the switch to the resistance

point and hold.

The window closes.

Malfunction
General information In certain situations a window can only be operated to a limited extent. After a power failure during the opening
or closing process, the a window can only be operated to a limited extent. The system must be initialized in this case. The power window motors are equipped with overheating protection. If a window is opened and closed several times within a short period of time, the overheating protection switches the motor off temporarily. Depending on the degree of overheating, it may only be possible to close the window or it may not be possible to operate it at all. In this case: allow the power window motor to cool down.
Initializing the system The system can be initialized when the vehicle is stationary and the engine is running.

Continue holding the switch pulled

to the resistance point.

The window opens and closes once or twice after approx. 15 seconds, depending on the vehicle's equipment.

4. Release switch.

Panoramic glass sunroof
General information
In the event of a severe accident, the glass sunroof is automatically closed.
Safety information
Warning Body parts can be jammed when operating the glass sunroof. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the glass sunroof is clear during opening and closing.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

CONTROLS

Opening and closing

Overview

Comfort position
In some models, the wind noises in the car's interior are lowest when the glass sunroof is not fully open. In these models, the automatic function initially only opens the glass sunroof up to this comfort position. Pressing the switch again opens the glass sunroof fully.

Closing glass sunroof

Tilting the glass sunroof
Press back the switch up to or beyond the resistance point and release it. The glass sunroof is raised.
Opening glass sunroof
When the glass sunroof is closed Press the switch back beyond the resistance point and release it twice. The glass sunroof is opened. Pressing the switch again
stops the motion.
With the glass sunroof completely raised
Slide switch back to the resistance point and hold. The glass sunroof is opened as long as the switch is pressed.
Press the switch back beyond the resistance point and release it. The glass sunroof is opened. Pressing the switch again stops the motion.

With the glass sunroof open Slide switch forward to the resistance point and hold. The glass sunroof is closed as long as the switch is pressed and stops in the raised position.
Press the switch forward beyond the resistance point and release it. The glass sunroof is closed and stops in the raised position. Pressing the switch again stops the motion.
Press the switch forward beyond the resistance point and release it twice. The glass sunroof is closed. Pressing the switch again stops the motion.
With the glass sunroof completely raised
Press the switch forward beyond the resistance point and release it. The glass sunroof is closed.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Opening and closing

CONTROLS

Opening/closing the sun protection

2. Push the switch forward again past the resistance point and hold until the glass sunroof closes without jam protection. Make sure that the closing area is clear.

Use the handle to slide the sun protection into the desired position.
Jam protection system

Initializing after a power interruption
After a power failure during the opening or closing process, the glass sunroof can only be operated to a limited extent. The system must be initialized in this case. MINI recommends having this work performed only by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Concept The jam protection prevents objects or body parts from becoming jammed between the roof and glass sunroof while the glass sunroof is closing.

General information If resistance or a blockage is detected while the glass sunroof is being closed, the closing action is interrupted. The glass sunroof opens slightly.

Closing without the jam protection system If there is an external danger, proceed as follows:

1. Push the switch forward past the resistance point and hold it. The glass sunroof closes with limited jam protection. If the closing force exceeds a specific threshold, closing is interrupted.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

CONTROLS

Seats, mirrors and steering wheel

Warning With a backrest inclined too far to the rear, the efficacy of the safety belt can no longer be ensured. There is a risk of sliding under the safety belt in an accident. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Adjust the seat prior to starting the trip. Adjust the backrest so that it is in the most upright position as possible and do not adjust again while driving.

Sitting safely
An ideal seat position that meets the needs of the occupants can make a vital contribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving. In the event of an accident, the correct seat position plays an important role. Follow the information in the following chapters: Seats, refer to page 82. Safety belts, refer to page 85. Head restraints, refer to page 87. Airbags, refer to page 151.

Warning There is a risk of jamming when moving the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the seat is clear prior to any adjustment.
Adjusting seats Overview

Front seats
Safety information
Warning Seat setting while driving can lead to unexpected movements of the seat. Vehicle control could be lost. There is a risk of accident. Only adjust the seat on the driver's side when the vehicle is stationary.

1 Forward/backward 2 Thigh support 3 Height 4 Backrest tilt

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Seats, mirrors and steering wheel

CONTROLS

Forward/backward

Backrest tilt

Warning Unexpected movements of the seat while driving may occur if the seat is unlocked. Vehicle control could be lost. There is a risk of accident. After adjusting, move the seat forward or back slightly, making sure the seat engages properly.

Pull the lever, and apply your weight to the backrest or lift it off, as necessary.

Pull the lever and slide the seat in the desired direction.

Lumbar support The curvature of the seat backrest can be adjusted in a way that it supports the lumbar region of the spine. The lower back and the spine are supported for upright posture.

Height

Turn the wheel in order to increase or decrease the curvature. Pull the lever up or press it down as often as needed to reach the desired height.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

CONTROLS
Thigh support

Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
gages correctly by slightly moving forward and back.
Fold the seat backrest forward 1. Pull lever up to the stop.

Pull the lever at the front of the seat and adjust the thigh support.

In 3-door models: entering the rear Safety information
Warning There is a risk of jamming when moving the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the seat is clear prior to any adjustment.
Warning Unexpected movements of the seat while driving may occur if the seat is unlocked. Vehicle control could be lost. There is a risk of accident. After adjusting, move the seat forward or back slightly, making sure the seat engages properly.

2. Fold the seat backrest forward. 3. Push the seat forward.
Original position The driver's seat features a mechanical memory function for forward/back and backrest adjustment. 1. Push the seat back into the original po-
sition. 2. Fold back the backrest to lock the seat. If the backrest is folded back when the seat is not yet in the original position, the seat engages in the current position. In this case, manually adjust longitudinal direction, refer to page 83.

Warning Unexpected movements of the rear seat backrest while driving may occur if the rear seat backrest is unlocked. Vehicle control could be lost. There is a risk of injury. Fold back and lock the backrests before driving. Make sure the backrest en-

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Seats, mirrors and steering wheel

CONTROLS

Front seat heating Overview
Seat heating
Switching on Press the button once for each temperature level.
The maximum temperature is reached when three LEDs are lit. If the trip is continued within approx. 15 minutes after a stop, seat heating is switched on automatically with the temperature selected last. When GREEN Mode is activated, refer to page 236, the heating output is reduced. Switching off
Press and hold the button until the LEDs go out.
Safety belts
General information
The vehicle is fitted with four or five safety belts to ensure occupants' safety. However, they can only unfold their protective effect when adjusted correctly. Always make sure that safety belts are being worn by all occupants before driving off.

Although airbags enhance safety by providing added protection, they do not replace safety belts. If needed, disengage the safety belt in the rear from the belt buckle on the side. All belt fastening points are designed to achieve the best possible protective effect of the safety belts with proper use of the safety belts and correct seat setting. Follow notes on sitting safely, refer to page 82. The two outer safety belt buckles of the rear seat are intended for the persons sitting on the left and right. The center safety belt buckle of the rear seat is intended for the person sitting in the middle.
Safety information
Warning Use of a safety belt to buckle more than one person will potentially defeat the ability of the safety belt to serve its protective function. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not allow more than one person to wear a single safety belt. Infants and children are not allowed on an occupant's lap, but must be transported and secured in designated child restraint systems.
Warning The efficacy of safety gear, including safety belts, can be limited or lost when safety belts are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly fastened safety belt can cause additional injuries, for instance in the event of an accident, braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that all occupants are wearing safety belts correctly.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

CONTROLS

Seats, mirrors and steering wheel

Buckling the safety belt
1. Guide the safety belt slowly over shoulder and hip to put it on.
2. Insert the tongue plate into the safety belt buckle. The safety belt buckle must engage audibly.

Warning The efficacy of safety gear, including safety belts, may not be fully functional or fail in the following situations: The safety belts or safety belt buckles
are damaged, soiled, or changed in any other way. Belt tensioners or belt retractors were modified. Safety belts can be imperceptibly damaged in the event of an accident. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not modify safety belts, safety belt buckles, belt tensioners, belt retractors or belt anchors and keep them clean. Have the safety belts checked after an accident at the dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.
Correct use of safety belts
Wear the safety belt twist-free and tight to your body over your lap and shoulders.
Wear the safety belt deep on your hips over your lap. The safety belt may not press on your stomach.
Do not rub the safety belt against sharp edges, or guide it or jam it in across hard or fragile objects.
Avoid thick clothing. Re-tighten the safety belt frequently up-
ward around your upper body.

Unbuckling the safety belt
1. Hold the safety belt firmly. 2. Press the red button in the belt buckle. 3. Guide the safety belt back into its roll-
up mechanism.
Safety belt reminder for driver's seat and front passenger seat
Display in the instrument cluster The indicator light lights up and a signal sounds. Make sure that the safety belts are positioned correctly.
The safety belt reminder can also be activated if objects are placed on the front passenger seat.
Safety belt reminder for rear seats
General information The safety belt reminder is automatically activated each time the engine starts. The safety belt reminder is also activated when a passenger unbuckles a rear seat safety belt during the trip.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Seats, mirrors and steering wheel

CONTROLS

Display in the instrument cluster The indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates after the engine is started. Icon Description
Green: the safety belt is buckled on the corresponding rear seat.
Red: the safety belt is not buckled on the corresponding rear seat.

Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
Do not hang objects, for instance clothes hangers, directly on the head restraint.
Only use accessories that have been determined to be safe for attachment to a head restraint.
Do not use any accessories, for instance pillows, while driving.

Front head restraints
Safety information
Warning Removal or incorrect adjustment of head restraints can cause injuries in the head and neck area. There is a risk of injury. Before driving, install the removed
head restraints on the occupied seats. Adjust the head restraint so its center
supports the back of the head at as close to eye level as possible. Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is as close as possible to the back of the head. Adjust the distance via the backrest tilt as needed.
Warning Body parts can be jammed when moving the head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement is clear when moving the head restraint.
Warning Objects on the head restraint reduce the protective effect in the head and neck area. There is a risk of injury.

Adjusting the height: John Cooper Works sport seat
The height of the head restraints cannot be set.
Adjusting the height
To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and push the head restraint down.
To raise: push the head restraint up. After setting the height, make sure that the head restraint engages correctly.
Removing: John Cooper Works sport seat
The head restraints cannot be removed.
Removing
Only remove the head restraint if no one will be sitting in the seat in question.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

CONTROLS

Seats, mirrors and steering wheel

Warning Body parts can be jammed when moving the head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement is clear when moving the head restraint.

1. If necessary, fold the rear seat backrest forward.
2. Pull head restraint up as far as possible. 3. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the
head restraint out completely.
Installing
Proceed in the reverse order to install the head restraint.
Rear head restraints
Safety information
Warning Removal or incorrect adjustment of head restraints can cause injuries in the head and neck area. There is a risk of injury. Before driving, install the removed
head restraints on the occupied seats. Adjust the head restraint so its center
supports the back of the head at as close to eye level as possible. Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is as close as possible to the back of the head. Adjust the distance via the backrest tilt as needed.

Warning Objects on the head restraint reduce the protective effect in the head and neck area. There is a risk of injury. Do not use seat or head restraint cov-
ers. Do not hang objects, for instance
clothes hangers, directly on the head restraint. Only use accessories that have been determined to be safe for attachment to a head restraint. Do not use any accessories, for instance pillows, while driving.
Adjusting the height
To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and push the head restraint down.
To raise: push the head restraint up. After setting the height, make sure that the head restraint engages correctly.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Seats, mirrors and steering wheel

CONTROLS

Fold down

Mirrors

To fold down: press the button, arrow 1, and press down the head restraint, arrow 2.
Forward: fold the head restraint toward the front as far as it will go. Make sure that the head restraint engages correctly.
Removing
Only remove the head restraint if no one will be sitting in the seat in question.

Exterior mirrors General information
The mirror on the front passenger side is more curved than the driver's side mirror. Safety information
Warning Objects reflected in the mirror are closer than they appear. The distance to the traffic behind could be incorrectly estimated, for instance while changing lanes. There is a risk of accident. Estimate the distance to the traffic behind by looking over your shoulder.
Overview

1. Fold down the rear seat backrest, refer to page 226, in question.
2. Pull head restraint up against the resistance.
3. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the head restraint out completely.
Installing
Proceed in the reverse order to install the head restraint.

1 Adjusting 2 Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Mon-
itor 3 Folding in and out
Selecting a mirror To change over to the other mirror: Slide the switch.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

CONTROLS

Seats, mirrors and steering wheel

Adjusting electrically
Press the button. The mirror movement follows the button movement.

Interior mirror, manually dimmable Flip lever

Malfunction In case of an electrical malfunction, adjust the mirror by pressing the edges of the mirror glass.

Automatic heating Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated as needed and when the ignition is switched on.
Automatic dimming feature The exterior mirror on the driver's side is automatically dimmed. Photocells in the car's interior mirror, refer to page 91, are used to control this.

To reduce the blinding effect of the interior mirror, flip the lever forward. Turn button

Automatic Curb Monitor, exterior mirror

Concept If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass on the front passenger side is tilted downward. This improves your view of the curb and other low-lying obstacles when parking, for instance.

Turn the button to reduce the blinding effect by the interior mirror.

Activating

slide the switch to the driver's

side mirror position.

2. Engage selector lever position R.

Deactivating Slide the switch to the passenger's side mirror position.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
Interior mirror, automatic dimming Adjusting feature Overview

CONTROLS

Photocells are used for control: In the mirror glass. On the back of the mirror.
Functional requirements Keep the photocells clean. Do not cover the area between the inte-
rior mirror and the windshield.

1. Fold the lever down. 2. Move the steering wheel to the prefer-
red height and angle to suit your seat position. 3. Fold the lever back up.
Heated steering wheel
Overview

Steering wheel
Safety information
Warning Steering wheel adjustments while driving can lead to unexpected steering wheel movements. Vehicle control could be lost. There is a risk of accident. Adjustng the steering wheel while the vehicle is stationary only.

Heated steering wheel
Switching on/off Press the button.
On: the LED lights up. Off: the LED goes out. If the trip is resumed within approx. 15 minutes after an intermediate stop, the heated steering wheel switches on automatically if the function was switched on at the end of the last trip.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

CONTROLS

Transporting children safely

Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.
The right place for children
Safety information
Warning Unattended children or animals in the vehicle can cause the vehicle to move and endanger themselves and traffic, for instance due to the following actions: Pressing the Start/Stop button. Releasing the parking brake. Opening and closing the doors or
windows. Engaging selector lever position N. Using vehicle equipment. There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exiting and lock the vehicle.

Warning A heated vehicle may result in death to persons, especially children, or animals. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not leave persons, especially children, or animals unattended in the vehicle.
Warning Exposure to intense sunlight can cause child restraint systems and their components to become very hot. Persons may sustain burn injuries when touching the hot components. There is a risk of injury. Do not expose the child restraint system to direct sunlight or cover where necessary. If necessary, let the child restraint system cool down before transporting a child. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle.
Transport children in the rear seat General information
Accident research shows that the safest place for children is in the rear seat. Children younger than 13 years of age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm should be transported in the rear seat in suitable child restraint systems designed for the age, weight and size of the child. Children 13 years of age or older must wear a safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint system can no longer be used due to their age, weight, or size.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Transporting children safely

CONTROLS

Safety information
Warning The safety belt cannot be fastened correctly on children shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm without suitable additional child restraint systems. The efficacy of safety gear, including safety belts, can be limited or lost when safety belts are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly fastened safety belt can cause additional injuries, for instance in the event of an accident, braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Secure children shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm using suitable child restraint systems.
Children on the front passenger seat General information
Before using a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, ensure that the front, knee, and side airbags on the front passenger side are deactivated. For automatic deactivation of front-seat passenger airbags, refer to page 153. Safety information
Warning Active front-seat passenger airbags can injure a child in a child restraint system when the airbags are activated. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the frontseat passenger airbags are deactivated and that the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator light lights up.

Warning The stability of the child restraint system is limited or compromised with incorrect seat setting or improper installation of the child seat. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that the child restraint system fits securely against the backrest. If possible, adjust the backrest tilt for all affected backrests and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats and backrests are securely engaged or locked. If possible, adjust the height of the head restraints or remove them.
Installing child restraint systems
General information
Pay attention to the specifications of the child restraint system manufacturer when selecting, installing, and using child restraint systems. In order to facilitate the installation of a back-facing child restraint system in the rear: Move the front passenger seat as far up as possible before folding down the backrest.
Safety information
Warning The protective effect of child restraint systems and their fastening systems which have been damaged or exposed to an accident can be limited or lost. A child cannot be properly restrained in the event of an accident, braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

CONTROLS

Transporting children safely

Do not use child restraint systems which have been damaged or exposed to an accident. If a child restraint system and its fastening system has been damaged or exposed to an accident, have these systems checked and replaced by the dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.
Warning The stability of the child restraint system is limited or compromised with incorrect seat setting or improper installation of the child seat. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that the child restraint system fits securely against the backrest. If possible, adjust the backrest tilt for all affected backrests and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats and backrests are securely engaged or locked. If possible, adjust the height of the head restraints or remove them.

that the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator light lights up.
Before installing a child restraint system in the front passenger seat, make sure that the front, knee and side airbags on the front passenger side are deactivated. Deactivate the front-seat passenger airbags automatically, refer to page 153.
Seat position and height After installing a child restraint system, move the front passenger seat as far back as possible and adjust its height to the highest and thus best possible position for the belt and to offer optimal protection in the event of an accident. If the upper anchorage of the safety belt is located in front of the belt guide of the child seat, move the front passenger seat carefully forward until the best possible belt guide position is reached.
Child seat security

On the rear seats
In order to facilitate the installation of a back-facing child restraint system: Move the front passenger seat as far up as possible before folding down the backrest.
On the front passenger seat
Deactivating airbags
Warning Active front-seat passenger airbags can injure a child in a child restraint system when the airbags are activated. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the frontseat passenger airbags are deactivated and

The rear safety belts and the front passenger safety belt can be permanently locked to fasten child restraint systems.
Locking the safety belt 1. Pull out the belt strap completely. 2. Secure the child restraint system with
the safety belt.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Transporting children safely

CONTROLS

3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in and pull it tight against the child restraint system. The safety belt is disabled.
Unlocking the safety belt 1. Unbuckle the safety belt buckle. 2. Remove the child restraint system. 3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in com-
pletely.
LATCH child restraint fixing system
General information
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Children. Pay attention to the operating and safety information from the child restraint system manufacturer when installing and using LATCH child restraint fixing systems.
Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors
General information The lower anchors may be used to attach the CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child and CRS weight of 65 lbs/30 kg when the child is restrained by the internal harnesses.
Safety information
Warning If the LATCH child restraint fixing systems are not correctly engaged, the protective effect of the LATCH child restraint fixing system is limited. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that the lower anchors are securely engaged

and that the LATCH child restraint fixing system fits securely against the backrest.

Warning The attachment points for child restraint systems in the vehicle are intended for attaching child restraint systems only. When other objects are mounted, the anchors can be damaged. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Attach only child restraint systems at the corresponding attachment points.

Position Icon

Meaning
The corresponding icon shows the mounts for the lower LATCH anchors. Seats equipped with lower anchors are marked with a pair, (2), of LATCH symbols. For vehicles equipped with a middle seat: It is not recommended to use the inner lower anchors of standard outer LATCH positions to fasten a child restraint system on the middle seat. Use the vehicle safety belt instead for the middle seat.

Before installing LATCH child restraint fixing systems
Pull the safety belt away from the area of the child restraint system.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

CONTROLS

Transporting children safely

Assembly of LATCH child restraint fixing systems
1. Install child restraint system, see manufacturer's information.
2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are properly engaged.
Child restraint systems with tether strap
Safety information

Anchors The respective icon shows the anchor for the upper retaining strap. Seats with an upper top tether are
marked with this icon. It can be found on the rear seat backrest or the rear window shelf.
Routing the retaining strap

Warning If the upper retaining strap is incorrectly used for the child restraint system, the protective effect is reduced. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the upper retaining strap does not run over sharp edges and is not twisted as it passes the upper anchor.
Warning If the rear backrest is not locked, the protective effect of the child restraint system is limited or there is none. In certain situations, for instance braking maneuvers or in case of an accident, the rear backrest can fold forward. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that the rear backrests are locked.
Warning The attachment points for child restraint systems in the vehicle are intended for attaching child restraint systems only. When other objects are mounted, the anchors can be damaged. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Attach only child restraint systems at the corresponding attachment points.

1 Direction of travel 2 Head restraint 3 Hook for upper retaining strap 4 Anchor 5 Seat backrest 6 Upper retaining strap
Attaching the upper retaining strap to the anchor 1. Raise the head restraint, if needed. 2. On the rear seat: Guide the upper retain-
ing strap between or along both sides of the supports of the head restraint to the anchor. 3. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to the anchor on the rear seat. 4. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it down.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Transporting children safely
ON 5-door models: Locking the doors and windows
Doors

CONTROLS

Push the locking lever on the rear doors up. The door can now be opened from the outside only.
Safety switch for the rear
Press the button on the driver's door if children are being transported in the rear. This locks various functions so that they cannot be operated from the rear: safety switch, refer to page 79.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

CONTROLS
Driving

Driving

Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.
Start/Stop button
Concept
Pressing the Start/Stop button switches the ignition on or off and starts the engine. Steptronic transmission: the engine starts in selector lever position P or N with the brake pedal pressed when you press the Start/Stop button. Manual transmission: the engine starts with the clutch pedal pressed when the Start/ Stop button is pressed.
Ignition on
Manual transmission: press the Start/Stop button without stepping on the clutch pedal. Steptronic transmission: press the Start/ Stop button, but do not press on the brake pedal at the same time. All vehicle systems are ready for operation. Most of the indicator/warning lights in the instrument cluster light up for a varied length of time.

To save battery power when the engine is off, switch off the ignition and any unnecessary electrical consumers.
Ignition off
Manual transmission: press the Start/Stop button again without stepping on the clutch pedal. Steptronic transmission: shift to selector lever position P, press the Start/Stop button again without stepping on the brake. All indicator lights in the instrument cluster go out. To save battery power when the engine is off, switch off the ignition and any unnecessary electrical consumers.
Safety measures The ignition is switched off automatically in the following situations while the vehicle is stationary and the engine is off: When locking the vehicle, even if the
low beams are switched on. Shortly before the battery is discharged
completely, so that the engine can still be started. This function is only available when the low beams are switched off. When opening or closing the driver door, if the driver's safety belt is unbuckled and the low beams are switched off. While the driver's safety belt is unbuckled with driver's door open and low beams off. When the front doors are opened if there is no other person sitting in the front seats.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Driving

CONTROLS

The low beams switch to parking lights after some minutes of no use.
Steptronic transmission: when switching off the ignition, the selector lever position P is engaged automatically if the selector lever position R, D or M/S is engaged.

Shortly before the battery is discharged completely, so that the engine can still be started.
Starting the engine

Radio-ready state

Safety information

General information In the radio-ready state, certain electrical consumers remain ready for operation.
Activating With the engine running, press the Start/ Stop button. If the engine is not running and the ignition is switched on: the system automatically activates radio-ready state when the door is opened if the lights are switched off or the daytime running lights are switched on. Radio-ready state remains active if, for instance the ignition is automatically switched off for the following reasons: Opening or closing the driver's door. Unfastening of the driver's safety belt. When automatically switching from low
beams to parking lights.
Switching off automatically The radio-ready state is switched off automatically in the following situations: If the driver's or front passenger door is
opened when exiting the vehicle, with the engine switched off manually. If the ignition is switched off manually with the Start/Stop button. After approx. 8 minutes. When the vehicle is locked using the central locking system.

DANGER If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can enter into the vehicle. The exhaust gases contain pollutants which are colorless and odorless. In enclosed areas, exhaust gases can also accumulate outside of the vehicle. There is danger to life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and ensure sufficient ventilation.
Warning An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against rolling. In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away, follow the following: Set the parking brake. On uphill grades or on a downhill
slope, turn the front wheels in the direction of the curb. On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, also secure the vehicle, for instance with a wheel chock.
NOTICE Repeated attempts to start the vehicle or repeated starting of the vehicle in rapid succession can cause the starter to overheat. This also results in unburned or inad-

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

CONTROLS

Driving

equately burned fuel, and can cause the catalytic converter to overheat. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Avoid repeated starting of the vehicle, particularly repeated starting in rapid succession.
Gasoline engine
Depending on the motorization, the full drive power may not be available for approximately 30 seconds after starting the engine. In this case, the vehicle will not accelerate as usual.
Steptronic transmission
Starting the engine 1. Depress the brake pedal. 2. Engage selector lever position P or N. 3. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is activated automatically for a brief time and is stopped as soon as the engine starts.
Manual transmission
Starting the engine 1. Depress the brake pedal. 2. Press on the clutch pedal and shift to
neutral. 3. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is activated automatically for a brief time and is stopped as soon as the engine starts.

Engine stop
Safety information
Warning Unattended children or animals in the vehicle can cause the vehicle to move and endanger themselves and traffic, for instance due to the following actions: Pressing the Start/Stop button. Releasing the parking brake. Opening and closing the doors or
windows. Engaging selector lever position N. Using vehicle equipment. There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exiting and lock the vehicle.
Warning An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against rolling. In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away, follow the following: Set the parking brake. On uphill grades or on a downhill
slope, turn the front wheels in the direction of the curb. On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, also secure the vehicle, for instance with a wheel chock.

100

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Driving

CONTROLS

Steptronic transmission

Engine stop

Switching off the engine 1. When the vehicle is stationary, apply
the parking brake. 2. Engage selector lever position P. 3. Press the Start/Stop button.
The engine is switched off. The radio-ready state is switched on.
Manual transmission
Switching off the engine 1. With the vehicle at a standstill, press
the Start/Stop button. The engine is switched off. The radio-ready state is switched on. 2. Shift into first gear or reverse. 3. Set the parking brake.
Auto Start/Stop function
Concept
The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel. The system switches off the engine during a stop, for instance in traffic jam or at traffic lights. The ignition remains switched on. The engine starts automatically for driving off. After each engine start using the Start/Stop button, the Auto Start/Stop function is ready and is activated at speeds faster than about 3 mph/5 km/h. Depending on the selected drive mode, refer to page 177, the system is automatically activated or deactivated.

Functional requirements The engine is switched off automatically during a stop under the following conditions: Manual transmission: Neutral is engaged and the clutch pedal
is not pressed. The driver's safety belt is buckled or the
driver's door is closed. Steptronic transmission: The selector lever is in selector lever po-
sition D. The brake pedal remains depressed
while the vehicle is stopped. The driver's safety belt is buckled or the
driver's door is closed. In order to be able to release the brake pedal, engage the selector lever in position P. The engine remains off. To continue driving depress the brake pedal. When a gear is engaged, the engine starts automatically. The air flow from the air conditioner is reduced when the engine is switched off.
Steptronic transmission: manual engine stop Depending on the vehicle equipment and country version, the engine can be switched off manually, if the engine was not switched off automatically when the vehicle stopped: Press the brake pedal forcefully again
from the current pedal position. Engage selector lever position P. If all functional preconditions are fulfilled, the engine switches off.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

101

CONTROLS

Driving

Displays in the instrument cluster
Instrument cluster without enhanced features: display
The display indicates that the Auto Start/Stop function is ready for an Automatic engine start.
The display indicates that the conditions for an automatic engine stop have not been met.
Instrument cluster with enhanced features: display
The display indicates that the Auto Start/Stop function is ready for an Automatic engine start.
The display indicates that the conditions for an automatic engine stop have not been met.
Functional limitations The engine is not switched off automatically in the following situations: Outside temperature too low. The outside temperature is high and au-
tomatic climate control is running. The car's interior has not yet been
heated or cooled to the required level. The engine is not yet at operating tem-
perature. The wheels are at a sharp angle or the
steering wheel is being turned. After driving in reverse.

Fogging of the windows when the automatic climate control is switched on.
The vehicle battery charge is very low. At higher elevations. The hood is unlocked. The parking assistant is activated. Stop-and-go traffic. Selector lever in selector lever position
R, N or M/S.
Starting the engine
The engine starts automatically under the following conditions: Manual transmission: clutch pedal is
pressed. Steptronic transmission: by releasing
the brake pedal. After the engine starts, accelerate as usual.
Safety mode After the engine switches off automatically, it will not start again automatically if any one of the following conditions are met: The driver's safety belt is unbuckled and
the driver's door is open. The hood was unlocked. Some indicator lights light up for a varied length of time. The engine can only be started via the Start/Stop button.
Functional limitations Even if driving off was not intended, the deactivated engine starts up automatically in the following situations: Excessive warming of the car's interior
when air conditioning is switched on. When the steering wheel is turned. Steptronic transmission: change from
selector lever position D to R, N or M/S.

102

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Driving

CONTROLS

Steptronic transmission: change from selector lever position P to R, N, D or M/S.
The vehicle begins rolling. Fogging of the windows when the auto-
matic climate control is switched on. The vehicle battery charge is very low. Excessive cooling of the car's interior
when the heating is switched on. Manual transmission: low brake vacuum
pressure; this can occur, for instance if the brake pedal is depressed a number of times in succession.
Additional Auto Start/Stop function
Depending on the vehicle equipment and country-specific version, the vehicle features a variety of sensors for assessing the traffic situation. The Auto Start/Stop function uses this information to adapt to various traffic situations in a proactive manner. For instance, this applies to the following situations: When a situation is detected in which
the stopping time is expected to be very short, the engine is not switched off automatically. A message appears on the Control Display, depending on the situation. When a situation is detected in which the vehicle needs to drive off immediately, the engine is started automatically. The function may be restricted if the navigation data is invalid, outdated or not available, for example.

Switching the system on/off Using the button
Press the button. LED comes on: auto Start/Stop function
is deactivated. The engine is started during an automatic engine stop. The engine can only be stopped or started via the Start/Stop button. LED goes out: auto Start/Stop function is activated. Switching off the vehicle during an automatic engine stop During an automatic engine stop, the vehicle can be switched off permanently, for instance when leaving it. Steptronic transmission: 1. Engage selector lever position P. 2. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is switched off. The Auto Start/Stop function is deactivated. 3. Set the parking brake. Manual transmission: 1. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is switched off. The Auto Start/Stop function is deactivated. 2. Shift into first gear or reverse. 3. Set the parking brake.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

103

CONTROLS

Driving

Engine start as usual via Start/Stop button.
Automatic deactivation
In certain situations, the Auto Start/Stop function is deactivated automatically for safety reasons, for instance if no driver is detected. Malfunction The Auto Start/Stop function no longer switches off the engine automatically. A Check Control message is displayed. It is possible to continue driving. Have the system checked by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.
Parking brake, manual
Safety information

The indicator light lights up red. The parking brake is set. Lower light: indicator light in Canadian models
If for once use during driving is required, engage the parking brake slightly and hold the button down. To prevent corrosion and one-sided brake action, lightly apply the parking brake periodically while coasting, if traffic conditions permit. The brake lights will not light up if the parking brake is set.
Releasing

Warning An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against rolling. In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away, follow the following: Set the parking brake. On uphill grades or on a downhill
slope, turn the front wheels in the direction of the curb. On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, also secure the vehicle, for instance with a wheel chock.
Applying
The lever automatically engages after being pulled up.

Raise lever slightly, press the button and guide the lever down.
Parking brake, electric
Concept
The parking brake is used to prevent the vehicle from rolling when it is parked.
Safety information
Warning An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against rolling.

104

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Driving

CONTROLS

In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away, follow the following: Set the parking brake. On uphill grades or on a downhill
slope, turn the front wheels in the direction of the curb. On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, also secure the vehicle, for instance with a wheel chock.
Warning Unattended children or animals in the vehicle can cause the vehicle to move and endanger themselves and traffic, for instance due to the following actions: Pressing the Start/Stop button. Releasing the parking brake. Opening and closing the doors or
windows. Engaging selector lever position N. Using vehicle equipment. There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exiting and lock the vehicle.
Overview

Setting
With a stationary vehicle Pull the switch. The LED lights up.
The indicator light lights up red. The parking brake is set.
Depending on the stopping situation, the parking brake is engaged automatically. Steptronic transmission: in some parking situations, the parking brake is automatically engaged, when selector lever position P is engaged. In these cases, the parking brake is released automatically when you leave the selector lever position P.
While driving To use as emergency brake while driving:
Pull the switch and hold it. The vehicle brakes hard while the switch is being pulled.
The indicator light lights up red, a signal sounds and the brake lights light up. A Check Control message is displayed. If the vehicle is decelerated to a complete stop, the parking brake is engaged.
Releasing

Parking brake

Releasing manually 1. Switch on the ignition.

Manual transmission: press the

switch while the brake pedal is pressed.

Steptronic transmission: press the switch while the brake is pressed or selector lever position P is set. The LED and indicator light go out.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

105

CONTROLS

Driving

The parking brake is released.
Automatic release in cars with Steptronic transmission For automatic release, step on the accelerator pedal. The LED and indicator light go out. The parking brake is automatically released when you step on the accelerator under the following conditions: Engine on. Gear position engaged. Driver buckled in and doors closed.
Automatic release in cars with manual transmission Drive off as usual. The parking brake disengages when the clutch pedal is released. The LED and indicator light go out. Under the following conditions, the parking brake is automatically released: Engine on. Gear engaged. Driver buckled in and doors closed. Engine power is sufficient to drive off.
Malfunction
If the parking brake fails or malfunctions, secure the vehicle against rolling before exiting. A Check Control message is displayed. Secure the vehicle against rolling away, for instance with a wheel chock, after exiting the vehicle.
After a power failure
Re-activating the parking brake 1. Switch on the ignition.

Press the switch while stepping on

the brake pedal or selector lever posi-

tion P is set.

It may take several seconds for the brake to be reactivated. Some mechanical sounds associated with this process are normal.

The indicator light in the instrument cluster goes out as soon as the parking brake is ready for operation.

Turn signal, high beams, headlight flasher
Turn signal Using turn signals

Press the lever past the resistance point. Canada: the lever returns into its starting position after actuation. To switch off manually, slightly tap the lever to the resistance point.
Triple turn signal activation Lightly tap the lever up or down. The triple turn signal duration can be adjusted. Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. "My MINI" 2. "Vehicle settings"

106

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Driving

CONTROLS

3. "Lighting" 4. "Exterior lighting" 5. "One-touch turn signal" 6. Select the desired setting. Settings are stored for the profile currently used.
Signaling briefly Press the lever to the resistance point and hold it there for as long as you want the turn signal to flash.
Malfunction Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator light indicates that a turn signal bulb has failed.
High beams, headlight flasher
Press the lever forward or pull it backward.

Safety information
Warning If the wipers start moving in the folded away state, body parts can be jammed or damage may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the vehicle is switched off when the wipers are in the folded away state and the wipers are folded in when switching on.
NOTICE If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper motor can overheat when switching on. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Defrost the windshield prior to switching the wipers on.

Switching on

High beams on, arrow 1. The high beams light up when the low beams are switched on.
High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2.
Wiper system
General information
Do not use the wipers if the windshield is dry, as this may damage the wiper blades or cause them to become worn more quickly.

Press the lever up until the desired position is reached. Resting position of the wipers, posi-
tion 0. Intermittent operation or rain sensor,
position 1. Normal wiper speed, position 2. Fast wiper speed, position 3.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

107

CONTROLS

Driving

When travel is interrupted with the wiper system switched on: when travel continues, the wipers resume at their previous speed.
Switching off and brief wipe

Safety information
NOTICE If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers can accidentally start moving in vehicle washes. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Deactivate the rain sensor in vehicle washes.

Activating

Press the lever down. Switching off: press the lever down until
it reaches its standard position. Brief wipe: press the lever down from
the standard position. The lever automatically returns to its initial position when released.
Interval mode or rain sensor
Concept The rain sensor automatically controls the time between wipes depending on the intensity of the rainfall.
General information The sensor is located on the windshield, directly in front of the interior mirror. Without the rain sensor, the frequency of the wiper operation is preset.

Press the lever up once from its standard position, arrow 1. Wiping is started. The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated. In frosty conditions, wiper operation may not start.
Deactivating Press the lever back into the standard position.

108

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Driving

CONTROLS

Setting the frequency or sensitivity of Cleaning the windshield the rain sensor

Pull the lever. The system sprays washer fluid on the windshield and activates the wipers briefly.
Windshield washer nozzles The washer jets are automatically heated whenever the ignition is switched on. Rear window wiper
Overview

Safety information

Warning The washer fluid can freeze onto the window at low temperatures and obstruct the view. There is a risk of accident. Only use the washer systems, if the washer fluid cannot freeze. Use washer fluid with antifreeze, if needed.
NOTICE When the washer fluid reservoir is empty, the wash pump cannot work as intended. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Do not use the washer system when the washer fluid reservoir is empty.

Switching on Turn the outer switch upward. Resting position of the wiper, posi-
tion 0. Intermittent mode, arrow 1. When re-
verse gear is engaged, the system switches to continuous operation.
Clean the rear window Turn the outer switch in the desired direction.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

109

CONTROLS

Driving

In resting position: turn the switch downward, arrow 3. The switch automatically returns to its idle position when released.
In intermittent mode: turn the switch further, arrow 2. The switch automatically returns to its interval position when released.
The function is deactivated if the washer fluid reservoir level is low.
Fold-away position of the wipers
Concept The fold-away position enables the wipers to be folded away from the windshield.
General information Helpful when changing the wiper blades or under frosty conditions, for instance.
Safety information

Folding away the wipers 1. Switch the ignition on and off again. 2. Press and hold the wiper lever down, un-
til the wipers stop in a close to vertical position.
3. Fold the wipers all the way away from the windshield.

Warning If the wipers start moving in the folded away state, body parts can be jammed or damage may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the vehicle is switched off when the wipers are in the folded away state and the wipers are folded in when switching on.
NOTICE If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper motor can overheat when switching on. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Defrost the windshield prior to switching the wipers on.

Folding down the wipers After the wipers are folded back down, the wiper system must be reactivated.
1. Fold the wipers back down onto the windshield.
2. Switch on the ignition. 3. Push wiper lever down. Wipers return
to their resting position and are ready again for operation.

110

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Driving

CONTROLS

Canada: wiper system
General information
Do not use the wipers if the windshield is dry, as this may damage the wiper blades or cause them to become worn more quickly.
Safety information

Normal wiper speed: tap up once. Fast wiper speed: tap up twice or tap
once beyond the resistance point. The lever automatically returns to its initial position when released.
Switching off and brief wipe

Press the lever down. To switch off from fast wiper speed:
press down twice. To switch off from normal wiper speed:
press down once. Brief wipe: press down once. The lever automatically returns to its initial position when released.
Interval mode or rain sensor
Concept The rain sensor automatically controls the time between wipes depending on the intensity of the rainfall.
General information The sensor is located on the windshield, directly in front of the interior mirror. Without the rain sensor, the frequency of the wiper operation is preset.

Tap up the lever or press it past the resistance point.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

111

CONTROLS

Driving

Setting the frequency or sensitivity of the rain sensor

Activating/deactivating
Press the button on the wiper lever. Wiping is started. If the vehicle is equipped with a rain sensor: the LED in the wiper lever is illuminated. In frosty conditions, wiper operation may not start. If a journey is interrupted with the rain sensor switched on: if the trip is resumed within approx. 15 minutes, the rain sensor is automatically activated again.

Turn the thumbwheel. With deactivated rain sensor: set the interval. With activated rain sensor: set the rain sensor sensitivity. Up: short interval or high sensitivity of the rain sensor. Down: long interval or low sensitivity of the rain sensor.
Windshield washer system
Safety information
Warning The washer fluid can freeze onto the window at low temperatures and obstruct the view. There is a risk of accident. Only use the washer systems, if the washer fluid cannot freeze. Use washer fluid with antifreeze, if needed.

NOTICE When the washer fluid reservoir is empty, the wash pump cannot work as intended. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Do not use the washer system when the washer fluid reservoir is empty.

112

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Driving

CONTROLS

Cleaning the windshield
Pull the lever. The system sprays washer fluid on the windshield and activates the wipers briefly. Windshield washer nozzles The washer jets are automatically heated whenever the ignition is switched on.
Rear window wiper Overview

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

113

CONTROLS

Driving

Folding away the wipers 1. Switch the ignition on and off again. 2. Press the wiper lever up past the point
of resistance and hold it for approx. 3 seconds, until the wipers remain in a nearly vertical position.

Washer fluid
General information
All washer nozzles are supplied from one reservoir. Use a mixture of tap water and windshield washer concentrate. If desired, a windshield washer concentrate containing antifreeze can be used. Recommended minimum fill quantity: 0.2 US gal/1 liter.
Safety information

3. Fold the wipers all the way away from the windshield.
Folding down the wipers After the wipers are folded back down, the wiper system must be reactivated. 1. Fold the wipers back down onto the
windshield. 2. Switch on the ignition. 3. Push wiper lever down. Wipers return
to their resting position and are ready again for operation.

Warning Some antifreeze agents can contain harmful substances and are flammable. There is a risk of fire and a risk of injury. Follow the instructions on the containers. Keep antifreeze away from ignition sources. Do not refill operating materials into different bottles. Store operating materials out of reach of children. United States: the washer fluid mixture ratio is regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual states; do not exceed the allowable washer fluid dilution ratio limits that apply. Follow the usage instructions on the washer fluid container. Use of BMW's Windshield Washer Concentrate or the equivalent is recommended.
Warning Washer fluid can ignite and catch fire on contact with hot engine parts. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Only add washer fluid when the engine is cooled down. Next, fully close the lid of the washer fluid reservoir.

114

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Driving

CONTROLS

NOTICE Silicon-containing additives in the washer fluid for the water-repelling effect on the windows can lead to damage to the washing system. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Do not add silicon-containing additives to the washer fluid.
NOTICE Mixing different windshield washer concentrates or antifreeze can damage the washing system. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Do not mix different windshield washer concentrates or antifreeze. Follow the information and mixing ratios provided on the containers.
Overview

Manual transmission
Safety information
Warning An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against rolling. In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away, follow the following: Set the parking brake. On uphill grades or on a downhill
slope, turn the front wheels in the direction of the curb. On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, also secure the vehicle, for instance with a wheel chock.
NOTICE When shifting to a lower gear, excessive speeds can damage the engine. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. When shifting into 5th or 6th gear, press the gearshift lever to the right.

The washer fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment.
Malfunction
The use of undiluted windshield washer concentrate or alcohol-based antifreeze can lead to incorrect readings at temperatures below +5 /-15 .

Schematic diagram

16: forward gears.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

115

CONTROLS

Driving

R: reverse gear.
Shifting
General information Depending on the motorization, the engine speed during a shifting operation is adjusted automatically as required for harmonious gear shifting.
Reverse gear Select only when the vehicle is stationary. To overcome the resistance push the gearshift lever dynamically to the left and engage reverse gear with a forward shifting movement.
Rolling or pushing the vehicle
In some situations, the vehicle is to roll without its own power, for instance in a car wash, or be pushed. 1. Switch on the ignition. 2. Press on the clutch pedal and shift out
of a forward gear or reverse. 3. Release the parking brake.
Steptronic transmission
Concept
The Steptronic transmission combines the functions of an automatic transmission with the possibility of manual shifting, if needed.
Safety information
Warning An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against rolling.

In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away, follow the following: Set the parking brake. On uphill grades or on a downhill
slope, turn the front wheels in the direction of the curb. On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, also secure the vehicle, for instance with a wheel chock.
Selector lever version Selector lever
The selector lever positions R, N, and D are selected by tapping the selector lever forward or back. The selector lever automatically returns to the center position when released. The selector lever position P is engaged by pressing the P button on the selector lever or, in certain situations, automatically, refer to page 117.
Selector lever positions Drive mode D
Selector lever position for normal vehicle operation. All gears for forward travel are activated automatically.

116

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Driving

CONTROLS

R is reverse Engage selector lever position R only when the vehicle is stationary.
Neutral N The vehicle may be pushed or roll without engine power in selector lever position N, for instance in vehicle washes, refer to page 118.
Parking position P
General information Selector lever position, for instance for parking the vehicle. The transmission blocks the drive wheels in selector lever position P. Engage selector lever position P only when the vehicle is stationary. Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that selector lever position P is set. Otherwise, the vehicle may begin to move.
Automatic parking position Selector lever position P is engaged automatically in situations such as the following: After the engine is switched off when
the vehicle is in the radio-ready state, refer to page 99, or when the ignition is switched off, refer to page 98, while selector lever position R, D or M/S is engaged. If the driver's safety belt is unbuckled, the driver's door is opened, and the brake pedal is not pressed while the vehicle is stationary and selector lever position D, M/S or R is engaged. After the ignition has been switched off while selector lever position N is engaged.

Engaging selector lever positions General information
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you select a gear position, maintain pressure on the brake pedal until you are ready to start. Functional requirements Only when the brake pedal is depressed is it possible to change from selector lever position P to another selector lever position. Depending on the transmission version, the engine may have to be running too. The selection lever position P cannot be changed until all technical requirements are met. Engaging selector lever position D, N, R A selector lever lock prevents the following faulty operation: Unintentional shifting into selector
lever position R. Unintentional shifting from selector
lever position P into another selector lever position. 1. Press and hold the button to release the selector lever lock.
2. With the driver's safety belt fastened, briefly push the selector lever in the desired direction, past a resistance point, if needed. The selector lever automati-

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

117

CONTROLS

Driving

cally returns to the center position when released. Engaging selector lever position P

1. Start the engine while pressing on the brake pedal.
2. If necessary, release the parking brake. 3. Depress the brake pedal. 4. Touch the selector lever lock and en-
gage selector lever position N. 5. Switch the engine off.
In this way, the ignition remains switched on, and a Check Control message is displayed. The vehicle can roll. Irrespective of the ignition, the selector lever position P is automatically engaged after approx. 15 minutes. If there is a malfunction, you may not be able to change the selector lever position. Electronically unlock the transmission lock, if needed, refer to page 120.

Press button P.
Rolling or pushing the vehicle

Kickdown
Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving performance. Step on the accelerator pedal beyond the resistance point at the full throttle position.

General information In some situations, the vehicle is to roll without its own power for a short distance, for instance in a car wash, or be pushed.
Engaging selector lever position N
NOTICE Selector lever position P is automatically engaged when the ignition is switched off. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Do not switch ignition off in car washes.

Sport program M/S
Concept The shifting points and shifting times in the Sport program are designed for a sportier driving style. The transmission, for instance shifts up later and the shifting times are shorter.

118

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Driving

CONTROLS

Activating the Sport program
Press the selector lever to the left from selector lever position D. The engaged gear is displayed in the instrument cluster, for instance S1. The sport program of the transmission is activated. Ending the Sport program Press the selector lever to the right. D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Manual mode M/S Concept
Manual gear-shifting is possible in manual mode. Activating manual mode 1. Press the selector lever to the left from
selector lever position D, arrow 1.
2. Press the selector lever forward or pull it backward, arrows 2.

Manual mode M/S becomes active and the gear is changed. The engaged gear is displayed in the instrument cluster, for instance M1.
Shifting To shift down: press the selector lever
forward. To shift up: pull the selector lever rear-
wards. The Steptronic transmission continues shifting automatically in certain situations, for instance when certain engine speed limits are reached. When M2 is set manually while the vehicle is stationary, the transmission will no longer shift back to M1. This shifting behavior is retained until you engage M1 manually or exit M.
Avoiding automatic upshifting Once a particular engine speed is attained, M/S manual mode is automatically upshifted as needed. John Cooper Works: once particular engine speeds are attained, upshifting is not automatically performed in M/S manual mode. For vehicles with Steptronic Sport transmission, automatic shift operations are not performed if one of the following conditions is met: DSC is deactivated. TRACTION is activated. In addition, there is no downshifting for kickdown. With the appropriate transmission version, the lowest possible gear can be selected by simultaneously activating kickdown and operating the left shift paddles. This is not possible by switching briefly via the shift paddles from selector lever position D to manual mode M/S.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

119

CONTROLS

Driving

Ending the manual mode Press the selector lever to the right. D is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Shifting

Shift paddles for Steptronic Sport transmission

Concept The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow you to shift gears quickly while keeping both hands on the steering wheel.
General information
Shifting Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engine and road speeds, for instance downshifting is not possible if the engine speed is too high.
Short-term manual mode In selector lever position D, actuating a shift paddle switches into manual mode temporarily. After conservative driving in manual mode without acceleration or shifting via the shift paddles for a certain amount of time, the transmission switches back to automatic mode. It is possible to switch into automatic mode as follows: Keep the right shift paddle pulled until
D is displayed in the instrument cluster. In addition to the pulled right shift pad-
dle, pull the left shift paddle.
Continuous manual mode In selector lever position S, actuating a shift paddle switches into manual mode permanently.

Shifting up: pull the right shift paddle. Shifting down: pull left shift paddle. Downshifting to the lowest possible
gear: keep the left shift paddle pulled. The selected gear is briefly displayed in the instrument cluster, followed by the current gear.
Displays in the instrument cluster
The selector lever position is displayed, for example P.
Releasing the transmission lock electronically
General information Electronically unlock the transmission lock to maneuver vehicle from a danger area. Before unlocking the transmission lock, set the parking brake to prevent the vehicle from rolling away.
Engaging selector lever position N Unlocking is possible, if the starter can spin the engine. 1. Press and hold down brake pedal. 2. Press the Start/Stop button. The starter
must audibly start.

120

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Driving

CONTROLS

3. Press the button on the selector lever, arrow 1, and press and hold the selector lever into selector lever position N, arrow N, until selector lever position N is displayed in the instrument cluster. A Check Control message is displayed.

Functional requirements Launch Control is available as soon as the engine and transmission are at operating temperature. Depending on the outside temperature and driving style, the engine and transmission require an interrupted trip of up to 30 miles/50 km in order to reach the operating temperature needed for Launch Control.

Start with launch control While the engine is running:

4. Release the selector lever. 5. Release brake, as soon as the starter
stops. 6. Maneuver the vehicle from the danger
area and secure it against moving on its own. For additional information, see the chapter on tow-starting and towing.
Steptronic Sport transmission: Launch Control
Concept Launch Control enables optimum acceleration on surfaces with good traction under dry surrounding conditions.
General information The use of Launch Control causes premature component wear since this function represents a very heavy load for the vehicle. Do not use Launch Control during the break-in, refer to page 230, period. Do not turn the steering wheel when driving away with Launch Control.

Press button and select SPORT

with the MINI Driving Modes switch.

The instrument cluster displays TRACTION in combination with SPORT. The DSC OFF indicator light lights up.

2. Engage selector lever position S.

3. With the left foot, forcefully press down on the brake.

4. Press and hold down the accelerator pedal beyond the resistance point at the full throttle position, kickdown.

A destination flag is displayed in the instrument cluster.

5. The starting engine speed adjusts. Wait briefly until the engine speed is constant. Keep accelerator pedal in this position.

6. Release the brake within 3 seconds after the destination flag illuminates.

The vehicle accelerates.

Upshifting occurs automatically as long as the destination flag is displayed and the accelerator pedal is not released.

Repeated use during a trip After Launch Control has been used, the transmission must cool down for approx.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

121

CONTROLS

Driving

5 minutes before Launch Control can be used again.
After using Launch Control To increase driving stability, activate DSC Dynamic Stability Control again.
System limits An experienced driver may be able to achieve better acceleration values in DSC OFF mode.

122

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Displays

CONTROLS

Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster without enhanced features: overview

1 Tachometer 131 2 Indicator/warning lights 3 Speedometer

4 Fuel gauge 130 5 Display/reset miles 131 6 Electronic displays 125

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

123

CONTROLS

Displays

Instrument cluster with enhanced features: overview

1 Tachometer 131 2 Display/reset miles 131 3 Electronic displays 126

4 Vehicle speed 5 Indicator/warning lights 6 Fuel gauge 130

124

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Displays

CONTROLS

Instrument cluster without additional functions: electronic displays

1 Driver assistance systems Messages, for instance Check Control Time 132 Outside temperature 131 Selection lists 136 Total miles/trip odometer 131

Trip computer 136 2 Selector lever position 116
Gear shift indicator 134 3 MINI Driving Modes switch sta-
tus 177

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

125

CONTROLS

Displays

Instrument cluster with enhanced features: electronic displays

1 Selector lever position 116 Gear shift indicator 134
2 Time 132 MINI Driving Modes switch status 177
3 Driver assistance systems 4 Outside temperature 131
Range 132

5 Messages, for instance Check Control Selection lists 136 Navigation instructions
6 Total miles/trip odometer 131 Trip computer 136

Check Control
Concept
The Check Control system monitors functions in the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctions in the monitored systems.
General information
A Check Control message is displayed as a combination of indicator or warning lights and text messages in the instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display.

In addition, an acoustic signal may be output and a text message may appear on the Control Display.
Indicator/warning lights
General information The indicator/warning lights can light up in a variety of combinations and colors. Several of the lights are checked for proper functioning and light up temporarily when the engine is started or the ignition is switched on.

126

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Displays

CONTROLS

Red lights
Safety belt reminder Indicator light flashes or is illuminated: safety belt on the driver or passenger side is not buckled. The
safety belt reminder can also be activated if objects are placed on the front passenger seat. Make sure that the safety belts are positioned correctly.
Airbag system Airbag system and belt tensioner may not be working. Have the vehicle checked immedi-
ately by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Forward Collision Warning Indicator light illuminates: advance warning is issued, for example when there is the impending danger of a
collision or the distance to the vehicle ahead is too small. Increase the distance. Indicator light flashes: acute warning of the imminent danger of a collision when the vehicle approaches another vehicle at a relatively high differential speed. Intervene by braking or make an evasive maneuver.
Pedestrian Warning If a collision with a detected person is imminent, the icon lights up and a signal sounds.

Parking brake, manual The parking brake is set. For releasing the parking brake, refer to page 104.
Parking brake, electric The parking brake is set. For releasing the parking brake, refer to page 105.
Brake system Braking system impaired. Continue to drive moderately. Have the vehicle checked immediately by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Instrument cluster without enhanced features: orange lights
Active Cruise Control The number bars shows the selected distance from the vehicle driving ahead.
Camera-based cruise control, refer to page 179.
Vehicle detection, Active Cruise Control Indicator light illuminates: a vehicle has been detected ahead of you. Indicator light flashes: the condi-
tions are not adequate for the system to work. The system was deactivated but applies the brakes until the driver actively resumes control of the vehicle by pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator pedal.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

127

CONTROLS

Displays

Yellow lights
Antilock Braking System ABS The Brake Assistant function may not activate. Avoid abrupt braking. Take the longer braking distance into account. Have the system immediately checked by a dealer's service center
or another qualified service center or repair shop.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control The indicator light flashes: DSC controls the drive and braking forces. The vehicle is stabilized. Reduce
speed and modify your driving style to the driving circumstances. The indicator light lights up: DSC has malfunctioned. Have the system checked by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. DSC, refer to page 175.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated or DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated
DSC is deactivated or DTC is activated. DSC, refer to page 175, and DTC, refer to page 176.
Flat Tire Monitor FTM The FTM signals a loss of tire inflation pressure in a tire. Reduce your speed and stop cau-
tiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers. Flat Tire Monitor, refer to page 160.

Tire Pressure Monitor TPM The indicator light illuminates: the Tire Pressure Monitor reports a low tire inflation pressure or a flat tire.
Follow the information in the Check Control message. The indicator light flashes and is then illuminated continuously: flat tires or tire pressure losses cannot be detected. Interference caused by systems or devi-
ces with the same radio frequency: after leaving the area of the interference, the system automatically becomes active again. TPM was unable to complete the reset. Reset the system again. A wheel without TPM wheel electronics is mounted: have it checked by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop as needed. Malfunction: have the system checked by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 155.
Steering system Steering system may not be working. Have the system checked by a dealer's service center or another quali-
fied service center or repair shop.
Emissions The warning light lights up: Emissions are deteriorating. Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible.
The warning light flashes under certain circumstances: This indicates that there is excessive misfiring in the engine.

128

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Displays

CONTROLS

Reduce the vehicle speed and have the system checked immediately; otherwise, serious engine misfiring within a brief period can seriously damage emission control components, in particular the catalytic converter. Socket for Onboard Diagnosis, refer to page 278.
Green lights
Turn signal Turn signal switched on. Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator light indicates that a turn sig-
nal bulb has failed. Turn signal, refer to page 106.

the control elements on the steering wheel.
Speed Limiter The indicator light illuminates: the system is switched on. The indicator light flashes: the set
speed limit has been exceeded. If this happens, a signal sounds. Reduce speed or deactivate system.
Lane departure warning The indicator light lights up: the system is activated. At least one lane marking was detected and warnings
can be issued. Lane departure warning, refer to page 169.

Parking lights, headlight
Parking lights or headlights are switched on. Parking lights/low beams, headlight control, refer to page 145.

Blue lights
High beams High beams are switched on. High beams, refer to page 107.

Instrument cluster with enhanced features: bad weather light
Bad weather light is switched on. Bad weather light, refer to page 148.

Hiding Check Control messages

High-beam Assistant High-beam Assistant is switched on. High beams are switched on and off automatically depending on the traf-
fic situation. High-beam Assistant, refer to page 147.
Cruise control The system is switched on. It maintains the speed that was set using

Press the button on the turn signal lever.
Continuous display Some Check Control messages are displayed continuously and are not cleared until the malfunction is eliminated. If several mal-

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

129

CONTROLS

Displays

functions occur at once, the messages are displayed consecutively. The messages can be hidden for approx. 8 seconds. After this time, they are displayed again automatically.
Temporary display Some Check Control messages are hidden automatically after approx. 20 seconds. The Check Control messages are stored and can be displayed again later.
Displaying stored Check Control messages
Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. "My MINI" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. Tilt the Controller to the left. 4. "Check Control" 5. Select the text message.
Display
Check Control At least one Check Control message is displayed or stored.
Text messages Text messages in combination with a icon in the instrument cluster explain a Check Control message and the meaning of the indicator/warning lights.
Supplementary text messages Additional information, such as on the cause of an error or the required action, can be called up via Check Control. With urgent messages the added text will be automatically displayed on the Control Display.

Depending on the Check Control message, further help can be selected. Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. "My MINI" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. Tilt the Controller to the left. 4. "Check Control" 5. Select the desired text message. 6. Select the desired setting.
Messages after trip completion Certain messages displayed while driving are displayed again after the ignition is switched off.
Fuel gauge
Concept
The current fill level of the fuel tank is displayed.
General information
Vehicle tilt position may cause the display to vary. Information on refueling, refer to page 242.
Instrument cluster without enhanced features: display
The arrow beside the fuel pump icon shows which side of the vehicle the fuel filler flap is on.

130

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Displays

CONTROLS

Instrument cluster with enhanced features: display
The arrow beside the fuel pump icon shows which side of the vehicle the fuel filler flap is on.
Indicator light in the instrument cluster
The yellow indicator light illuminates, once the fuel reserve is reached.
Tachometer
Always avoid engine speeds in the red warning field. In this range, the fuel supply is reduced to protect the engine.
Odometer and trip odometer
Concept
The total mileage driven and the mileage driven since the last reset are displayed in the instrument cluster.
Instrument cluster without additional functions: reset trip distance
Press the button. The odometer is displayed
when the ignition is switched off. When the ignition is switched on, the trip odometer is reset.

Instrument cluster with enhanced features: reset trip distance
Press the button. The odometer is displayed
when the ignition is switched off. When the ignition is switched on, the trip odometer is reset.

Outside temperature
General information
If the indicator drops to +37 /+3 , a signal sounds. A Check Control message is displayed. There is an increased risk of ice on roads.
Safety information

Warning Even at temperatures above +37 /+3 there can be a risk of icy roads, for instance on bridges or shady sections of the road. There is a risk of accident. Modify your driving style to the weather conditions at low temperatures.

Display

The outside temperature is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

131

CONTROLS

Displays

Time

The time is displayed in the instrument cluster. Set the time on the Central Information Display (CID), refer to page 48.

damage to property, among other potential damage. Refuel promptly.

Display

The current range is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Date Range

The date is displayed in the instrument cluster. Set the date on the Central Information Display (CID), refer to page 48.

Displaying the cruising range
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 3. "Displays" 4. "Instrument panel" 5. "Range"

General information
When the remaining range is low: A Check Control message is displayed
briefly. The remaining range is shown on the
trip computer. With a sporty driving style, for instance
fast cornering, the engine function is not always ensured. The Check Control message appears continuously below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km.
Safety information
NOTICE With a driving distance of less than 30 miles/50 km the engine may no longer have sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not ensured anymore. There is a risk of

Current consumption
Concept
Displays the current fuel consumption. Check whether you are currently driving in an efficient and environmentally-friendly manner.
Displaying the current consumption
Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 3. "Displays" 4. "Instrument panel" 5. "Current consumption"

132

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Displays

CONTROLS

Service notifications
Concept
The function displays the service notifications and the corresponding maintenance scopes.
General information
After the ignition is switched on the instrument cluster briefly displays available driving distance or time to the next scheduled maintenance. A service advisor can read out the current service notifications from your vehicle key.
Display
Detailed information on service notifications More information on the type of service required may be displayed on the Control Display. Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. "My MINI" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. Tilt the Controller to the left. 4. "Service required"
Maintenance work and legally mandated inspections are displayed. 5. Select an entry to call up detailed information.

Symbols Symbols

Description No service is currently required.
The time for recommended maintenance or a legally mandated inspection is approaching. Service interval is exceeded.

Entering appointment dates
Enter the dates for the mandatory vehicle inspections. Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are set correctly. Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. Tilt the Controller to the left. 4. "Service required" 5. "Vehicle inspection" 6. "Date:" 7. Select the desired setting.
Automatic Service Request
Data regarding the service status or legally mandated vehicle inspections is automatically transmitted to your dealer's service center before your vehicle is due for service. You can check when your dealer's service center was notified. Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI" 2. "Vehicle status"

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

133

CONTROLS

Displays

3. Tilt the Controller to the left. 4. "Teleservice Call"
Gear shift indicator
Concept
The system recommends the most efficient gear for the current driving situation.
General information
Depending on the vehicle equipment and country version, the gear shift indicator is active in the manual mode of the Steptronic transmission and with manual transmission. Suggestions to shift up or down are displayed in the instrument cluster.
Manual transmission: displaying
Example Description Efficient gear is set.
Depending on the equipment version, shift to a more efficient gear.
Steptronic transmission: displaying
Example Description Efficient gear is set.

Speed Limit Info
Speed Limit Info
Concept Speed Limit Info shows the current maximum permitted speed in the instrument cluster.
General information The camera at the base of the interior mirror detects traffic signs at the edge of the road as well as overhead sign posts. Traffic signs with extra symbols for wet road conditions, etc., are also detected and compared with the vehicle's onboard data, such as from the rain sensor, and will be displayed depending on the situation. With the navigation system, the system takes into account the information stored in the navigation data and also displays speed limits present on routes without signs.
Safety information
Warning The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment in assessing visibility and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

Depending on the equipment version, shift to a more efficient gear.

134

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Overview Camera

Displays

CONTROLS

With navigation system: Speed Limit Info is not available.

Speed Limit Info can also be displayed in the Head-up Display.

The camera is installed near the interior mirror. Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror clean and clear.
Display
Depending on the vehicle equipment, Speed Limit Info is displayed permanently in the instrument cluster or via the trip computer.
Press button on the turn signal lever several times, if needed. Speed Limit Info is displayed in the instrument cluster. Speed Limit Info
The last speed limit detected.

System limits
The system may not be fully functional and may provide incorrect information in the following situations: In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snow-
fall. When traffic signs are fully or partially
concealed by objects, stickers or paint. When driving very close to the vehicle
in front of you. When driving toward bright lights or
strong reflections. When the windshield in front of the in-
terior mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered by a sticker, etc. In the event of incorrect detection by the camera. If the speed limits stored in the navigation system are incorrect. In areas not covered by the navigation system. When roads differ from the navigation, such as due to changes in road routing. When passing buses or trucks with a speed sticker. If the traffic signs are non-conforming. When traffic signs that are valid for a parallel road are detected. During calibration of the camera immediately after vehicle delivery.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

135

CONTROLS

Displays

Selection lists

General information
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the buttons on the steering wheel and the display in the instrument cluster can be used to display or use the following: Current audio source. Phone redial. Turn on voice activation system.

Activating a list and adjusting the setting

Button on the steering wheel

Function Move selection up.

Move selection down. Confirm the selection.

Instrument cluster without enhanced features: display

Instrument cluster with enhanced features: display
Trip computer
Concept
The trip computer displays different vehicle data in the instrument cluster, such as average values.
Calling up information

Press the button on the turn signal lever. Information is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Information at a glance
Repeatedly pressing the button on the turn signal lever calls up the following information:
Range.

136

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Displays

CONTROLS

GREEN Info. When GREEN Mode is activated.
Average consumption, fuel. Average consumption since delivery
from the factory. Current consumption, fuel. Average speed. Date. Engine temperature display. With equipment version with Head-up
Display and navigation: Distance to destination. When destination guidance is activated in the navigation system. With equipment version with Head-up Display and navigation: Arrival time. When destination guidance is activated in the navigation system. Instrument cluster without enhanced features: Speed Limit Info. Vehicle speed. Trip odometer. The unit of some information can be changed. Setting units, refer to page 49.
Selecting information
Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can select what information from the trip computer can be accessed in the instrument cluster. Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 3. "Displays"

4. "Instrument panel" 5. Select the desired setting. Settings are stored for the profile currently used.
Information in detail Range
Displays the estimated cruising range available with the remaining fuel. The range is calculated based on your driving style over the last 20 miles/30 km. GREEN info The achieved range extension may be displayed as a bonus range. Average consumption The average consumption is calculated for the period while the engine is running. The average consumption is calculated for the distance traveled since the last reset by the trip computer. Average speed Periods in which the vehicle is parked with the engine manually stopped are not included in the calculation of the average speed. Resetting average values
Press and hold the button on the turn signal lever.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

137

CONTROLS

Displays

Engine temperature display
Concept The current engine temperature, based on a combination of coolant and engine oil temperature is displayed. As soon as the optimum operating temperature has been attained, the indicator is in the center position.
General information If the engine oil or coolant, and thus the engine, become too hot, a Check Control message is displayed too.
When the engine temperature is too high, a red indicator light is displayed.
When the engine oil temperature is too high, a red indicator light is displayed. To check the coolant level, refer to page 275.
Instrument cluster without enhanced features: display

Instrument cluster with enhanced features: display
Distance to destination Depending on the vehicle equipment, the distance remaining to the destination is displayed if a destination is entered in the navigation system before the trip is started. The distance to the destination is adopted automatically. Time of arrival Depending on the vehicle equipment, the estimated time of arrival is displayed if a destination is entered in the navigation system before the trip is started. The time must be correctly set. Instrument cluster without additional functions: Speed Limit Info Speed Limit Info shows the current maximum permitted speed in the instrument cluster. Trip computer on the Control Display Concept The trip computer displays different vehicle data on the Control Display, such as average values.

138

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Displays

CONTROLS

General information Two types of trip computers are available on the Control Display: "Onboard info": average values, such as
the consumption, are displayed. The values can be reset individually. "Trip computer": the values deliver an overview of a specific route and can be reset as often as necessary.

Calling up the trip computer or onboard computer Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI" 2. "Driving information" 3. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"

Resetting the trip computer Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI" 2. "Driving information" 3. "Onboard info" 4. "Consumption" or "Speed" 5. "OK"

Resetting the trip computer Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Driving information"

3. "Trip computer"

4. Move the Controller to the left, if needed.

"Reset": all values are reset.

"Automatic reset": all values are

reset approx. 4 hours after the vehi-

cle has come to a standstill.

5. If necessary, "OK"

Driving Excitement
Concept
On the Control Display, sport instruments can be displayed, and the vehicle state can be checked before the use of the SPORT program.
Sport instruments
General information On the Control Display, values for power and torque are displayed.
Displaying sport instruments Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. "My MINI" 2. "Technology in action" 3. "Sport displays" 4. "Sports instruments" Via MINI Driving Modes switch: 1. Activate SPORT. 2. "Sport displays" 3. "Sports instruments"
Vehicle state
General information The following vehicle and surrounding area data is automatically checked and evaluated in succession: Range. Engine temperature. Outside temperature. SPORT program state. Finally, a total evaluation of the vehicle state is displayed.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

139

CONTROLS

Displays

Checking vehicle state Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. "My MINI" 2. "Technology in action" 3. "Sport displays" 4. "Vehicle and surroundings" Via the MINI Driving Modes switch: 1. Activate SPORT. 2. "Sport displays" 3. "Vehicle and surroundings"
Speed warning
Concept
The system can be used to set a speed limit. A warning will be issued when this speed limit is exceeded.
General information
The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed exceeds the set speed limit again, after it has dropped below it by 3 mph/5 km/h.
Adjusting
Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. "My MINI" 2. "Vehicle settings" 3. "Speed warning" 4. "Warning at:" 5. Turn the Controller until the desired
speed is displayed. 6. Press the Controller.
Activating/deactivating
Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI" 2. "Vehicle settings" 3. "Speed warning" 4. "Speed warning"
Setting your current speed as the speed warning
Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. "My MINI" 2. "Vehicle settings" 3. "Speed warning" 4. "Select current speed"
LED ring on the central instrument cluster
Concept
The LED ring displays light animations to represent specific functions.
Basic displays Basic functions, for instance the tachometer, can be set to be displayed continually if so desired.
Event displays Functions that are only displayed temporarily, for instance the volume or temperature settings, can be set as event displays. Several vehicle assistance functions can also be displayed on the LED ring. This display corresponds with the displays of the function in the respective display.
Example: tachometer
Like the tachometer in the instrument cluster, the light animations of the tachometer's basic display show the current RPMs and the respective RPM warning thresholds.

140

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Displays

CONTROLS

Display
Arrow 1: current RPM. Arrow 2: prewarning field. Arrow 3: warning field.
Switching on/off LED ring
Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 3. "Displays" 4. "Center Instrument" 5. "Center Instrument"
Adjusting the LED ring
Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 3. "Displays" 4. "Center Instrument" 5. "Basic display" or "Event display" 6. Select the desired setting.
Setting the brightness
The brightness can be adjusted when night lighting is active in the instrument cluster. Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings"

3. "Displays" 4. "Center Instrument" 5. "Brightness at night" 6. Turn the Controller until the desired
brightness is set. 7. Press the Controller. The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.
Head-up Display
Concept
This system projects important information into the driver's field of vision, for instance the speed. The driver can get information without averting his or her eyes from the road.
General information
Follow the instructions for cleaning the Head-up Display. For additional information, see the chapter on care.
Safety information
Warning When extending and retracting the projection screen of the Head-up Display, body parts can be jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the projection screen is clear during opening and closing.
NOTICE The Head-up Display consists of sensitive components that can easily be scraped or damaged. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Do not place any objects on the Head-up

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

141

CONTROLS

Displays

Display, attach to system components or plug into the system. Do not move the moving parts manually.
Overview
Switching the Head-up Display on/off
When switching on, the projection lens of the Head-up Display is extended. When switching off, the projection lens of the Head-up Display is retracted again. Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 3. "Displays" 4. "Head-Up Display" 5. "Head-Up Display"
Display Overview
The following information is displayed on the Head-up Display: Vehicle speed. Navigation instructions. Check Control messages. Selection list from the instrument clus-
ter. Driver assistance systems.

Some of this information is only displayed briefly as needed.
Selecting displays in the Head-up Display Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 3. "Displays" 4. "Head-Up Display" 5. "Displayed information" 6. Select the desired displays in the Head-
up Display. Settings are stored for the driver profile currently used.
Setting the brightness The brightness is automatically adjusted to the ambient brightness. The basic setting can be adjusted manually. Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 3. "Displays" 4. "Head-Up Display" 5. "Brightness" 6. Turn the Controller until the desired
brightness is set. 7. Press the Controller. When the low beams are switched on, the brightness of the Head-up Display can be additionally influenced using the instrument lighting, refer to page 149. The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.
Adjusting the height Via the Central Information Display (CID):

142

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Displays

CONTROLS

1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 3. "Displays" 4. "Head-Up Display" 5. "Height" 6. Turn the Controller until the desired
height is reached. 7. Press the Controller. The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.
Setting the rotation The screen of the Head-up Display can be rotated around its own axis. Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 3. "Displays" 4. "Head-Up Display" 5. "Rotation" 6. Turn the Controller until the desired set-
ting is selected. 7. Press the Controller. The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

John Cooper Works: sport displays in the Head-up Display
General information
The sport displays in the Head-up Display assist with a sporty driving style.
Switching on
Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 3. "Displays" 4. "Head-Up Display" 5. "Displayed information" 6. "Sport displays" With navigation system: if the sport displays are switched on, no navigation content will be displayed on the Head-up Display.
Display

Display visibility The visibility of the displays in the Head-up Display is influenced by the following factors: Certain seat positions. Objects on the cover of the Head-up Dis-
play. Sunglasses with certain polarization fil-
ters. Wet roads. Unfavorable light conditions.

1 Vehicle speed 2 Shift point indicator 3 Gear display 4 Current engine speed 5 Warning field, speed

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

143

CONTROLS

Displays

Shift point indicator
Concept The shift point indicator in the Head-up Display indicates the optimum shifting point. Thus, with a sporty driving style, the best possible vehicle acceleration is achieved.
Functional requirements Steptronic Sport transmission:
Manual mode M/S and, if necessary, Dynamic Traction Control DTC are activated. Press the accelerator pedal all the way down.
Display Successive gray illuminated fields indicate the upcoming shift moment. Shift up immediately when the red fields light up. When the maximum speed is reached, the entire display flashes red and the fuel supply is interrupted in order to protect the engine.

Information at a glance

Symbols

Description "Flat Tire Monitor": status of the run-flat tires, refer to page 160. "Tire Pressure Monitor": status of the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM, refer to page 155. "Engine oil level": electronic engine oil level check, refer to page 271. "Check Control": Check Control messages are stored in the background and can be displayed on the Control Display. Displaying stored Check Control messages, refer to page 130. "Service required": displaying service notifications, refer to page 133.
"Teleservice Call": Teleservice Call.

Vehicle status
General information
The status can be displayed and actions performed for several systems.
Going to the vehicle status
Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. "My MINI" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. Tilt the Controller to the left.

144

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Lights

CONTROLS

Icon Function Parking lights.
Low beams.
Instrument lighting.
Parking lights, low beams and roadside parking lights
General information
Position of switch: , , If the driver's door is opened when the ignition is switched off, the exterior lighting is automatically switched off.

The light switch element is located next to the steering wheel. Icon Function
Bad weather light.
Automatic headlight control. Cornering light. Lights off. Daytime running lights.

Parking lights
Position of switch: The vehicle is illuminated on all sides. Do not use the parking lights for extended periods; otherwise, the battery may become discharged and it would then be impossible to start the engine. When parking, switch on the one-sided roadside parking light, refer to page 146.
Low beams
Position of switch: The low beams light up when the ignition is switched on.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

145

CONTROLS

Lights

Canada: roadside parking light Concept
The vehicle can be illuminated on one side. Switching on
With radio-ready state switched off, press the lever either up or down past the resistance point for approx. 2 seconds. Switching off Briefly press the lever to the resistance point in the opposite direction.
Welcome lights and pathway lighting

3. "Lighting" 4. "Exterior lighting" 5. "Welcome lights" The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.
Pathway lighting
General information The low beams stay lit for a short while if the headlight flasher is switched on after the vehicle's radio-ready state is switched off.
Setting the duration Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. "My MINI" 2. "Vehicle settings" 3. "Lighting" 4. "Exterior lighting" 5. "Pathway lighting" 6. Set length of time. The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Welcome lights
General information Depending on the vehicle equipment and the ambient brightness, individual light functions may be switched on briefly when the vehicle is unlocked.
Activating/deactivating Position of switch: , Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. "My MINI" 2. "Vehicle settings"

Automatic headlight control
Concept
The low beams are switched on and off automatically depending on the ambient brightness, for example in tunnels, in twilight or if there is precipitation.
General information
A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can cause the lights to be switched on.
Activating
Position of switch:

146

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Lights

CONTROLS

The indicator light in the instrument cluster is illuminated when the low beams are switched on.
System limits
The automatic headlight control cannot serve as a substitute for your personal judgment of lighting conditions. For example, the sensors are unable to detect fog or hazy weather. In these situations, switch the lights on manually.

Daytime running lights

General information

Switch position:

Depending on the national-market version:

The daytime running lights light up when the ignition is switched on.

Depending on the national-market version:

after switching off the ignition, the parking

lights will illuminate in position

Activating/deactivating
In some countries, daytime running lights are mandatory, so it may not be possible to deactivate the daytime running lights. Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI" 2. "Vehicle settings" 3. "Lighting" 4. "Exterior lighting" 5. Select the desired setting. Settings are stored for the currently used vehicle key.

Cornering light
General information
Position of switch: In tight curves, for instance on mountainous roads or when turning, an additional, cornering light is switched on that lights up the inside of the curve when the vehicle is moving below a certain speed. The cornering light is automatically switched on depending on the steering angle or, where applicable, the use of turn signals. When driving in reverse, the cornering lights may be automatically switched on regardless of the steering angle.
Adaptive headlight range control
The adaptive headlight range control feature balances out acceleration and braking processes as well as the vehicle load conditions in order to avoid dazzling oncoming traffic. Illumination of the road is optimized.
High-beam Assistant
Concept
The high-beam Assistant detects other traffic participants early on and automatically switches the high beams on or off depending on the traffic situation.
General information
The high-beam Assistant ensures that the high beams are switched on, whenever the traffic situation allows. In the low speed range, the high beams are not switched on by the system.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

147

CONTROLS

Lights

The system responds to light from oncoming traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to ambient lighting, for instance in towns and cities. The high beams can be switched on and off manually at any time.
Activating/deactivating
Position of switch, depending on the vehicle equipment: , Press the button on the turn signal lever.
The indicator light in the instrument cluster is illuminated when the low beams are switched on. The headlights are automatically switched between low beams and high beams. The blue indicator light in the instrument cluster lights up when the system switches on the high beams. The high-beam Assistant is deactivated when manually switching the high beams on and off, refer to page 107. To reactivate the high-beam Assistant, press the button on the turn signal lever.
System limits
The high-beam Assistant cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment of when to use the high beams. In situation that require this, therefore switch off manually.

The system is not fully functional in the following situations, and driver intervention may be necessary: In very unfavorable weather conditions,
such as fog or heavy precipitation. When detecting poorly-lit road users
such as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders and wagons; when driving close to train or ship traffic; or at animal crossings. In tight curves, on hilltops or in depressions, in crossing traffic or half-obscured oncoming traffic on highways. In poorly-lit towns and cities or in the presence of highly reflective signs. When the windshield in front of the interior mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered with stickers, etc.
Fog lights
Bad weather light
Concept The bad weather light ensures optimized illumination of the roadway in poor visibility, such as fog or rain. The light distribution of the low beams is adapted to the visibility.
Functional requirement The automatic headlight control must be activated before switching on the bad weather light.
Switching on/off Press the button.
Instrument cluster with enhanced features: The indicator light in the instrument cluster is illuminated when the bad weather light is switched on.

148

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Lights

CONTROLS

Instrument lighting
Functional requirement
The parking lights or low beams must be switched on to set the brightness.
Adjusting
Adjust the brightness with the thumbwheel.

Switching the interior lights on/off
Press the button.
To switch off permanently: press the button and hold for approx. 3 seconds.
Switching the reading lights on and off manually
Press the button.

The reading lights are located in the front next to the interior light.

Interior lights
General information
Depending on the equipment, the interior lights, footwell lights, entry lights, and courtesy lights are controlled automatically. The thumbwheel for the instrument lighting controls brightness of some of these features.
Overview

Ambient light
General information Depending on the equipment version, lighting can be adjusted for some lights in the car's interior.
Activating/deactivating Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. "My MINI" 2. "Vehicle settings" 3. "Lighting" 4. "Interior lighting" 5. "Ambient lighting" 6. Select the desired setting. Settings are stored for the profile currently used.

1 Interior lights 2 Reading lights 3 Ambient light

Changing color Push the switch forward or back: manual color change.
Press the switch forward or backward and hold for approx. 3 seconds until the Ambient Light flashes sev-

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

149

CONTROLS

Lights

eral times: automatic color change. Push the switch again to end color changes.
The colors of the Ambient Light depend on the respectively set color world, refer to page 50.
Setting the brightness Depending on the equipment, the brightness of the ambient light can be adjusted via the thumbwheel for the instrument lighting or on the Control Display. Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI" 2. "Vehicle settings" 3. "Lighting" 4. "Interior lighting" 5. "Brightness" 6. Adjust the brightness.

150

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Safety

CONTROLS

Airbags

1 Front airbag, driver 2 Front airbag, front passenger 3 Head airbag

4 Side airbag 5 Knee airbag

Front airbags
Front airbags help protect the driver and the front passenger by responding to frontal impacts in which safety belts alone would not provide adequate protection.

Side airbag
In the event of a side impact, the side airbag protects the side of the body in the chest and lap area.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

151

CONTROLS

Safety

Head airbag
In the event of a side impact, the head airbag protects the head.
Ejection Mitigation The head airbag system is designed as an ejection mitigation countermeasure to reduce the likelihood of ejections of vehicle occupants through side windows during rollovers or side impact events.
Knee airbag
The knee airbag protects the legs in the event of a frontal impact.
Protective effect
Airbags are not triggered in every impact situation, for instance in less severe accidents or rear-end collisions.
Information on optimum effect of the airbags
Warning If the seat position is incorrect or the deployment area of the airbags is impaired, the airbag system cannot provide protection as intended and may cause additional injuries due to triggering. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Follow the information on achieving the optimum protective effect of the airbag system.
Keep a distance from the airbags. Always grasp the steering wheel on the
steering wheel rim. Hold your hands at the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to keep the risk of injury to your hands or arms as low as possible when the airbag is triggered. Adjust seat and steering wheel so that hands can be crossed over the steering wheel. Select the settings so that the

shoulder rests against the backrest when crossing the hands and the upper body is as far back as possible while still maintaining a comfortable grip on the steering wheel. Make sure that the front passenger is sitting correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and legs in the floor area and does not support them on the dashboard. Make sure that occupants keep their heads away from the side airbag. There should be no additional persons, animals or objects between an airbag and a person. Dashboard and windshield on the front passenger side must stay clear - do not attach adhesive labels or coverings and do not attach brackets or cables, for instance for GPS devices or mobile phones. Do not apply adhesive materials to the airbag cover panels, do not cover them or modify them in any way. Do not use the cover of the front airbag on the front passenger side as a storage area. Do not attach slip covers, seat cushions or other objects to the front passenger seat that are not specifically suited for seats with integrated side airbags. Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as jackets, over the backrests. Never modify either the individual components or the wiring in the airbag system. This also applies to steering wheel covers, the dashboard, and the seats. Do not remove the airbag system. Even when you follow all instructions very closely, injury from contact with the airbags cannot be fully ruled out in certain situations.

152

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Safety

CONTROLS

The ignition and inflation noise may lead to short-term and, in most cases, temporary hearing impairment in sensitive occupants. Vehicle modifications for a person with disabilities may affect the air bag system; contact MINI Customer Relations for further information. Warnings and information on the airbags are also found on the sun visors.
Functional readiness of the airbag system Safety information
Warning Individual components can be hot after triggering of the airbag system. There is a risk of injury. Do not touch individual components.
Warning Improperly executed work can lead to failure, malfunction or unintentional triggering of the airbag system. In the case of a malfunction, the airbag system might not trigger as intended despite the accident severity. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Have the airbag system checked, repaired, dismantled and scrapped by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.
Correct function When the ignition is switched on, the warning light in the instrument cluster lights up briefly and thereby
indicates the operational readiness of the entire airbag system and the belt tensioner.

Airbag system malfunctioning Warning light does not come on when
the ignition is switched on. The warning light lights up continu-
ously.
Automatic deactivation of the front-seat passenger airbags
Concept The system reads if the front passenger seat is occupied by measuring the human body's resistance. Front, knee, and side airbag on the front passenger's side are activated or deactivated.
General information Before transporting a child on the front passenger seat, refer to the safety information and instructions for children on the front passenger seat, see Children.
Safety information
Warning To ensure the front-seat passenger airbag function, the system must be able to detect whether a person is sitting in the front passenger seat. The entire seat cushion area must be used for this purpose. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that the front passenger keeps his or her feet in the floor area.
Malfunction of the automatic deactivation system When transporting older children and adults, the front-seat passenger airbags may be deactivated in certain seat positions. In this case, the indicator light for the frontseat passenger airbags lights up.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

153

CONTROLS

Safety

In this case, change the seat position so that the front-seat passenger airbags are activated and the indicator light goes out. If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have the person sit in the rear. To enable correct recognition of the occupied seat cushion. Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats
or other items to the front passenger seat unless they are specifically determined to be safe for use on the front passenger seat. Do not place any electronic devices on the front passenger seat if a child restraint system is to be installed on it. Do not place objects under the seat that could press against the seat from below. No moisture in or on the seat.
Indicator light for the front-seat passenger airbags

The indicator light does not light up when, for instance a correctly seated person of sufficient size is detected on the seat. The airbags on the front passenger side are activated.
Detected child restraint systems The system generally detects children seated in a child restraint system, particularly in child restraint systems required by NHTSA at the point in time when the vehicle was manufactured. After installing a child restraint system, make sure that the indicator light for the front-seat passenger airbags lights up. This indicates that the child restraint system has been detected and the front-seat passenger airbags are not activated.
Strength of the driver's and frontseat passenger airbag
The explosive power that activates driver's/ front-seat passenger airbags very much depends on the positions of the driver's/front passenger seat. To maintain the accuracy of this function over the long-term, calibrate the front seats as soon as a relevant Check Control message is displayed. A message also appears on the Control Display.

The indicator light for the front-seat passenger airbags indicates the operating state of the front-seat passenger airbags. The light indicates whether the airbags are either activated or deactivated.
The indicator light lights up when a child is properly seated in a child restraint system or when the seat is empty. The airbags on the front passenger side are not activated.

Calibrating the front seats
Warning There is a risk of jamming when moving the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the seat is clear prior to any adjustment. An appropriate Check Control message is displayed.

154

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Safety

CONTROLS

1. Move the respective seat all the way forward.
2. Move the respective seat forward again. The seat moves forward briefly.
3. Readjust the seat to the desired position.
The calibration procedure is completed when the Check Control message disappears. If the message continues to be displayed, repeat the calibration. If the message does not disappear after a repeat calibration, have the system checked as soon as possible.
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
Concept
The system monitors tire inflation pressure in the four mounted tires. The system warns you if there is a significant loss of pressure in one or more tires.
General information
Sensors in the tire valves measure the tire inflation pressure and, depending on the model, the tire temperature. Further information and instructions on using the system can also be found under Tire inflation pressure, refer to page 246.
Functional requirements
The following conditions must be met for the system; otherwise, reliable message of a loss of tire inflation pressure is not assured: After a tire or wheel replacement, a re-
set was performed with the correct tire inflation pressure.

After the tire inflation pressure was adjusted to a new value, a reset was performed.
Wheels with TPM wheel electronics.
Status display
Current status The system status can be displayed on the Control Display, e.g., whether or not the system is active. Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. "My MINI" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Tire Pressure Monitor" The current status is displayed.
Tire conditions
General information Tire and system status are indicated by the color of the wheels and a text message on the Control Display.
All wheels green System is active and will issue a warning related to the tire inflation pressures stored during the last reset.
One to four yellow wheels A flat tire or major drop in the tire inflation pressure has occurred in the indicated tires.
Gray wheels It may not be possible to identify tire inflation pressure losses. Possible causes: Malfunction. The system is being reset.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

155

CONTROLS

Safety

Additional information The status control display additionally shows the current tire inflation pressures. The values shown are instantaneous measurements and may vary depending on driving style or weather conditions.
Resetting the system
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Tire Pressure Monitor" 4. Start the engine but do not drive off. 5. Reset tire inflation pressure: "Perform
reset". 6. Drive away. The wheels are displayed in gray and the following is displayed "Resetting Tire Pressure Monitor...". After a travel time of several minutes, the set tire inflation pressures are accepted as reference values. The resetting process is completed automatically while driving. After successful completion of the reset, the tires appear in green on the Control Display and "Tire Pressure Monitor active. See label for recommended pressures." is displayed. You may interrupt this trip at any time. When you continue the reset resumes automatically.
Messages

Safety information
Warning A damaged regular tire with low or missing tire inflation pressure impacts handling, such as steering and braking response. Run-flat tires can maintain limited stability. There is a risk of accident. Do not continue driving if the vehicle is equipped with normal tires. Follow the information on run-flat tires and continued driving with these tires.
If a tire inflation pressure check is required
Message A icon with a Check Control message appears on the Control Display. Icon Possible cause
The system has detected a wheel change, but no reset was done. No reset was performed for the system. The system issues a warning based on the tire inflation pressures stored during the last reset. Inflation was not carried out according to specifications. The tire inflation pressure has fallen below the level of the last reset.

General information A low tire inflation pressure may cause the DSC Dynamic Stability Control to be switched on.

Measure 1. Check the tire pressure and correct as
needed. 2. Reset the system.

156

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Safety

CONTROLS

If the tire inflation pressure is too low
Message A yellow warning light is illuminated in the instrument cluster.
In addition, a icon with a Check Control message appears on the Control Display. Icon Possible cause
There is a tire inflation pressure loss. No reset was performed for the system. The system issues a warning based on the tire inflation pressures stored during the last reset.
Measure 1. Reduce your speed and drive moder-
ately. Do not exceed a speed of 80 mph/130 km/h. 2. At the next opportunity, for instance gas station, check and correct the tire inflation pressure in all four tires, if necessary. 3. Reset the system.
If there is a significant loss of tire inflation pressure
Message A yellow warning light is illuminated in the instrument cluster.
In addition, a icon with the affected tire appears in a Check Control message on the Control Display.

Icon Possible cause There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire inflation pressure. No reset was performed for the system. The system issues a warning based on the tire inflation pressures stored during the last reset.
Measure 1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers. 2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with normal tires or run-flat tires. Run-flat tires, refer to page 256, are labeled with a circular icon containing the letters RSC marked on the tire's sidewall.
Actions in the event of a flat tire
Normal tires 1. Identify the damaged tire.
To do this, check the tire inflation pressure in all four tires, for instance using the tire pressure gage of a flat tire kit. If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may not have been reset. In this case, perform the reset. If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have been initialized. In this case, initialize the system. If identification of flat tire damage is not possible, please contact a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. 2. Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tire kit or by changing the wheel.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

157

CONTROLS

Safety

Use of sealant, for instance from the flat tire kit, may damage the TPM wheel electronics. In this case, have the electronics checked and replaced at the next opportunity.
Run-flat tires
Safety information
Warning The vehicle handles differently when a run-flat tire has insufficient or no tire pressure; for instance, reduced lane stability when braking, braking distances are longer and the self-steering properties will change. There is a risk of accident. Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
Maximum speed You may continue driving with a damaged tire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
Continued driving with a flat tire If continuing to drive with a damaged tire: 1. Avoid sudden braking and steering ma-
neuvers. 2. Do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h. 3. Check the tire inflation pressure in all
four tires at the next opportunity. If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may not have been reset. In this case, perform the reset.
Possible driving distance with a depressurized tire The distance for which it may be possible to drive safely varies depending on how the vehicle is loaded and used, e.g., speed, road conditions, outside temperature. The driv-

ing distance may be less but may also be more if an economical driving style is used. If the vehicle is loaded with an average weight and used under favorable conditions, the distance for which it may be safe to drive may be up to 50 miles/80 km.
Vehicle handling with damaged tires Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will handle differently, potentially leading to conditions such as the following: Greater likelihood of swerving off
course. Longer braking distances. Changed self-steering properties. Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driving over obstacles, for instance curbs or potholes.
Final tire failure Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indicate the final failure of a tire. Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire could come loose and cause an accident. Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.
System limits
Temperature The tire inflation pressure depends on the tire's temperature. Driving or exposure to the sun will increase the tire's temperature, thus increasing the tire inflation pressure. The tire inflation pressure is reduced when the tire temperature falls again. These circumstances may cause a warning when temperatures fall very sharply.

158

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Safety

CONTROLS

Sudden tire pressure loss The system cannot indicate sudden serious tire damage caused by external circumstances.
Failure performing a reset The system does not function properly if a reset has not been carried out, for instance a flat tire is reported though tire inflation pressures are correct.
Malfunction
The yellow warning light flashes and is then illuminated continuously. A Check Control message is displayed. It may not be possible to identify tire pressure losses. Examples and recommendations in the following situations: A wheel without TPM wheel electronics, for instance an emergency wheel, is mounted: have it checked by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop as needed. Malfunction: have system checked by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. The system was unable to complete the reset. Perform a system reset again. Interference caused by systems or devices with the same radio frequency: after leaving the area of the interference, the system automatically becomes active again.
Declaration according to NHTSA/ FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring System Each tire, including the spare (if provided) should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure la-

bel. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

159

CONTROLS

Safety

and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
Flat Tire Monitor FTM
Concept
The system detects tire inflation pressure loss on the basis of rotation speed differences between the individual wheels while driving. In the event of a tire inflation pressure loss, the diameter and therefore the rotational speed of the corresponding wheel changes. The difference will be detected and reported as a flat tire. The system does not measure the actual inflation pressure in the tires.
Functional requirements
The following conditions must be met for the system; otherwise, reliable message of a loss of tire inflation pressure is not assured: After a tire or wheel replacement, an ini-
tialization was performed with the correct tire inflation pressure. After the tire pressure was adjusted to a new value, an initialization was performed.
Status display
The current status of the flat tire monitor can be displayed, for instance whether the RPA is active. Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. "My MINI" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Flat Tire Monitor" The status is displayed.

Initialization required
An initialization must be performed in the following situations: After the tire inflation pressure has
been adjusted. After a tire or wheel replacement.
Performing initialization
When initializing, the set tire inflation pressures serve as reference values in order to detect a flat tire. Initialization is started by confirming the tire inflation pressures. Do not initialize the system when driving with tire chains. Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. "My MINI" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Flat Tire Monitor" 4. Start the engine but do not drive off. 5. Start the initialization with: "Perform
reset". 6. Drive away. The initialization is completed while driving, which can be interrupted at any time. The initialization automatically continues when driving continues.
Messages
General information When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if needed.
Safety information
Warning A damaged regular tire with low or missing tire inflation pressure impacts handling, such as steering and braking response. Run-flat tires can maintain limited

160

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Safety

CONTROLS

stability. There is a risk of accident. Do not continue driving if the vehicle is equipped with normal tires. Follow the information on run-flat tires and continued driving with these tires.
Indication of a flat tire A yellow warning light is illuminated in the instrument cluster.
In addition, a icon with a Check Control message appears on the Control Display. Icon Possible cause
There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire inflation pressure.

may not have been initialized. In this case, initialize the system. If identification of flat tire damage is not possible, please contact a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. 2. Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tire kit or by changing the wheel. Use of sealant, for instance from the flat tire kit, may damage the TPM wheel electronics. In this case, have the electronics checked and replaced at the next opportunity.
Run-flat tires
Safety information

Measure 1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers. 2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with normal tires or run-flat tires. Run-flat tires, refer to page 256, are labeled with a circular icon containing the letters RSC marked on the tire's sidewall.
Actions in the event of a flat tire
Normal tires 1. Identify the damaged tire.
To do this, check the tire inflation pressure in all four tires, for instance using the tire pressure gage of a flat tire kit. If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may not have been reset. In this case, perform the reset. If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor

Warning The vehicle handles differently when a run-flat tire has insufficient or no tire pressure; for instance, reduced lane stability when braking, braking distances are longer and the self-steering properties will change. There is a risk of accident. Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
Maximum speed You may continue driving with a damaged tire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
Continued driving with a flat tire If continuing to drive with a damaged tire: 1. Avoid sudden braking and steering ma-
neuvers. 2. Do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h. 3. Check the tire inflation pressure in all
four tires at the next opportunity. If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

161

CONTROLS

Safety

may not have been initialized. In this case, initialize the system.
Possible driving distance with a depressurized tire The distance for which it may be possible to drive safely varies depending on how the vehicle is loaded and used, e.g., speed, road conditions, outside temperature. The driving distance may be less but may also be more if an economical driving style is used. If the vehicle is loaded with an average weight and used under favorable conditions, the distance for which it may be safe to drive may be up to 50 miles/80 km.
Vehicle handling with damaged tires Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will handle differently, potentially leading to conditions such as the following: Greater likelihood of swerving off
course. Longer braking distances. Changed self-steering properties. Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driving over obstacles, for instance curbs or potholes.
Final tire failure Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indicate the final failure of a tire. Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire could come loose and cause an accident. Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.
System limits
The system could be delayed or malfunction in the following situations: A natural, even tire inflation pressure
loss in all four tires will not be recog-

nized. Therefore, check the tire inflation pressure regularly. Sudden serious tire damage caused by external circumstances cannot be recognized in advance. When the system has not been initialized. When driving on a snowy or slippery road surface. Sporty driving style: spinning traction wheels, high lateral acceleration (drifting). When driving with tire chains.
Intelligent Safety
Concept
Intelligent Safety enables central operation of the driver assistance systems. The intelligent safety systems can help prevent an imminent collision. Forward Collision Warning with city
collision mitigation, refer to page 163. Pedestrian Collision Warning with City
Collision Mitigation, refer to page 167. Lane departure warning, refer to
page 169.
Safety information
Warning The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment in assessing visibility and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

162

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Safety

CONTROLS

Warning Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment. Due to its limits, the system may not issue warnings or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a manner that is not consistent with their normal use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.
Warning Due to system limits, individual functions can malfunction during tow-starting/ towing with the Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a risk of accident. Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to tow-starting/towing.
Overview Button in the vehicle

Press button briefly: The menu for the Intelligent
Safety system is displayed. The systems are individually switched off according to their respective settings. LED lights up orange or goes out respective to their individual settings. Adjust the settings as needed. The individual settings are stored for the driver profile currently in use.
Press button again: All Intelligent Safety systems
are switched on. The LED lights up green.
Hold down button: All Intelligent Safety systems
are switched off. The LED goes out.
Forward Collision Warning with city light braking function

Intelligent Safety button
Switching on/off
Some Intelligent Safety systems are automatically active after every departure. Some Intelligent Safety systems activate according to the last setting.

Concept
The system may prevent some accidents. In the event of an accident, the system may reduce impact speed. The system sounds a warning before an imminent collision and activates brakes independently, if needed. The Brake Intervention function activates and applies the brakes with limited force and duration. A camera at the base of the interior mirror controls the system. The Forward Collision Warning is available even if cruise control has been deactivated.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

163

CONTROLS

Safety

With the vehicle approaching another vehicle intentionally, the Forward Collision Warning and brake intervention are delayed in order to avoid false system reactions.
General information
The system warns at two levels of an imminent danger of collision at speeds from approx. 3 mph/5 km/h. The timing of warnings may vary with the current driving situation. If necessary, a brake intervention will occur. Depending on the equipment and national-market version, the brake intervention will occur up to approx. 35 mph/60 km/h or up to approx. 35 mph/60 km/h.
Detection range

Overview Button in the vehicle

Objects that the system can detect are taken into account.
Safety information
Warning The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment in assessing visibility and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

Intelligent Safety button

164

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Safety

CONTROLS

Camera

The LED goes out.

The camera is installed near the interior mirror. Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror clean and clear.

Setting the warning time
The warning time can be set via the Central Information Display (CID).
1. "My MINI" 2. "Vehicle settings" 3. "Intelligent Safety" 4. "Warning time" 5. Select the desired setting. The selected warning time is stored for the driver profile currently in use.

Switching on/off
Switching on automatically The system is automatically active when the vehicle is turned on.
Switching on/off manually Press button briefly: The menu for the Intelligent Safety system is displayed. The systems are individually switched off according to their respective settings.
LED lights up orange or goes out respective to their individual settings.
Adjust the settings as needed. The individual settings are stored for the driver profile currently in use.
Press button again: All Intelligent Safety systems
are switched on. The LED lights up green.

Warning with braking function
Display A warning symbol appears in the instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display if a collision with a detected vehicle is imminent. Icon Measure
Icon lights up red: prewarning. Brake and increase distance.
Symbol flashes red and an acoustic signal sounds: acute warning. Brake and make an evasive maneuver, if necessary.
Prewarning This warning is provided, for instance when there is impending danger of a collision or the distance to the vehicle ahead is too small. If a prewarning is provided, respond by braking as warranted.

Hold down button: All Intelligent Safety systems
are switched off.

Acute warning with braking function An acute warning is displayed when there is an imminent danger of collision due to

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

165

CONTROLS

Safety

the vehicle approaching another object at a high speed. The driver must intervene actively when there is an acute warning. If necessary, the driver is assisted by a minor automatic brake intervention in a possible risk of collision. Acute warnings may be provided even when there has been no prior warning.
Brake intervention The warning prompts the driver to intervene. While a warning is active, the maximum braking force is used when the brake is applied. In order to activate the Brake Assistant function, you must apply the brakes quickly and forcefully. If there is a risk of collision, the system may assist with braking. When the vehicle is traveling at a low speed, the vehicle may come to a complete stop. Manual transmission: during a brake intervention up to a complete stop, the engine may be shut down. The driver may interrupt the braking intervention function by stepping on the accelerator pedal or by actively moving the steering wheel. The system's ability to detect objects may be limited in some circumstances. Refer to the information in this Owner's Manual regarding the limitations of the system and actively intervene as warranted.
System limits
Safety information
Warning The system is designed to operate in certain conditions and circumstances. Due to conditions or other factors, the system may not respond. There may be a risk of

accident or risk of damage to property. Actively intervene as warranted. Refer to the information in this Owner's Manual regarding the scope of the system's operation and limitations.
Detection range The system's detection potential is limited. Thus, a system reaction might not come or might come late. The following situations may not be detected, for example: Slow moving vehicles when you ap-
proach them at high speed. Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front
of you, or sharply decelerating vehicles. Vehicles with an unusual rear appear-
ance. Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
Functional limitations The system may be limited in the following situations: In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snow-
fall. In tight curves. If the field of view of the camera or the
windshield is dirty or covered. If the driving stability control systems
are deactivated, for instance DSC OFF. Up to 10 seconds after the start of the
engine via the Start/Stop button. During calibration of the camera imme-
diately after vehicle delivery. If there are constant blinding effects be-
cause of oncoming light, for instance from the sun low in the sky.
Warning sensitivity The more sensitive the warning settings are, the more warnings are displayed.

166

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Safety

CONTROLS

Therefore, there may also be an excess of premature or unjustified warnings and reactions.
Pedestrian Collision Warning with City Collision Mitigation

Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and left of the central area.
A collision is imminent if pedestrians are located within the central area. A warning is issued about pedestrians who are located within the extended area only if they are moving in the direction of the central area.

Concept
The system may prevent some accidents with pedestrians. When driving at city speeds, the system will issue a warning if there is imminent risk of a collision with pedestrians, and support this with a light braking function. The camera at the base of the interior mirror controls the system.
General information
In sufficiently bright conditions, the system issues a warning of a possible risk of collision with pedestrians in the speed range from approx. 6 mph/10 km/h to approx. 35 mph/60 km/h The system reacts to people who are within the detection range of the system.
Detection range

Safety information
Warning The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment in assessing visibility and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.
Warning Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment. Due to its limits, the system may not issue warnings or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a manner that is not consistent with their normal use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

The detection area in front of the vehicle is divided into two areas: Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of
the vehicle.

Warning Due to system limits, individual functions can malfunction during tow-starting/ towing with the Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a risk of accident. Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to tow-starting/towing.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

167

CONTROLS

Safety

Overview Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety button Camera

switched off according to their respective settings. LED lights up orange or goes out respective to their individual settings. Adjust the settings as needed. The individual settings are stored for the driver profile currently in use.
Press button again: All Intelligent Safety systems
are switched on. The LED lights up green.
Hold down button: All Intelligent Safety systems
are switched off. The LED goes out.

Warning with braking function

The camera is installed near the interior mirror. Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror clean and clear.

Display If a collision with a detected person is imminent, a warning symbol appears on the instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display.
The red icon is displayed and a signal sounds. Intervene immediately by braking or make an evasive maneuver.

Brake intervention The warning prompts the driver to intervene. While a warning is active, the maximum braking force is used when the brake is applied. In order to activate the Brake Assistant function, you must apply the brakes quickly and forcefully. If there is a risk of collision, the system may assist with braking. When the vehicle is traveling at a low speed, the vehicle may come to a complete stop.

168

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Safety

CONTROLS

Manual transmission: during a brake intervention up to a complete stop, the engine may be shut down. The driver may interrupt the braking intervention function by stepping on the accelerator pedal or by actively moving the steering wheel. The system's ability to detect objects may be limited in some circumstances. Refer to the information in this Owner's Manual regarding the limitations of the system and actively intervene as warranted.
System limits
Safety information
Warning The system is designed to operate in certain conditions and circumstances. Due to conditions or other factors, the system may not respond. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Actively intervene as warranted. Refer to the information in this Owner's Manual regarding the scope of the system's operation and limitations.
Detection range The detection potential of the camera is limited. Thus, a warning might not be issued or be issued late. The following situations may not be detected, for example: Partially covered pedestrians. Pedestrians that are not detected as
such because of the viewing angle or contour. Pedestrians outside of the detection range.

Pedestrians having a body size less than 32 in/80 cm.
Functional limitations The system may be limited or may not be available in the following situations: In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snow-
fall. In tight curves. If the field of view of the camera or the
windshield is dirty or covered. If the driving stability control systems
are deactivated, for instance DSC OFF. Up to 10 seconds after the start of the
engine via the Start/Stop button. During calibration of the camera imme-
diately after vehicle delivery. If there are constant blinding effects be-
cause of oncoming light, for instance from the sun low in the sky. When it is dark outside.
Lane departure warning
Concept
The lane departure warning alerts when the vehicle on roads with lane markings is about to leave the lane.
General information
Depending on the country version, the system issues a warning at speeds between 35 mph/55 km/h and 45 mph/70 km/h. Warnings are issued by means of a steering wheel vibration. The time of the warning may vary depending on the current driving situation. The system does not provide a warning if the turn signal is set before leaving the lane.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

169

CONTROLS

Safety

Safety information

Camera

Warning The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment in assessing road and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate. Do not jerk the steering wheel in response to a warning.
Warning Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment. Due to its limits, the system may not issue warnings or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a manner that is not consistent with their normal use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.
Overview Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety button

The camera is installed near the interior mirror. Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror clean and clear.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically The lane departure warning is automatically activated after departure, if the function was switched on the last time the engine was stopped.
Switching on/off manually Press button briefly: The menu for the Intelligent Safety system is displayed. The systems are individually switched off according to their respective settings.
LED lights up orange or goes out respective to their individual settings.
Adjust the settings as needed. The individual settings are stored for the driver profile currently in use.
Press button again: All Intelligent Safety systems
are switched on. The LED lights up green.

170

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Safety

CONTROLS

Hold down button: All Intelligent Safety systems
are switched off. The LED goes out.
Display in the instrument cluster
The icon illuminates green: at least one lane marking was detected and warnings can be issued.
Issued warning
If you leave the lane If you leave the lane and if a lane marking has been detected, the steering wheel vibrates. If the turn signal is switched on before changing the lane, a warning is not issued.
End of warning The warning is canceled in the following situations: Automatically after approx. 3 seconds. When returning to your own lane. When braking hard. When using the turn signal.
System limits
Safety information
Warning The system is designed to operate in certain conditions and circumstances. Due to conditions or other factors, the system may not respond. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Actively intervene as warranted. Refer to the information in this Owner's Manual re-

garding the scope of the system's operation and limitations.
Functional limitations The system may be limited in the following situations: In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snow-
fall. In the event of missing, worn, poorly
visible, merging, diverging, or multiple lane markings such as in construction areas. When lane markings are covered in snow, ice, dirt or water. In tight curves or on narrow lanes. When lane markings are covered by objects. When driving very close to the vehicle in front of you. When driving toward bright lights. When the windshield in front of the interior mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered with stickers, etc. During calibration of the camera immediately after vehicle delivery.
Manual Speed Limiter
Concept
The system can be used to set a speed limit, for instance to prevent the vehicle from exceeding speed limits.
General information
The system can limit the speed, starting at a value of 20 mph/30 km/h. The vehicle can be driven at any speed below the set speed limit.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

171

CONTROLS

Safety

Exceeding the speed limit When necessary, the speed limit can be intentionally overcome by stepping on the gas. When the vehicle speed exceeds the set speed limit, a warning is issued.

No brake intervention If the set speed limit is reached or unintentionally exceeded, such as when driving downhill, the vehicle is not actively braked. When the speed limit is set during a trip to a value below the driving speed, the vehicle coasts until its driving speed drops below the set speed limit.

Overview

Steering wheel buttons, left

Button

Function System on/off.

Increase the speed limit.

Reduce the speed limit.

Operation
Switching on Press the button on the steering wheel.
The current speed is accepted as the speed limit. If the system is switched on while the vehicle is stationary or driving at low speeds, 20 mph/30 km/h is set as the speed limit. The set speed is displayed under the LIMIT or LIM indicator.

When the speed limit is switched on, DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on as well, if needed.
Switching off Press the button on the steering wheel.
The system switches off automatically in the following situations, for example: When shifting into reverse gear. When the engine is switched off. When cruise control is switched on. On activation of Dynamic Traction Con-
trol DTC or deactivation of DSC. The displays go out.
Changing the speed limit or button: press up or down repeat-
edly until the desired speed limit is set. or button: each time it is pressed
to the resistance point, the speed limit increases or decreases by 1 mph, 1 km/h. or button: each time it is pressed past the resistance point, the desired speed changes by a maximum of 5 mph/ 10 km/h. When the speed limit is set during a trip to a value below the current speed, the vehicle coasts until it drops to the set speed limit.
Exceeding the speed limit
The speed limit can be exceeded intentionally. There is no acoustic warning in this case. Press the accelerator pedal all the way down to intentionally exceed the set speed limit. When the vehicle speed drops below the set speed limit, the limit is automatically reactivated.

172

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Safety

CONTROLS

Warning when the speed limit is exceeded
Visual warning If the set speed limit is exceeded, the LIMIT or LIM indicator flashes while the vehicle speed is greater than the speed limit.
Acoustic warning If the speed limit is exceeded uninten-
tionally, a signal sounds. When the speed limit is reduced to be-
low the vehicle speed while driving, a signal sounds after approx. 30 seconds. When the speed limit is intentionally exceeded by stepping on the accelerator pedal all the way down, there is no signal.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Instrument cluster without enhanced features: The desired speed is displayed under the LIMIT indicator.
Instrument cluster with enhanced features: The desired speed is displayed under the LIM indicator.
The indicator does not light up: the system is switched off.
The indicator lights up green: the system is active.
Display flashes green: set speed limit exceeded.
Displays in the Head-up Display
The information from the Speed Limiter can also be displayed in the Head-up Display.

Fatigue alert
Concept
The system can detect decreasing alertness or fatigue of the driver during long, monotonous trips, for instance on highways. In this situation, it is recommended that the driver takes a break.
Safety information
Warning The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment in assessing one's physical state. An increasing lack of alertness or fatigue may not be detected or not be detected in time. There is a risk of accident. Make sure that the driver is rested and alert. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions.
Function
The system is switched on each time the engine is started and cannot be switched off. After travel has begun, the system monitors certain aspects of the driver's behavior, so that decreasing alertness or fatigue can be detected. This procedure takes the following criteria into account: Personal driving style, for instance
steering behavior. Driving conditions, for instance time,
length of trip. Starting at approximately 43 mph/70 km/h, the system is active and can display a recommendation to take a break.
Break recommendation
If the driver becomes less alert or fatigued, a message is displayed in the Control Dis-

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

173

CONTROLS

Safety

play with the recommendation to take a break. A recommendation to take a break is displayed only once during an uninterrupted trip. After a break, another recommendation to take a break cannot be displayed until after approximately 45 minutes.
System limits
The function may be limited in the following situations and may issue an incorrect warning or no warning at all: When the time is set incorrectly. When the vehicle speed is mainly below
about 43 mph/70 km/h. With a sporty driving style, such as dur-
ing rapid acceleration or when cornering fast. In active driving situations, such as when changing lanes frequently. When the road surface is poor. In the event of strong side winds. The system is reset approx. 45 minutes after parking the vehicle, for instance in the case of a break during longer trips on highways.

At standstill
After coming to a halt, the brake is released automatically. Secure the vehicle against rolling.
Harder vehicle braking
In certain situations, it can be necessary to bring the vehicle to a halt more quickly than the Brake Assistant allows. To do this, quickly apply extra force to the brake. For a brief period, the braking pressure will be higher than the braking pressure that is achieved by the automatic braking function. This interrupts automatic braking.
Interrupting automatic braking
It can be necessary to interrupt automatic braking in certain situations, for instance for an evasive maneuver. Interrupt automatic braking: By pressing the brake pedal. By pressing the accelerator pedal.

PostCrash iBrake
Concept
In the event of an accident, the system can bring the vehicle to a halt automatically without intervention by the driver in certain situations. This can reduce the risk of a further collision and the consequences thereof.

174

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Driving stability control systems
Driving stability control systems

CONTROLS

Vehicle features and options DSC Dynamic Stability Control

This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.
Antilock Braking System ABS
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during braking. The vehicle maintains its steering power even during full brake applications, which increases the active safety. ABS is ready when the drive-ready state is switched on.
Brake assistant
When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system automatically boosts the vehicle braking capability to the furthest possible extent. It reduces the braking distance to a minimum during an emergency stop. This system utilizes all of the capabilities provided by the Antilock Brake System ABS. Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal for the duration of the emergency stop.

Concept
Within the physical limits, the system helps to keep the vehicle on a steady course by reducing engine speed and by applying brake intervention to the individual wheels.
General information
DSC detects the following unstable driving conditions, for instance: Fishtailing, which can lead to oversteer-
ing. Loss of traction of the front wheels,
which can lead to understeering. Dynamic Traction Control DTC, refer to page 176, is a version of the DSC where drive power is optimized.
Safety information
Warning The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment in assessing the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the system, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.
Warning When driving with a roof load, for instance with roof-mounted luggage rack, the vehicle's center of gravity is higher, which increases the risk of the vehicle tipping in critical driving situations. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

175

CONTROLS

Driving stability control systems

to property. Do not deactivate DSC Dynamic Stability Control when driving with roof load.
Indicator/warning lights
The indicator light flashes: DSC controls the drive and braking forces. The indicator light lights up: DSC has malfunctioned.
Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF
General information When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is reduced during acceleration and when driving in curves. To increase driving stability, activate DSC again as soon as possible.
Deactivating DSC Press and hold this button but not longer than approx. 10 seconds, until the indicator light for DSC OFF
lights up in the instrument cluster and displays DSC OFF. DSC is switched off.
Activating DSC Press the button. DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator
light go out.

Automatic activation
When DSC is deactivated, automatic activation occurs in the following situations: The vehicle has a flat tire. When activating cruise control in the
TRACTION or DSC OFF settings.
DTC Dynamic Traction Control
Concept
DTC is a version of the DSC Dynamic Stability Control where drive power is optimized. The system ensures maximum drive power on unusual road conditions, for instance unplowed snow covered roads, or loose road surfaces, but with somewhat limited driving stability. When DTC is activated, the vehicle has maximum traction. Driving stability is limited during acceleration and when driving in curves. Drive carefully. You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC under the following special circumstances: When driving in slush or on uncleared,
snow-covered roads. When driving off from deep snow or
loose ground. When driving with tire chains.

Indicator/warning lights When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is displayed in the instrument cluster.
The indicator light lights up: DSC is deactivated.

Deactivating/activating DTC Dynamic Traction Control
Activating DTC Press the button.

176

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Driving stability control systems

CONTROLS

TRACTION is displayed in the instrument cluster and the indicator light for DSC OFF lights up.
Deactivating DTC Press the button again. TRACTION and the DSC OFF indica-
tor light go out.
Performance Control
Performance Control enhances the agility of the vehicle. To increase maneuverability, wheels are braked individually when a sporty driving style is used.
Adaptive chassis
Concept
The system reduces undesired vehicle movements. The driving dynamics and driving comfort are enhanced depending on the road surface condition and driving style.
MINI Driving Modes switch
Concept
The MINI Driving Modes switch helps to fine-tune the vehicle's settings and features. Choose between three different programs. Pressing the MINI Driving Modes switch will activate the particular program.

Operating the programs

Switch

Program
SPORT MID GREEN

MID
MID provides balanced tuning. With each starting operation, MID is activated using the Start/Stop button.
GREEN
Concept GREEN provides consistent tuning to maximize range.
Activating GREEN Press the MINI Driving Modes switch downward until GREEN is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Configuring GREEN
Via MINI Driving Modes switch 1. Activate GREEN. 2. "Configure GREEN" 3. Configure the program. This configuration is retrieved when GREEN is activated.
Via the Central Information Display (CID) 1. "My MINI" 2. "Vehicle settings" 3. If necessary, "Driving mode" 4. "Configure GREEN" 5. Select the desired setting.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

177

CONTROLS

Driving stability control systems

This configuration is retrieved when GREEN is activated.
SPORT
Concept Consistently sporty tuning of the drivetrain for greater driving agility.
Activating SPORT Press the MINI Driving Modes switch upward until SPORT is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Configuring driving program
Settings can be made for the following driving programs in Drive mode: GREEN, refer to page 177.
Displays
Program selection Pressing the MINI Driving Modes switch displays a list of programs, which can be selected.

Driving off with the drive-off assistant
1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot brake.
2. Release the foot brake and drive off without delay.
After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is held in place for approx. 2 seconds.
Servotronic
Servotronic is a speed-dependent power steering function. The system provides the steering force with more support at low speeds than at higher ones. This makes it easier to park, for instance, and makes steering firmer when driving at faster speeds. Furthermore, the steering force adapts according to the driving program, so that a firm, sporty feel or a comfortable steering response is conveyed.

Selected program The instrument cluster displays the selected program.

Drive-off assistant
Concept
This system supports driving off on uphill grades. The parking brake is not required.

178

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Driving comfort

CONTROLS

Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.
Camera-based cruise control
Concept
Using this system, a desired speed and a distance to a vehicle ahead can be adjusted using the buttons on the steering wheel. The system maintains the desired speed on clear roads. The vehicle accelerates or brakes automatically. If a vehicle is driving ahead of you, the system adjusts the speed of your vehicle so that the set distance to the vehicle ahead is maintained. The speed is adjusted as far as the given situation allows. The distance can be adjusted in several steps. For safety reasons, it depends on the respective speed. With the Stop&Go function for Steptronic transmissions: if the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a halt, and then proceeds to drive again shortly thereafter, the system is able to detect this within the given system limits.

General information
A camera on the interior mirror is used to detect vehicles driving ahead. Depending on the settings, the cruise control settings may change under certain conditions.
Safety information
Warning The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment in assessing the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the system, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.
Warning The desired speed can be incorrectly adjusted or called up by mistake. There is a risk of accident. Adjust the desired speed to the traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.
Warning Risk of accident due to too high speed differences to other vehicles, for instance in the following situations: When fast approaching a slowly mov-
ing vehicle. Vehicle suddenly swerving into own
lane. When fast approaching standing ve-
hicles.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

179

CONTROLS

Driving comfort

There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

Overview

Buttons on the steering wheel

Button

Function Cruise control on/off, refer to page 181. Pause cruise control, refer to page 181. Continue cruise control with the last setting, refer to page 182. Reduce distance, refer to page 182. Increase the distance, refer to page 182. Increase speed, refer to page 181. Reduce speed, refer to page 181.

Buttons are arranged according to vehicle's series, optional features and country specifications. Camera
The camera is installed near the interior mirror. Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror clean and clear.
Functional requirements
The system is best used on well-constructed roads. The system is functional at speeds beginning at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h. With the Stop&Go function for Steptronic transmissions: the system can also be activated while the vehicle is stationary. The max. speed that can be set is 85 mph/140 km/h. Manual transmission: Active Cruise Control is interrupted below a speed of approx. 20 mph/30 km/h. The system does not brake to a stop. If distance control is switched off, refer to page 183, higher desired speeds can be selected as well.

180

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Driving comfort

CONTROLS

Switching on/off and interrupting cruise control
Switching on Press the button on the steering wheel.
Instrument cluster without enhanced features: Display in the instrument cluster lights up.
Instrument cluster without enhanced features: Display in the instrument cluster lights up. The current speed is adopted as desired speed and displayed with icon.
Instrument cluster with enhanced features: Display in the instrument cluster lights up. The current speed is adopted as desired speed and displayed with icon. Cruise control is active and maintains the set speed. DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if necessary.
Switching off With the Stop&Go function for Steptronic transmissions: when switching off while stationary, depress the brake pedal simultaneously.
Press the button on the steering wheel. The displays go out. The stored desired speed is deleted.
Interrupting manually Press the button on the steering wheel.

With the Stop&Go function for Steptronic transmission: when canceling while stationary, depress the brake pedal simultaneously.
Interrupting automatically The system is automatically interrupted in the following situations: When the driver applies the brakes. Manual transmission: when the clutch
pedal is depressed for a few seconds or released while a gear is not engaged. If selector lever position N is set. Dynamic Traction Control DTC is activated or DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated. If DSC Dynamic Stability Control intervenes. If the detection range of the camera is impaired, for instance by soiling, heavy precipitation or glare effects from the sun. Manual transmission: if the vehicle in front decelerates below a speed of approx. 20 mph/30 km/h. With the Stop&Go function for Steptronic transmissions: following a stationary period of approx. 3 seconds, after the vehicle was braked to a stop by the system.
Setting the speed
Maintaining/storing the speed Press or button in the interrupted state. When the system is switched on, the current speed is maintained and stored as the desired speed.
Instrument cluster without enhanced features:

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

181

CONTROLS

Driving comfort

The stored speed is displayed by the icon in the Info Display of the instrument cluster.
Instrument cluster with enhanced features: The stored speed is displayed.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if necessary.
Changing the speed or button: press until the desired
speed is set. If active, the displayed speed is stored and the vehicle reaches the stored speed when the road is clear. or button: each time it is pressed
to the point of resistance, the desired speed increases or decreases by approx. 1 mph/1 km/h. or button: each time it is pressed past the resistance point, the desired speed changes by a maximum of 5 mph/ 10 km/h. or button: hold down to repeat the action.
Adjusting the distance
Safety information
Warning The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment. Due to the system limits, braking can be late. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Be aware to the traffic situation at all times. Adjust the distance to the traffic and weather conditions and maintain the prescribed safety distance, possibly by braking.

Reduce distance Press the button repeatedly until the desired distance is set.
Instrument cluster without enhanced features: The set distance is briefly displayed in the left part of the Info Display of the instrument cluster.
Increase the distance Press the button repeatedly until the desired distance is set.
Instrument cluster without enhanced features: The set distance is briefly displayed in the left part of the Info Display of the instrument cluster.
Continuing cruise control
General information An interrupted cruise control can be continued by calling up the stored speed. Make sure that the difference between current speed and stored speed is not too large before calling up the stored speed. Otherwise, unintentional braking or accelerating may occur. In the following cases, the stored speed value is deleted and cannot be called up again: When the system is switched off. When the ignition is switched off.
Calling up the stored speed and distance
Press the button with the system interrupted. Cruise control is continued with the stored values. The in-

182

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Driving comfort

CONTROLS

strument cluster briefly displays the selected distance.
Switching distance control on/off Safety information

Display lights up green: system is active, the display indicates the desired speed.
Display lights up orange: system is interrupted, the display indicates the stored speed.
No display: system is switched off.

Warning The system does not react to traffic driving ahead of you, but instead maintains the stored speed. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Adjust the desired speed to the traffic conditions and brake as needed.
Switching distance control off Distance control can be switched off and on when driving with cruise control activated.
Press and hold this button.
Or: Press and hold this button.

Instrument cluster with enhanced features: Display lights up green:
system is active, the display indicates the desired speed. Speed value is illuminated gray: system is interrupted. No display: system is switched off.
If no speed is indicated, it is possible that the conditions necessary for operation are not currently fulfilled.
Distance to vehicle ahead of you
Distance display Distance 1

The indicator light in the instrument cluster lights up.

Distance 2

To switch distance control back on, press one of the two buttons again briefly. After changing over distance control, a Check Control message is displayed.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Desired speed and stored speed Instrument cluster without enhanced features: In addition to the indicator light, the
desired speed is displayed in the Info Display.

Distance 3
Distance 4 This value is set automatically after the system is switched on. Instrument clusters without enhanced features: selected distance from the vehicle driving ahead is briefly displayed in the left hand portion of the Info Display.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

183

CONTROLS

Driving comfort

Detected vehicle Instrument cluster without enhanced features: Icon lights up orange: a vehicle has
been detected ahead of you.
Instrument cluster with enhanced features: Vehicle symbol is displayed: a vehicle has been detected ahead of you.
With the Stop&Go function for Steptronic transmissions: Rolling bars: the detected vehicle has driven away. ACC does not accelerate. To accelerate, activate ACC as follows: By briefly pressing the accelerator pedal. By pressing the RES CNCL button. By pressing the or button.

System interrupted without detected vehicle. System interrupted with detected vehicle.
Displays in the Head-up Display
The information from Active Cruise Control can also be displayed in the Head-up Display.
System limits Detection range

Indicator/warning lights Instrument cluster without enhanced features: Icon flashes orange.
Instrument cluster with enhanced features: Vehicle symbol flashes.
The conditions are not adequate for the system to work. The system was deactivated but applies the brakes until you actively resume control by pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator pedal.
Icon flashes red and a signal sounds: Brake and make an evasive maneuver, if necessary.

The detection capacity of the system and the automatic braking capacity are limited. Two-wheeled vehicles for instance might not be detected.
Deceleration The system does not decelerate in the following situations: For pedestrians, cyclists or similarly
slow-moving road users. For red traffic lights. For cross traffic. For oncoming traffic. Unlit vehicles or vehicles with nonwork-
ing lighting at night.

184

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Merging vehicles

Driving comfort Cornering

CONTROLS

A vehicle driving in front of you is not detected until it is completely within the same lane as your vehicle. If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly merges into your lane, the system may not be able to automatically restore the selected distance. It may not be possible to restore the selected distance in certain situations, including if you are driving significantly faster than vehicles driving ahead of you, for instance when rapidly approaching a truck. When a vehicle driving ahead of you is reliably detected, the system requests that the driver intervene by braking and carrying out evasive maneuvers, if needed.

When the desired speed is too high for a curve, the speed is reduced slightly. Because curves may not be anticipated in advance, drive into a curve at an appropriate speed. The system has a limited detection range. Situations can arise in tight curves where a vehicle driving ahead will not be detected or will be detected very late.

With Stop&Go function for Steptronic transmission: driving off In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive off automatically; for example: On steep uphill grades. In front of bumps in the road. In these cases, press on the accelerator pedal.

When you approach a curve the system may briefly report vehicles in the next lane due to the bend of the curve. If the system decelerates you may compensate it by briefly accelerating. After releasing the accelerator pedal the system is reactivated and controls speed independently.

Weather The following restrictions can occur under unfavorable weather or light conditions: Poorer vehicle recognition. Short-term interruptions for vehicles
that are already recognized.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

185

CONTROLS

Driving comfort

Examples of unfavorable weather or light conditions: Wet conditions. Snowfall. Slush. Fog. Glare. Drive attentively, and react to the current traffic situation. If necessary, intervene actively, for instance by braking, steering or evading.
Engine power The desired speed may not be maintained on uphill grades if engine power is insufficient.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed if the system fails or was automatically deactivated. The system may be limited in the following situations: When an object was not correctly de-
tected. In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snow-
fall. In tight curves. If the field of view of the camera or the
windshield is dirty or covered. When driving toward bright lights. Up to 20 seconds after the start of the
engine, via the Start/Stop button. During calibration of the camera imme-
diately after vehicle delivery.

Cruise control
Concept
Using this system, a desired speed can be adjusted using the buttons on the steering wheel. The system maintains the desired speed. The system accelerates and brakes automatically as needed.
General information
The system is functional at speeds beginning at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h. Depending on the settings, the cruise control settings may change under certain conditions.
Safety information
Warning The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment in assessing the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the system, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.
Warning The use of the system can lead to an increased risk of accidents in the following situations, for instance: On winding roads. In heavy traffic. On slippery roads, in fog, snow, or
wet conditions, or on a loose road surface. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Only use the system if driving at constant speed is possible.

186

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Driving comfort

CONTROLS

Overview

Buttons on the steering wheel

Button

Function Cruise control on/off, refer to page 187. Pause cruise control, refer to page 187. Continue cruise control with the last setting, refer to page 188. Increase speed, refer to page 187. Reduce speed, refer to page 187.

Switching on/off and interrupting cruise control

Switching on Press the button on the steering wheel.

Instrument cluster without enhanced features: The indicator light in the instrument cluster lights up.

Instrument cluster without enhanced features: The current speed is adopted as the desired speed and is displayed with the symbol in the instrument cluster.

limit.

Instrument cluster with enhanced features: Display in the instrument cluster lights up. The current speed is adopted as the speed

Cruise control is active and maintains the set speed. DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if necessary.
Switching off Press the button on the steering wheel.
The displays go out. The stored desired speed is deleted.
Interrupting manually When active, press the button on the steering wheel.
Interrupting automatically The system is automatically interrupted in the following situations: When the driver applies the brakes. If the clutch pedal is depressed for a few
seconds or released while a gear is not engaged. If the gear engaged is too high for the current speed. If selector lever position N is set. Dynamic Traction Control DTC is activated or DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated. If DSC Dynamic Stability Control intervenes.
Setting the speed
Maintaining/storing the speed Press or button in the interrupted state. When the system is switched on, the current speed is maintained and stored as the desired speed. The stored speed is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

187

CONTROLS

Driving comfort

DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if necessary.
Changing the speed or button: press until the desired
speed is set. If active, the displayed speed is stored and the vehicle reaches the stored speed when the road is clear. or button: each time it is pressed
to the point of resistance, the desired speed increases or decreases by approx. 1 mph/1 km/h. or button: each time it is pressed past the resistance point, the desired speed changes by a maximum of 5 mph/ 10 km/h. or button: press button to resistance point and hold. The vehicle accelerates or decelerates without pressure on the accelerator pedal. After the button is released, the vehicle maintains its final speed. Pressing the switch beyond the resistance point causes the vehicle to accelerate more rapidly.
Continuing cruise control
General information An interrupted cruise control can be continued by calling up the stored speed. Make sure that the difference between current speed and stored speed is not too large before calling up the stored speed. Otherwise, unintentional braking or accelerating may occur.
Calling up the stored speed Press the button on the steering wheel.
The stored speed is reached again and maintained.

Displays in the instrument cluster
Indicator light Instrument cluster without enhanced features: Depending on how the vehicle is
equipped, the indicator light in the instrument cluster indicates whether the system is switched on.
Instrument cluster with enhanced features: The indicator in the instrument cluster lights up: the system is switched on.
Desired speed and stored speed Instrument cluster without enhanced features: The desired speed is displayed to-
gether with the symbol. Display lights up green: system is active,
the display indicates the desired speed. Display lights up orange: system is in-
terrupted, the display indicates the stored speed. No display: system is switched off.
Instrument cluster with enhanced features: The desired speed is displayed together with the symbol. Display lights up green:
system is active, the display indicates the desired speed. Display lights up gray: system is interrupted, the display indicates the stored speed. No display: system is switched off.

188

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Driving comfort

CONTROLS

Instrument cluster without enhanced features: If no speed is indicated, it is possible that the conditions necessary for operation are not currently fulfilled.
System limits
Engine power The desired speed is also maintained downhill, but may not be maintained on uphill grades if engine power is insufficient.
PDC Park Distance Control
Concept
PDC is a support when parking. The system detects objects behind the vehicle. If the vehicle is equipped with front PDC, objects in front of the vehicle are detected too. Objects that you are approaching slowly are indicated by signal tones and a visual display.
General information
The ultrasound sensors for measuring the distances are located in the bumpers. The range, depending on obstacles and environmental conditions, is approx. 6 ft/2 m. An acoustic warning is first given in the following situations: By the front middle sensors and the two
corner sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm from the object. By the rear middle sensors at approx. 5 ft/1.50 m from the object. When a collision is imminent.

Safety information
Warning The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment in assessing the traffic situation. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic and vehicle surroundings closely and actively intervene where appropriate.
Warning Due to high speeds when PDC Park Distance Control is activated, the warning can be delayed due to physical circumstances. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Avoid approaching an object too fast. Avoid driving off fast while PDC Park Distance Control is not yet active.
Overview With front PDC: button in vehicle
Park assistance button Ultrasound sensors
Ultrasound sensors of the PDC, for instance in the bumpers.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

189

CONTROLS

Driving comfort

Functional requirements
Ensure full functionality: Do not cover sensors, for instance with
stickers, bicycle racks or similar. Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically The system switches on automatically in the following situations: If selector lever position R is engaged
when the engine is running. The rearview camera also switches on. With front PDC: when obstacles are detected behind or in front of the vehicle by PDC and the speed is slower than approx. 2.5 mph/4 km/h. With front PDC: automatic activation on obstacle detection can be switched off. Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI" 2. "Vehicle settings" 3. "Parking" 4. "Automatic PDC Activation": depending
on the vehicle equipment. 5. "Automatic PDC Activation"
The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.
Automatic deactivation during forward travel The system switches off when a certain driving distance or speed is exceeded. Switch the system back on, if needed.
With front PDC: switching on/off manually
Press the park assistance button.

On: the LED lights up. Off: the LED goes out. The rearview camera image is displayed if the reverse gear is engaged when pressing the park assistance button. Depending on the equipment version, the system cannot be switched off manually if the reverse gear is engaged.
Warning
Signal tones An intermittent tone indicates when the vehicle is approaching an object. E.g., when an object is detected to the left rear of the vehicle, a signal tone sounds from the left rear speaker. The shorter the distance to the object, the shorter the intervals. When the distance to a detected object is less than approx. 10 inches/25 cm, a continuous tone is sounded. With front PDC: when objects are simultaneously located both in front of and behind the vehicle, an alternating continuous signal is sounded. The signal tone is switched off, when selector lever position P is engaged on vehicles with Steptronic transmission.
Volume The ratio of the PDC signal tone volume to the entertainment volume can be adjusted.
1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 3. "Tone" 4. "Volume settings" 5. "PDC" 6. Set the desired value. The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

190

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Driving comfort

CONTROLS

Visual warning The approach of the vehicle to an object can be shown on the Control Display. Objects that are farther away are already displayed on the Control Display before a signal sounds. A display appears as soon as Park Distance Control (PDC) is activated. The range of the sensors is represented in colors: red, green and yellow. When the image of the rearview camera is displayed, the switch can be made to PDC:
"Rear view camera"
System limits
Safety information
Warning The system is designed to operate in certain conditions and circumstances. Due to conditions or other factors, the system may not respond. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Actively intervene as warranted. Refer to the information in this Owner's Manual regarding the scope of the system's operation and limitations.
Limits of ultrasonic measurement The detection of objects with ultrasonic measurements can run into physical limits, for instance under the following conditions: For small children and animals. For persons with certain clothing, for in-
stance coats. With external interference of the ultra-
sound, for instance from passing vehicles or loud machines. When sensors are dirty, iced over, damaged or out of position.

If cargo protrudes. Under certain weather conditions such
as high relative humidity, wet conditions, snowfall, extreme heat, or strong wind. With tow bars and trailer couplings of other vehicles. With thin or wedge-shaped objects. With moving objects. With elevated, protruding objects such as ledges or cargo. With objects with corners and sharp edges. With objects with a fine surface structure such as fences. For objects with porous surfaces. Low objects already displayed, for instance curbs, can move into the blind area of the sensors before or after a continuous tone sounds.
False warnings The system may issue a warning under the following conditions even though there is no obstacle within the detection range: In heavy rain. When sensors are very dirty or covered
with ice. When sensors are covered in snow. On rough road surfaces. On uneven surfaces, such as speed
bumps. In large buildings with right angles and
smooth walls, for instance in underground garages. In automatic car washes. Due to heavy exhaust. Due to other ultrasound sources, for instance sweeping machines, high pressure steam cleaners or neon lights.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

191

CONTROLS

Driving comfort

The malfunction is signaled by a continuous tone alternating between the front and rear speakers. As soon as the malfunction due to other ultrasound sources is no longer present, the system is again fully functional. With front PDC: to reduce false alarms, switch off automatic PDC activation on obstacle detection, for instance in car washes; see Switching on/off.

Overview Depending on the vehicle equipment: button in the vehicle

Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Red icon is displayed, and the range of the sensors is dimmed on the Control Display.
PDC has failed. Have the system checked by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Park assistance button Camera

Rearview camera

Concept
The rearview camera provides assistance in parking and maneuvering backwards. The area behind the vehicle is shown on the Control Display.
Safety information
Warning The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment in assessing the traffic situation. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic and vehicle surroundings closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

The camera lens is located in the handle of the tailgate. The image quality may be impaired by dirt. If necessary, clean the camera lens.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically The system is switched on automatically if selector lever position R is engaged when the engine is running.
Automatic deactivation during forward travel The system switches off when a certain driving distance or speed is exceeded.

192

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Driving comfort

CONTROLS

Switch the system back on, if needed.
Depending on the vehicle equipment: switching on/off manually
Press the park assistance button.

Obstacles are marked, depending on the vehicle equipment. Lanes

On: the LED lights up. Off: the LED goes out. The parking assistance functions are shown on the Control Display.
Switching the view via the Central Information Display (CID) If the rearview camera view is not displayed, change the view via the Central Information Display (CID):
"Rear view camera" The rearview camera image is displayed.
Display on the Control Display
Functional requirements The rearview camera is switched on. The tailgate is fully closed. Keep the recording range of the camera
open. Protruding cargo or carrier systems that are not connected to a trailer power socket can lead to malfunctions.
Activating assistance functions More than one assistance function can be active at the same time. Parking aid lines
"Parking aid lines" Lanes and turning radius lines are indicated. Obstacle marking
"Obstacle marking"

Lanes can be superimposed on the image of the rearview camera. Lanes help you to estimate the space required when parking and maneuvering on level roads. Lanes depend on the current steering angle and are continuously adjusted to the steering wheel movements. Turning radius lines
Turning radius lines can be superimposed on the image of the rearview camera. Turning radius lines show the course of the smallest possible turning radius on a level road. Only one turning radius line is displayed after the steering wheel is turned past a certain angle.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

193

CONTROLS Obstacle marking

Driving comfort 2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where the lane covers the corresponding turning radius line.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, obstacle markings can be faded into the image of the rearview camera. The colored thresholds of the obstacle markings match the markings of the PDC Park Distance Control.
Parking using lanes and turning radius lines
1. Position the vehicle so that the turning radius lines lead to within the limits of the parking space.

Display settings
Brightness With the rearview camera switched on: 1. Select the icon. 2. Turn the Controller until the desired set-
ting is reached and press the Controller.
Contrast With the rearview camera switched on: 1. Select the icon. 2. Turn the Controller until the desired set-
ting is reached and press the Controller.

System limits

Detection of objects Very low obstacles or high, protruding objects such as ledges may not be recognized by the system. Depending on the vehicle equipment, some assistance functions also consider data from the PDC Park Distance Control. Follow the notes in the PDC Park Distance Control chapter. The objects displayed on the Control Display may be closer than they appear. There-

194

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Driving comfort

CONTROLS

fore, do not estimate the distance from the objects on the display.
Parking assistant
Concept

Safety information
Warning The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment in assessing the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the system, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

This system assists the driver in parking parallel to the road.
General information
Parking assistant handling is divided into three steps: Switching on and activating. Parking space search. Parking. Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle. The parking assistant calculates the best possible parking line and takes control of steering during the parking operation. System status and instructions on required actions are displayed on the Control Display. A component of the parking assistant is the PDC Park Distance Control.

NOTICE The parking assistant can steer the vehicle over or onto curbs. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate. The safety information of the PDC Park Distance Control applies in addition.
Overview Button in the vehicle
Park assistance button

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

195

CONTROLS

Driving comfort

Ultrasound sensors
The ultrasound sensors for measuring parking spaces are located on the wheel housing.
Functional requirements Ultrasound sensors
Ensure full functionality: Do not cover sensors, for instance with
stickers. Keep the sensors clean and unob-
structed. For measuring parking spaces Maximum speed while driving forward
approx. 22 mph/35 km/h. Maximum distance to row of parked ve-
hicles: 5 ft/1.5 m. Suitable parking space Gaps behind an object that has a min.
length of 5 ft/1.5 m. Gap between two objects with a mini-
mum length of approx. 5 ft/1.5 m. Min. length of gap between two objects:
your vehicle's length plus approx. 3.3 ft/1.0 m. Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m. For the parking operation Doors and tailgate are closed.

The parking brake is released. When parking in parking spaces on the
driver's side, the corresponding turn signal must be switched on.
Switching on and activating
Switching on with the button Press the park assistance button. The LED lights up.
The current status of the parking space search is indicated on the Control Display.
Parking assistant is activated automatically.
Switching on with reverse gear Shift into reverse. The current status of the parking space search is indicated on the Control Display. To activate: "Parking Assistant"
Display on the Control Display
System activated/deactivated
Icon Meaning Gray: the system is not available. White: the system is available but not activated. The system is activated.

196

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Driving comfort

CONTROLS

Parking space search and system status

Symbol P on the vehicle image: the parking assistant is activated and the parking space search is active.

Control Display shows suitable parking spaces at the edge of the road next to the vehicle symbol. When the parking assistant is active, suitable parking spaces are highlighted.

The parking operation is

active. The system takes

over the steering.

Parking space search is always active whenever the vehicle is moving forward slow and straight, even if the system is deactivated. When the system is deactivated, the displays on the Control Display are shown in gray.

Parking using the parking assistant

Parking

Press the park assistance button or

shift into reverse gear to switch on the

parking assistant, refer to page 196. Ac-

tivate the parking assistant, if needed.

Parking assistant is activated.

2. Pass the row of parked vehicles at a speed of up to approx. 22 mph/35 km/h

and at a distance of maximum 5 ft/1.5 m. The status of the parking space search and possible parking spaces are displayed on the Control Display, refer to page 196. 3. Follow the instructions on the Control Display. The parking assistant takes control of steering during the parking operation. The driver takes over braking and accelerating. The best possible parking position will come after gear change on the stationary vehicle - wait for the automatic steering wheel move. The end of the parking operation is indicated on the Control Display. 4. Adjust the parking position yourself, if needed.

Interrupting manually

The parking assistant can be interrupted at any time:

Press the park assistance button.

"Parking Assistant"

Interrupting automatically The system is interrupted automatically in the following situations: If the driver grasps the steering wheel
or takes over steering. If a gear is selected that does not match
the instruction on the Control Display. If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.
6 mph/10 km/h. Possibly on snow-covered or slippery
road surfaces.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

197

CONTROLS

Driving comfort

If a maximum number of parking attempts or the time taken for parking is exceeded.
If the PDC Park Distance Control displays clearances that are too small.
When switching into other functions of the radio.
A Check Control message is displayed.

Resuming An interrupted parking operation can be continued, if needed. Reactivate the parking assistant, refer to page 196, and follow the instructions on the Control Display.

Switching off

The system can be switched off as follows:

Press the park assistance button.

Switching off the ignition.
System limits Safety information

Warning The system is designed to operate in certain conditions and circumstances. Due to conditions or other factors, the system may not respond. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Actively intervene as warranted. Refer to the information in this Owner's Manual regarding the scope of the system's operation and limitations.

No parking assistance The parking assistant does not offer assistance in the following situations: In tight curves.

Functional limitations The system may be limited in the following situations: On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel
roads. On slippery ground. With accumulations of leaves/snow in
the parking space. With a mounted emergency wheel. With ditches or edges, for instance an
edge of a port.
Limits of ultrasonic measurement The detection of objects with ultrasonic measurements can run into physical limits, for instance under the following conditions: For small children and animals. For persons with certain clothing, for in-
stance coats. With external interference of the ultra-
sound, for instance from passing vehicles or loud machines. When sensors are dirty, iced over, damaged or out of position. If cargo protrudes. Under certain weather conditions such as high relative humidity, wet conditions, snowfall, extreme heat, or strong wind. With tow bars and trailer couplings of other vehicles. With thin or wedge-shaped objects. With moving objects. With elevated, protruding objects such as ledges or cargo. With objects with corners and sharp edges. With objects with a fine surface structure such as fences. For objects with porous surfaces.

198

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Driving comfort
Low objects already displayed, for instance curbs, can move into the blind area of the sensors before or after a continuous tone sounds.
The parking assistant may identify parking spaces that are not suitable for parking.
Tire size The parking position may vary depending on the tire size.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed. The parking assistant failed. Have the system checked by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

CONTROLS

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

199

CONTROLS

Climate control

Emission tested passenger compartment.
Microfilter. Air conditioning system to control the
temperature, air flow and recirculatedair mode. Depending on the equipment specification: Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter. Automatic climate control. Parked-car ventilation.

Interior air quality
The air quality in the vehicle is improved by the following components:

200

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Air conditioner

Climate control

CONTROLS

1 Air distribution settings 2 Air flow 3 Temperature 4 Seat heating, right 85 5 Air conditioning

6 Air recirculation mode 7 Rear window defroster 8 Windshield defroster 9 Seat heating, left 85

Climate control functions in detail
Switching the system on/off
Switching on Set any air flow.
Switching off Turn the wheel for air flow all the way to the left.

Temperature

Concept The system heats or cools, depending on the set temperature.

Adjusting

Turn the wheel to set the desired temperature.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

201

CONTROLS

Climate control

Air conditioning
Concept The air in the car's interior will be cooled and dehumidified and, depending on the temperature setting, warmed again.
Functional requirement The car's interior can only be cooled with the engine running.

ter a certain amount of time, depending on the outside temperature. With extended air recirculation mode, the air quality in the interior deteriorates and window fogging increases. If the windows fog over, switch off air recirculation mode and increase the air flow, if needed.
Air flow, manual

Switching on/off Press the button. The LED is illuminated with air con-
ditioning switched on.
Depending on the weather, the windshield may fog up briefly when the engine is started. The cooling mode produces condensation, refer to page 233, that will exit from below the vehicle.
Air recirculation mode
Concept You may react to unpleasant odors or pollutants in the immediate environment by temporarily suspending the supply of outside air. The system then recirculates the air flow within the vehicle.

Concept The air flow for climate control can be adjusted manually.

Adjusting

Turn the ring to set the desired air flow. The higher the air flow, the more effective the heating or cooling will be.

The air flow from the air conditioner may be reduced automatically to save battery power.

Manual air distribution

Concept The air distribution for climate control can be adjusted manually.

Operation Press the button: The LED is illuminated when recir-
culated-air mode is switched on. The supply of outside air is shut off. When recirculated-air mode is switched off, fresh air is directed into the vehicle's interior.
To prevent window condensation, recirculated-air mode switches off automatically af-

Adjusting

Turn the wheel to select the desired program or the desired intermediate setting.

Windows. Upper body region. Floor area. Windows, upper body region, and
floor area.

202

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Climate control

CONTROLS

To defrost windows and remove condensation Make the following settings to defrost the windows and remove condensation: Direct the air distribution onto the win-
dows. Increasing the air flow. Increase the temperature. Switch on air conditioning if needed.
Windshield defroster Press the button. The LED lights up. The front window defroster
switches off automatically after a certain period of time.

Rear window defroster Press the button. The LED lights up. The rear window defroster switches
off automatically after a certain period of time.
When GREEN drive mode is activated, the heating output is reduced.
Microfilter In external and recirculated-air mode, the microfilter filters dust and pollen from the air. Have this filter changed during vehicle maintenance, refer to page 277.

Automatic climate control

1 Temperature, left 2 Display 3 Air flow, AUTO intensity 4 AUTO program

5 Air distribution, manual 6 Display 7 Temperature, right 8 Seat heating, right 85

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

203

CONTROLS

Climate control

9 Maximum cooling 10 Air conditioning 11 Air recirculation mode 12 Rear window defroster

13 Windshield defroster 14 To defrost windows and remove conden-
sation 15 Seat heating, left 85

Climate control functions in detail Air conditioning

Switching the system on/off
Switching on Set any air flow.
Switching off Turn wheel for air flow to the left until the control switches off.

Temperature

Concept The automatic climate control achieves the set temperature as quickly as possible, if necessary by using the maximum cooling or heating power, and then keeps it constant.

Adjusting

Turn the wheel to set the desired temperature.

Concept The air in the car's interior will be cooled and dehumidified and, depending on the temperature setting, warmed again.
Functional requirement The car's interior can only be cooled with the engine running.
Switching on/off Press the button. The LED is illuminated with air con-
ditioning switched on.
Depending on the weather, the windshield may fog up briefly when the engine is started. Air conditioning is switched on automatically with the AUTO program. The cooling mode produces condensation, refer to page 233, that will exit from below the vehicle.
Maximum cooling

Do not rapidly switch between different temperature settings. The automatic climate control will not have sufficient time to adjust the set temperature.

Concept The system is set to the lowest temperature, maximum air flow and recirculated-air mode.
Functional requirement The function is available at outside temperatures above approx. 32 /0 and with the engine running.

204

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Climate control

CONTROLS

Switching on/off Press the button. The LED is illuminated with the
system switched on.
Air flows out of the vents to the upper body region. The vents need to be open for this. The air flow can be adjusted when maximum cooling is switched on.
AUTO program
Concept The AUTO program cools, ventilates or heats the car's interior automatically. For this, the air flow, air distribution and temperature are regulated depending on the settings and the interior temperature.
Switching on/off Press the button. The LED is illuminated with the
AUTO program switched on.
Depending on the selected temperature, AUTO intensity and outside influences, the air is directed to the windshield, side windows, upper body, and into the floor area. Point the side vents toward the side windows. The following features are switched on automatically with the AUTO program: Air conditioning, refer to page 204. To switch off the program: press the button again or manually adjust the air distribution.
Controlling the intensity of the air flow With the AUTO program switched on, the intensity can be adjusted. This changes the automatic control for the air mass.

Turn the wheel to set the desired intensity from soft to intensive.
The set intensity is displayed via the position of the illuminated LED segment.
Air recirculation mode
Concept You may react to unpleasant odors or pollutants in the immediate environment by temporarily suspending the supply of outside air. The system then recirculates the air flow within the vehicle.
Operation Press the button: The LED is illuminated when recir-
culated-air mode is switched on. The supply of outside air is shut off. When recirculated-air mode is switched off, fresh air is directed into the vehicle's interior. To prevent window condensation, recirculated-air mode switches off automatically after a certain amount of time, depending on the outside temperature. With extended air recirculation mode, the air quality in the interior deteriorates and window fogging increases. If the windows fog over, switch off air recirculation mode and increase the air flow, if needed.
Air flow, manual
Concept The air flow for climate control can be adjusted manually.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

205

CONTROLS

Climate control

General information To adjust the air flow manually switch off AUTO program first.

Adjusting

Turn the ring to set the desired air flow.

The manually adjusted air flow is displayed via illuminated LED segments. The air flow of the automatic climate control may be reduced automatically to save battery power.
Manual air distribution
Concept The air distribution for climate control can be adjusted manually.
Adjusting Press the button repeatedly to select a program:
Windows, upper body region, and floor area.
Upper body region and floor area. Floor area. Windows and floor area. Windows. Windows and upper body region. Upper body region.
To defrost windows and remove condensation
Concept Ice and condensation are quickly removed from the windshield and the front side windows.

Switching on/off Press the button. The LED is illuminated with the
system switched on. The air flow can be adjusted with the program active. If there is window condensation, switch on the climate control function as well.
Windshield defroster Press the button. The LED lights up. The front window defroster
switches off automatically after a certain period of time.
Rear window defroster Press the button. The LED lights up. The rear window defroster switches
off automatically after a certain period of time. When GREEN drive mode is activated, the heating output is reduced.
Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter In external and recirculated-air mode, the microfilter/activated charcoal filter filters dust, pollen, and gaseous pollutants out of the air. Have this filter changed during vehicle maintenance, refer to page 277.
Ventilation
Setting
The air flow directions can be individually adjusted: Direct ventilation:

206

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Climate control

CONTROLS

The air flow is directly pointed onto the person. The air flow heats or cools noticeably, depending on the adjusted temperature. Indirect ventilation: If the vents are fully or partly closed, the air is directly routed into the car's interior.
Front ventilation

Functional requirements
Direct operation: vehicle is in radioready state.
Direct operation or preset activation time: does not depend on outside temperature.
Battery is sufficiently charged. If parked-car ventilation is switched on, the vehicle battery will be discharged. Thus, limit the maximum activation time to save the vehicle battery. The system will be available again after the engine is started or after a short trip.
Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are set correctly.
Open the vents to allow air to flow out.

Turn knob for continuous opening and closing of the vents.
Swivel the vents to alter the direction of the vent flow, arrows.
Parked-car ventilation
Concept
The parked-car ventilation ventilates the car's interior and lowers its temperature, if needed.
General information
The parked-car ventilation can be switched on and off directly or by using two preset activation times. The system remains switched on for 30 minutes. The parked-car ventilation system is operated via the Central Information Display (CID).

Switching on/off directly
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI" 2. "Vehicle settings" 3. If necessary, "Climate functions" 4. "Activate comfort ventilation now"
The icon on the automatic climate control flashes if the system is switched on.
Preselecting the activation time
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI" 2. "Vehicle settings" 3. If necessary, "Climate functions" 4. "Comfort ventilation" 5. Select the desired activation time. 6. Set the desired time.
Activating the activation time
Via the Central Information Display (CID):

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

207

CONTROLS

Climate control

1. "My MINI" 2. "Vehicle settings" 3. If necessary, "Climate functions" 4. "For start time at:"
Activate the desired activation time. The icon on the automatic climate control lights up when the activation time is activated. The icon on the automatic climate control flashes when the system has been switched on. The system will only be switched on within the next 24 hours. After that, it needs to be reactivated.

208

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Interior equipment
Interior equipment

CONTROLS

Vehicle features and options Safety information

This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.
Integrated Universal Remote Control
Concept
The integrated Universal Remote Control in the interior mirror can operate up to 3 functions of remote-controlled systems such as garage door drives, barriers, or lighting systems.
General information
The Integrated Universal Remote Control replaces up to 3 different hand-held transmitters. To operate the remote control, the buttons on the interior mirror must be programmed with the desired functions. The hand-held transmitter for the particular system is required in order to program the remote control. Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored functions for the sake of security. If possible, do not install the antenna of the remote-controlled system, e.g. the garage door drive, near metal objects to ensure the best possible operation.

Warning The operation of remote-controlled systems with the integrated universal remote control, such as the garage door, may result in injury, for example, body parts becoming jammed in a garage door. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the respective system is clear during programming and operation. Also follow the safety information of the hand-held transmitter.
Compatibility
If this symbol is printed on the packaging or in the owner's manual of the system to be controlled, the system is generally compatible with the integrated Universal Remote Control. Additional questions are answered by: A dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. www.homelink.com on the Internet.
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex Corporation.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

209

CONTROLS

Interior equipment

Overview
1 LED 2 Programmable keys 3 Hand-held transmitters of the system
Programming General information
The battery of the hand-held transmitter must be fully charged at the time of programming to ensure an optimal range of the integrated universal remote control. 1. Switch on the ignition. 2. Initial setup:
Press and hold the two outer buttons on the interior mirror simultaneously for approximately 10 seconds until the LED flashes green rapidly. This erases all programming of the buttons on the interior mirror. 3. Press the interior mirror button to be programmed. The LED on the interior mirror will slowly begin flashing orange. 4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the system to be used approx. 1 to 12 in/2.5 to 30 cm away from the buttons on the interior mirror. The required distance depends on the hand-held transmitter. 5. Press and hold the button of the desired function on the hand-held transmitter. Canada: if programming with the handheld transmitter was interrupted, hold

down the interior mirror button and repeatedly press and release the hand-held transmitter button for 2 seconds. 6. The LED lights up green: program-
ming completed. Release the button. The LED flashes fast: programming is not complete. Press the button on the interior mirror for 2 seconds and release. Perform this procedure three times to complete the programming procedure. If the integrated universal remote control remains nonoperational, continue with the special features for change code wireless systems. LED does not flash green after 60 seconds: programming not completed. Repeat steps 3 to 6. To program other functions on other buttons, repeat steps 3 to 5.
Special feature of the rolling code wireless system If you are unable to operate the system after repeated programming, please check if the system to be controlled features a rolling code radio system. Refer to the owner's manual for the system. For systems with a rolling code radio system, the integrated Universal Remote Control and the system also have to be synchronized. Please read the owner's manual to find out how to synchronize the system. Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a second person. Synchronizing the universal remote control with the system:

210

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Interior equipment

CONTROLS

1. Park the vehicle within range of the remote-controlled system.
2. Program the relevant button on the interior mirror as described.
3. Locate and press the synchronizing button on the system being programmed, e.g. at the garage gate. You have approx. 30 seconds for the next step.
4. Hold down the programmed button on the interior mirror for approximately 3 seconds and then release it. If necessary, repeat this step up to three times in order to finish synchronization. Once synchronization is complete, the programmed function will be carried out.
Reprogramming individual buttons
1. Switch on the ignition. 2. Press and hold the interior mirror but-
ton to be programmed. 3. As soon as the LED on the interior mir-
ror flashes orange after approx. 20 seconds, release the button. 4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the system to be used approx. 1 to 12 in/2.5 to 30 cm away from the buttons on the interior mirror. The required distance depends on the hand-held transmitter. 5. Press and hold the button of the desired function on the hand-held transmitter. Canada: if programming with the handheld transmitter was interrupted, hold down the interior mirror button and repeatedly press and release the hand-held transmitter button for 2 seconds. 6. The LED can light up in different ways. The LED lights up green: the pro-
gramming procedure is completed. Release the button. The LED flashes fast: the hand-held transmitter was detected but programming is not complete.

Press the button on the interior mirror for 2 seconds and release. Perform this procedure three times to complete the programming procedure. If the integrated universal remote control remains nonoperational, continue with the special features for change code wireless systems. LED does not flash green after 60 seconds: programming not completed. Repeat steps 3 to 6. If the programming procedure is not completed, the previous programming will remain unchanged.
Operation
Warning The operation of remote-controlled systems with the integrated universal remote control, such as the garage door, may result in injury, for example, body parts becoming jammed in a garage door. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the respective system is clear during programming and operation. Also follow the safety information of the hand-held transmitter.
The system, such as the garage door, can be operated using the button on the interior mirror while the engine is running or when the ignition is started. To do this, hold down the button within receiving range of the system until the function is activated. The interior mirror LED stays lit while the wireless signal is being transmitted.
Deleting stored functions
All stored functions will be deleted. The functions cannot be deleted individually.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

211

CONTROLS

Interior equipment

Press and hold the two outer buttons on the interior mirror simultaneously for approximately 10 seconds until the LED on the interior mirror flashes green rapidly.
Digital compass
Overview
1 Control button 2 Mirror display

Operating concept
Various functions can be called up by pressing the control button with a pointed object, such as the tip of a ballpoint pen or similar object. The following setting options are displayed in succession, depending on how long the control button is pressed: Pressed briefly: turns display on/off. 3 to 6 seconds: compass zone setting. 6 to 9 seconds: compass calibration. 9 to 12 seconds: left/right-hand steering
setting. 12 to 15 seconds: language setting.
Setting the compass zones
Sets the particular compass zones on the vehicle so that the compass operates correctly; refer to World map with compass zones.

Mirror display
The compass shows the current driving direction.

212

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Interior equipment World map with magnetic zones

CONTROLS

Procedure 1. Press and hold the control button for ap-
prox. 3 to 4 seconds. The number of the set compass zone appears in the mirror. 2. To change the zone setting, press the control button quickly and repeatedly until the number of the compass zone that corresponds with your location appears in the mirror. The set zone is stored automatically. The compass is ready for use again after approximately 10 seconds.
Calibrating the digital compass
The digital compass must be calibrated in the event of the following: The wrong compass point is displayed. The point of the compass displayed does
not change despite changing the direction of travel. Not all points of the compass are displayed.

Procedure 1. Make sure that there are no large metal-
lic objects or overhead power lines near the vehicle and that there is sufficient room to drive around in a circle. 2. Set the currently applicable compass zone. 3. Press and hold the control button for approx. 6 to 7 seconds so that "C" appears on the display. Next, drive in a complete circle at least once at a speed of no more than 4 mph/7 km/h. If calibration is successful, the "C" is replaced by the points of the compass.
Left/right-hand steering
The digital compass is already set for right or left-hand steering at the factory.
Setting the language
Press and hold the control button for approx. 12 to 13 seconds. Briefly press the

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

213

CONTROLS

Interior equipment

control button again to switch between English "E" and German "O". Settings are stored automatically after approximately 10 seconds.

Ashtray/cigarette lighter
Overview

Sun visor

Glare shield
To provide protection against glare, fold the sun visor down or pivot it to the side.
Vanity mirror
A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor behind a cover. When the cover is opened, the mirror lighting switches on.
Dashboard
Decorative trim

The ashtray is located in one of the frontal cup holders, the cigarette lighter above it in the center console.
Ashtray
In order to empty the ashtray, remove the ashtray from the cup holder.
Cigarette lighter Safety information

Customizable decorative trim is available for the dashboard on the driver's side and on the passenger's side. Follow the assembly instructions.

Warning Contact with the hot heating element or the hot socket of the cigarette lighter can cause burns. Flammable materials can ignite if the cigarette lighter falls down or is held against the objects. There is a risk of fire and injuries. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Take hold of the cigarette lighter by its handle. Make sure that children do not use the cigarette lighter.

214

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Interior equipment

CONTROLS

NOTICE If metal objects fall into the socket, they can cause a short circuit. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Replace the cigarette lighter or socket cover again after using the socket.
Operation Push in the cigarette lighter. The cigarette lighter can be removed as soon as it pops back out.
Sockets
Concept
The lighter socket can be used as a socket for electrical equipment while the ignition is switched on or the engine is running.
General information
The total load of all sockets must not exceed 140 watts at 12 volts. Do not damage the socket by using noncompatible connectors.
Safety information

NOTICE Battery chargers for the vehicle battery can work with high voltages and currents, which means that the 12 volt electrical system can be overloaded or damaged. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Only connect battery chargers for the vehicle battery to the starting aid terminals in the engine compartment.
NOTICE If metal objects fall into the socket, they can cause a short circuit. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Replace the cigarette lighter or socket cover again after using the socket.
In the center console
Remove the cover or cigarette lighter.

Warning Devices and cables in the unfolding area of the airbags, such as portable navigation devices, can hinder the unfolding of the airbag or be thrown around in the car's interior during unfolding. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that devices and cables are not in the airbag's area of unfolding.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

215

CONTROLS

Interior equipment

In the cargo area

Properties of lower USB port: USB port Type C. For charging mobile devices and for
data transfer. Charge current: max. 3 A.

Wireless charging tray

The socket is located on the right side in the cargo area.
USB port
General information
Follow the information regarding the connection of mobile devices to the USB port in the section on USB connections, refer to page 55.
In the center console
Depending on the equipment version, a USB port Type A or a USB port Type A and a USB port Type C are located in the front of the center console. Properties of upper USB port: USB port Type A. For charging mobile devices and for
data transfer. Charge current: max. 1.5 A.

Concept
The wireless charging tray enables the following functions to be performed without cables: Charging the rechargeable battery of a
mobile phone with Qi capability and of other mobile devices, which support the Qi standard. Connect the mobile phone to the external antenna. Depending on the country, this provides for better network reception and a consistent reproduction quality.
General information
When inserting the mobile phone, make sure there are no objects between it and the wireless charging tray. During charging, the surface of the tray and the mobile phone may become warm. Higher temperatures may lead to a reduction in the charge current through the mobile phone, and in isolated cases the charging process is paused temporarily. Follow the relevant instructions in the mobile phone owner's manual.
NOTE This device has been tested for human exposure limits and found compliant at a minimum distance of 4 in/10 cm during operation.

216

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Interior equipment

CONTROLS

Therefore, a distance of 4 in/10 cm must be maintained in every direction when operating the device.
Mounting position of the product.
Safety information
Warning When charging a device that meets the Qi standard in the wireless charging tray, any metal objects located between the device and the tray can become very hot. Placing storage devices or electronic cards, such as chip cards, cards with magnetic strips or cards for signal transmission, between the device and the tray may impair the card function. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to property. When charging mobile devices, make sure there are no objects between the device and the tray.
NOTICE The tray is intended for mobile phones up to a particular size. Forceful inserting of the mobile phone into the tray can damage the tray or the mobile phone. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Observe the maximum dimensions for mobile phones. Do not force the mobile phone into the tray.

Functional requirements
Ignition or standby state is switched on. The mobile phone must compatibly sup-
port the required Qi standard. Compatible mobile phones, refer to page 53. If the mobile phone does not support the Qi standard, the mobile phone can be charged using a special Qi-compatible charging case. Use only protective jackets and covers up to a maximum thickness of 0.07 in/2 mm. Otherwise, the charging function may be impaired. The mobile phone must not exceed the maximum size of approximately 5.9 x 3.07 x 0.62 in/150 x 78 x 16 mm.
Overview
The wireless charging tray is located in the center armrest.
1 Front holder with LED 2 Storage area 3 Movable clamp
Inserting the mobile phone
1. Open the center armrest. 2. Push back the clamp.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

217

CONTROLS

Interior equipment

3. Insert the mobile phone with the display facing upward in the direction of the front holder, arrow 1.
4. Place the mobile phone in the storage area, arrow 2.
5. Push the clamp forward and clamp the mobile phone in the tray.
6. Close the center armrest.
Removing the mobile phone
1. Open the center armrest. 2. Push the clamp back and remove the
mobile phone.

LED displays

Color Blue
Orange Red

Meaning
The mobile phone is charging. Depending on the model, the blue LED is no longer illuminated once the inserted mobile phone with Qi capability is fully charged.
The mobile phone is not charging. Temperature on the mobile phone possibly too high or foreign object in the charging tray.
The mobile phone is not charging. Contact a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

System limits
At high temperatures on the mobile phone or in the vehicle, the charging functions of the mobile phone may be limited and some functions may no longer work.
LTE-Compensator - Information and User Manual
Your car is equipped with a wireless charging tray (WCA) to charge your mobile phone and connect it to the mobile network. To ensure the best possible connection a signal booster (LTE-Compensator) is used in conjunction with the WCA. The following paragraphs refer to this booster: This is a CONSUMER device. BEFORE USE, you MUST REGISTER THIS DEVICE with your wireless provider and have your provider's consent. Most wireless providers consent to the use of Compensators. Some providers may not consent to the use of this device on their network. If you

218

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Interior equipment

CONTROLS

are unsure, contact your provider. You MUST operate this device with approved antennas and cables as specified by the manufacturer. Antennas MUST be installed at least 20 cm (8 inches) from any person. You MUST cease operating this device immediately if requested by the FCC or a licensed wireless service provider. Warning E911 location information may not be provided or may be inaccurate for calls served by using this device. Please observe additionally the following information Sprint Nextel will allow consumers to
register their signal boosters by calling their toll-free number. T-Mobile online registration link: (www.T-Mobile.com/BoosterRegistration); (https://saqat.t-mobile.com/sites/ SignalBooster#). Verizon's online registration link: (http://www.verizonwireless.com/ wcms/consumer/register-signal-booster.html). AT&T online registration link (https:// securec45.securewebsession.com/ attsignalbooster.com/). U.S.Cellular online registration link (http://www.uscellular.com/uscellular/ support/fcc-booster-registration.jsp). Before use you must register your booster device with your wireless provider. If you should be requested by the FCC to cease operating your booster, you are not allowed to insert your mobile phone in the charging tray anymore unless the booster is permanently deactivated by your local MINI dealer. You must not remove the booster from the car nor use it with any other than the preinstalled coupling device or antenna. Any modification of the existing antenna or coupling device as well as the use of other an-

tennas or coupling devices will cause the cease of the booster´s operating license. The booster device fulfills the network protection standards as required by the FCC, such as intermodulation limits, oscillation detection and gain limits. Booster Manufacturer: Kathrein Automotive Model Number: LTECOMPB0 Part Number: 6803145-01 FCC-ID: 2ACC7LTECOMPB0

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

219

CONTROLS

Storage compartments

Glove compartment on the front passenger side.
Compartments in the doors. Storage compartment in the center arm-
rest. Storage compartment in front of the cup
holders. Clothes hooks Storage tray in the center console. Pockets on the backrests of the front
seats.

Safety information

Glove compartment

Warning Loose objects or devices with a cable connection to the vehicle, for instance mobile phones, can be thrown about the car's interior while driving, for instance in the event of an accident, braking or evasive maneuver. There is a risk of injury. Secure loose objects or devices with a cable connection to the vehicle in the car's interior.
NOTICE Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats can damage the dashboard. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Do not use anti-slip pads.

Safety information
Warning Folded open, the glove compartment protrudes in the car's interior. Objects in the glove compartment can be thrown into the car's interior while driving, for instance in the event of an accident, braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury. Always close the glove compartment immediately after using it.

Overview
The following storage compartments are available in the car's interior:

220

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Opening

Storage compartments

CONTROLS

Center armrest
General information
The center armrest contains a storage compartment.
Opening

Pull the handle. The light in the glove compartment switches on.
Closing
Fold up the cover.
Compartments in the doors
General information
There are storage compartments in the doors.
Safety information

Press button, arrow 1, and open center armrest upward, arrow 2.
Adjusting the height

Warning Breakable objects, such as glass bottles or glasses, can break in the event of an accident or a braking or evasive maneuver. Broken glass can be scattered in the car's interior. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do not use any breakable objects while driving. Only stow breakable objects in closed storage compartments.

Press button, arrow 1, and swing center armrest upward or downward into the desired height, arrow 2.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

221

CONTROLS

Storage compartments

Cup holders

Rear

Safety information

Warning Unsuitable containers in the cup holders may damage the cup holders or be thrown about the car's interior in the event of an accident, an evasive maneuver, or forceful braking. Spilled liquids can distract from the traffic conditions and lead to an accident. Hot drinks can damage the cup holder or lead to scalding. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do not force objects into the cup holder. Use lightweight, shatterproof, and sealable containers. Do not transport hot beverages.

For 3-door models: in front of the rear seats and in the side armrests.

Front

For 5-door models: in front of the rear seats.

In the center console.

Clothes hooks
General information
3-door model: The clothes hooks are located above the side windows in the rear. 5-door model: The clothes hooks are located above the rear doors.
Safety information
Warning Clothing articles on the clothes hooks can obstruct the view while driving. There is a risk of accident. When suspending clothing articles from the clothes hooks, ensure

222

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Storage compartments that they will not obstruct the driver's view.
Warning Improper use of the clothes hooks can lead to a risk of objects flying about during braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to property. Only hang lightweight objects, for instance clothing articles, from the clothes hooks.

CONTROLS

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

223

CONTROLS
Cargo area

Cargo area

loose objects or devices with a cable connection to the vehicle in the car's interior.
Warning Improperly stowed objects can shift and be thrown into the car's interior, for instance in the event of an accident or during braking and evasive maneuver. Vehicle occupants can be hit and injured. There is a risk of injury. Stow and secure objects and cargo properly.

Loading
Safety information
Warning High gross weight can overheat the tires, damage them internally and cause a sudden drop in tire inflation pressure. Driving characteristics may be negatively impacted, reducing lane stability, lengthening the braking distances and changing the steering response. There is a risk of accident. Pay attention to the permitted load capacity of the tires and never exceed the permitted gross weight.
Warning Loose objects or devices with a cable connection to the vehicle, for instance mobile phones, can be thrown about the car's interior while driving, for instance in the event of an accident, braking or evasive maneuver. There is a risk of injury. Secure

NOTICE Fluids in the cargo area can cause damage. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Make sure that no fluids leak in the cargo area.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs" on your vehicle's placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1,400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbs passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and

224

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Cargo area

CONTROLS

luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (1,400 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs) 5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4. 6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
Load
On 3-door models

Stowing and securing cargo
Cover sharp edges and corners on the cargo.
Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possible, directly behind and at the bottom of the rear passenger seat backrests.
Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not occupied, secure each of the outer safety belts in the opposite buckle.
If necessary, fold down the rear backrests to stow large cargo.
Do not stack cargo above the top edge of the backrests.
Small and light cargo: secure with ratchet straps or draw straps.
Larger and heavy cargo: secure with cargo straps.

Lashing eyes in the cargo area

On 5-door models

The maximum load is the sum of the weight of the occupants and the cargo. The greater the weight of the occupants, the less cargo that can be transported.

Without storage compartment package: to secure the cargo there are two lashing eyes, arrows 1, in the cargo area. With storage compartment package: to secure the cargo there are six lashing eyes, arrows 1 and 2, in the cargo area.
Attach load securing aids, such as lashing straps, tensioning straps, draw straps or cargo nets, to the lashing eyes in the cargo area.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

225

CONTROLS

Cargo area

Cargo cover
General information
When the tailgate is opened, the cargo cover is raised.
Safety information

2. Attach the left and right retaining straps at the tailgate.
Storage space under cargo floor panel

Warning Loose objects or devices with a cable connection to the vehicle, for instance mobile phones, can be thrown about the car's interior while driving, for instance in the event of an accident, braking or evasive maneuver. There is a risk of injury. Secure loose objects or devices with a cable connection to the vehicle in the car's interior.
Removing
For storing bulky objects the cargo cover can be removed. 1. Detach the left and right retaining
straps at the tailgate. 2. Pull the cargo cover out of the brackets
on the left and right.
Installing
1. Slide the cargo cover forward horizontally into the two side brackets until it audibly engages.

Located under the cargo floor panel on the right side is a trough for the onboard vehicle tool kit. Fold the right side of the cargo floor panel upward to remove the onboard vehicle tool kit.
Enlarging the cargo area
Concept
The cargo area can be enlarged as follows: The rear seat backrests can be folded
down. The rear seat backrests can be moved
into an upright loading position using the cargo setting.
General information
The rear seat backrest is divided into two parts at a ratio of 60 to 40. The left rear seat backrest is connected to the center section. The rear seat backrests can be folded down from the rear.

226

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Cargo area

CONTROLS

Safety information
Warning Danger of jamming with folding down the backrests. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the rear backrest and the of the head restraint is clear prior to folding down.
Warning If a rear seat backrest is not locked, unsecured cargo can be thrown about the car's interior; for instance, in the event of an accident, braking or an evasive maneuver. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the rear seat backrest is locked after folding it back.

Warning Body parts can be jammed when moving the head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement is clear when moving the head restraint.
Folding down the rear seat backrest from the rear
1. Before the rear seat backrest is folded down, hook the corresponding safety belt into the belt buckle on the side.
2. Pull the lever up, arrow 1, and fold the rear seat backrest forward, arrow 2.

Warning With a rear backrest that is not locked, the protective function of the middle safety belt is not guaranteed. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. If you are using the middle safety belt, lock the wider rear seat backrest.
Warning The stability of the child restraint system is limited or compromised with incorrect seat setting or improper installation of the child seat. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that the child restraint system fits securely against the backrest. If possible, adjust the backrest tilt for all affected backrests and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats and backrests are securely engaged or locked. If possible, adjust the height of the head restraints or remove them.

Cargo position
Concept The rear seat backrests can be moved into an upright loading position.
Adjusting 1. Release the backrest, and tilt it forward.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

227

CONTROLS

Cargo area

2. Fold the frame up until it engages.

Removing the cargo floor panel

3. Fold back and engage the rear seat backrest.
Folding back the backrest
Fold up the backrest and press it into the latch. Make sure that the safety belt is not caught behind the backrest or in between the backrest and the rear seats.

On 5-door models: To change the position of the cargo floor panel, first fold up the rear part of the cargo floor panel.

Variable cargo area floor

Concept
With the variable cargo area floor, the cargo area can be configured corresponding to transport requirements.
General information
Follow instructions on securing cargo, refer to page 224.

Grasp the cargo floor panel in the rear and fold slightly upward. Next, pull it backward from the supports. The cargo floor panel can be removed from the cargo area above the tail lights.
Lower position

Larger objects can be transported.

228

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Cargo area

CONTROLS

Space for smaller objects remains between the fixed and variable cargo area floor.

Upper position

Folded up position Safety information

Warning Improper use of the variable cargo floor panel can lead to a danger of objects flying about during braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to property. Do not use the variable cargo floor
panel to separate the cargo area and vehicle interior in the sense of a partition net. Only use the variable cargo floor panel in the folded-up position when the backrests are folded up and locked. Fold down the variable cargo floor panel before driving off. Always secure cargo against shifting, using straps, belts and lashing eyes, for instance.

With the backrests folded down, a long, flat loading surface is produced.
For 3-door models: Maximum load in this position: 330 lbs/150 kg.
For 5-door models: Maximum load in this position: 441 lbs/200 kg.
Space for objects remains between the fixed and variable cargo area floor.

Fold up the cargo floor panel

Fold up the cargo floor panel in the lower position and push it behind the locks, arrow. You've reached the maximum cargo height.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

229

DRIVING TIPS

Things to remember when driving

Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.
Breaking-in period
General information
Moving parts need to begin working together smoothly. The following instructions will help you to achieve a long vehicle life and good efficiency. During break-in, do not use the Launch Control, refer to page 121.
Safety information
Warning Due to new parts and components, safety and driver assistance systems can react with a delay. There is a risk of accident. After installing new parts or with a new vehicle, drive conservatively and intervene early if necessary. Observe the breakin procedures of the respective parts and components.

Engine, transmission, and axle drive
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km Do not exceed the maximum engine and road speed: For gasoline engine 4,500 rpm and
100 mph/160 km/h. Avoid full load or kickdown under all circumstances.
From 1,200 miles/2,000 km The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be increased.
Tires
Tire traction is not optimal due to manufacturing circumstances when tires are brandnew; they achieve their full traction potential after a break-in time. Drive conservatively for the first 200 miles/300 km.
Brake system
Brake discs and brake pads only reach their full effectiveness after approx. 300 miles/500 km. Drive moderately during this break-in period.
Clutch
The function of the clutch reaches its optimal level only after a distance driven of approx. 300 miles/500 km. During this breakin period, engage the clutch gently.
Following part replacement
The same break-in procedures should be observed if any of the components mentioned

230

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Things to remember when driving

DRIVING TIPS

above have to be renewed in the course of the vehicle's operating life.
General driving notes
Closing the tailgate Safety information
Warning An open tailgate protrudes from the vehicle and can endanger occupants and other traffic participants or damage the vehicle in the event of an accident, braking or evasive maneuvers. In addition, exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle interior. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do not drive with the tailgate open.
Driving with the tailgate open If driving with the tailgate open cannot be avoided: Close all windows and the glass sunroof. Greatly increase the air flow from the
vents. Drive moderately.
Ice on window glass
NOTICE The window will be lowered slightly when pulling on the door handle. In the event of frost, the window may freeze up and not be lowered. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. When pulling on the door handle, make sure that the window is lowered. If necessary, remove snow and ice from the window. Do not open the door with force.

Hot exhaust gas system
Warning High temperatures can occur underneath the body, for instance caused by the exhaust gas system, while driving. Contact with the exhaust gas system can cause burns. There is a risk of injury. Do not touch the hot exhaust gas system, including the exhaust pipe.
Warning If combustible materials, such as leaves or grass, come in contact with hot parts of the exhaust gas system, these materials can ignite. There is a risk of fire and injuries. Do not remove the heat shields installed and never apply undercoating to them. Make sure that no combustible materials can come in contact with hot vehicle parts in driving operation, idle or during parking.
Mobile communication devices in the vehicle
Warning Vehicle electronics and mobile phones can influence one another. There is radiation due to the transmission operations of mobile phones. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. If possible, in the car's interior use only mobile phones with direct connections to an exterior antenna in order to exclude mutual interference and deflect the radiation from the car's interior.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

231

DRIVING TIPS

Things to remember when driving

Hydroplaning
On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can form between the tires and road surface. This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplaning. It is characterized by a partial or complete loss of contact between the tires and the road surface, ultimately undermining your ability to steer and brake the vehicle.
Driving through water
General information When driving through water, follow the following: Deactivate Auto Start/Stop function. Drive through calm water only. Drive through water only if it is not
deeper than maximum 9.8 inches/25 cm. Drive through water no faster than
walking speed, up to 3 mph/5 km/h.
Safety information
NOTICE When driving too quickly through too deep water, water can enter into the engine compartment, the electrical system or the transmission. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. When driving through water, do not exceed the maximum indicated water level and the maximum speed for driving through water.
Braking safely
General information The vehicle is equipped with an Antilock Braking System ABS as a standard feature.

Perform an emergency stop in situations that require such. Steering is still responsive. You can still avoid any obstacles with a minimum of steering effort. Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from the hydraulic circuits indicate that the Antilock Braking System ABS is in its active mode.
Objects in the area around the pedals
Warning Objects in the driver's floor area can limit the pedal distance or block a depressed pedal. There is a risk of accident. Stow objects in the vehicle such that they are secured and cannot enter into the driver's floor area. Use floor mats that are suitable for the vehicle and can be safely attached to the floor. Do not use loose floor mats and do not layer several floor mats. Make sure that there is sufficient clearance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastened again after they were removed, for instance for cleaning.
Driving in wet conditions When roads are wet, salted, or in heavy rain, gently press the brake pedal every few miles. Ensure that this action does not endanger other traffic. The heat generated during braking dries brake discs and brake pads and protects them against corrosion. In this way braking efficiency will be available when you need it.

232

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Things to remember when driving

DRIVING TIPS

Hills
General information Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the gear that requires least braking effort. Otherwise, the brakes may overheat and reduce brake efficiency. You can increase the engine's braking effect by shifting down, going all the way to first gear, if needed.
Safety information
Warning Light but consistent brake pressure can lead to high temperatures, brakes wearing out and possibly even brake failure. There is a risk of accident. Avoid placing excessive stress on the brake system.

their response - generally this cannot be corrected.
Condensation water under the parked vehicle
When using the automatic climate control, condensation water develops and collects underneath the vehicle.
Ground clearance
NOTICE If the ground clearance is insufficient, e.g., curbs or underground garage entrances, contact with vehicle parts, e.g., spoiler, and the underbody may occur. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Ensure that there is sufficient ground clearance available.

Warning In idle state or with the engine switched off, safety functions, for instance engine braking effect, braking assistance and steering assistance, may not be available. There is a risk of accident. Do not attempt to drive in idle state or with the engine switched off.
Brake disc corrosion Corrosion on the brake discs and contamination on the brake pads are increased by the following circumstances: Low mileage. Extended periods when the vehicle is
not used at all. Infrequent use of the brakes. Aggressive, acidic, or alkaline cleaning
agents. Corrosion buildup on the brake discs will cause a pulsating effect on the brakes in

Roof-mounted luggage rack
General information
Installation only possible with roof rack. Roof racks are available as special accessories.
Mounting
Follow the installation instructions of the roof rack.
Loading
Because roof-mounted luggage racks raise the vehicle's center of gravity when loaded, they have a major effect on vehicle handling and steering response. Therefore, note the following when loading and driving:

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

233

DRIVING TIPS

Things to remember when driving

Do not exceed the approved roof/axle loads and the approved gross vehicle weight.
Be sure that adequate clearance is maintained for tilting and opening the glass sunroof.
Distribute the roof load uniformly. The roof load should not extend past the
loading area. Always place the heaviest pieces on the
bottom. Secure the roof luggage firmly, for in-
stance using ratchet straps. Do not let objects project into the open-
ing path of the tailgate. Drive cautiously and avoid sudden ac-
celeration and braking maneuvers. Take corners gently.

Driving on racetracks

Warning The vehicle is not designed for use in M Sport or motor sport type competition. There is a risk of accident. Do not use the vehicle for M Sport or motor sport type competitions.
Higher mechanical and thermal loads during racetrack operation lead to increased wear. Use of the vehicle in M sport or motor sport type competition is an improper use of the vehicle and may affect your warranty coverage. See "New Vehicle Limited Warranty" for more details.

234

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Reducing fuel consumption
Reducing fuel consumption

DRIVING TIPS

Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aerodynamics and increase the fuel consumption.
Close the windows and glass sunroof
Driving with the glass sunroof and windows open results in increased air resistance and raises fuel consumption.

General information
The vehicle contains advanced technologies for the reduction of consumption and emission values. Fuel consumption depends on a number of different factors. The implementation of certain measures, driving style and regular maintenance can influence fuel consumption and environmental impact.
Remove unnecessary cargo
Additional weight increases fuel consumption.

Tires
General information
Tires can affect consumption in various ways, for instance tire size may influence consumption.
Check the tire inflation pressure regularly
Check and, if needed, correct the tire inflation pressure at least twice a month and before starting on a long trip. Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling resistance and thus raises fuel consumption and tire wear.
Drive away without delay

Remove attached parts following use
Remove roof-mounted or rear rear carriers which are no longer required following use.

Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving right away, but at moderate engine speeds. This is the fastest way for the cold engine to reach its operating temperature.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

235

DRIVING TIPS

Reducing fuel consumption

Look well ahead when driving
Driving smoothly and proactively reduces fuel consumption. Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking. By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehicle driving ahead of you.

If the engine is switched off and then restarted rather than leaving the engine running constantly, fuel consumption and emissions are reduced. Savings can begin within a few seconds of switching off the engine. In addition, fuel consumption is also determined by other factors, such as driving style, road conditions, maintenance or environmental factors.

Avoid high engine speeds
Driving at low engine speeds lowers fuel consumption and reduces wear. If necessary, observe the vehicle's gear shift indicator, refer to page 134.
Use coasting conditions

Switch off any functions that are not currently needed
Functions such as seat heating and the rear window defroster require a lot of energy and consume additional fuel, especially in city and stop-and-go traffic. Switch off these functions if they are not needed.

When approaching a red light, take your foot off the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to a halt. For going downhill take your foot off the accelerator and let the vehicle roll. The fuel supply is interrupted while coasting.
Switch off the engine during longer stops
Switching off the engine
Switch off the engine during longer stops, for instance at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in traffic jam.
Auto Start/Stop function
The Auto Start/Stop function of the vehicle automatically switches off the engine during a stop.

Have maintenance carried out
Have the vehicle maintained regularly to achieve optimal vehicle efficiency and service life. MINI recommends that maintenance work be performed by a MINI service center. Also note the MINI maintenance systems, refer to page 277.
GREEN Mode
Concept
GREEN Mode supports a driving style that saves on consumption. For this purpose, the engine control and comfort features, for instance the climate control output, are adjusted. For Steptronic transmission:

236

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Reducing fuel consumption

DRIVING TIPS

Under certain conditions the engine is automatically decoupled from the transmission in the D selector lever position. The vehicle continues traveling with the engine idling to reduce consumption. The D selector lever position remains engaged. In addition, context-sensitive instructions are displayed to assist with an efficient driving style. The achieved extended range is displayed in the instrument cluster as bonus range.
General information
The system includes the following MINIMALISM functions and MINIMALISM displays: GREEN Limit, refer to page 237 GREEN climate control, refer to
page 237. GREEN bonus range, refer to page 238. GREEN tip, driving instruction, refer to
page 238. Coasting driving condition, refer to
page 239. MINIMALISM analyzer, refer to
page 241.
Activating GREEN Mode
Press the MINI Driving Modes switch downward until GREEN is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Configuring GREEN
Via MINI Driving Modes switch 1. Activating GREEN Mode. 2. "Configure GREEN" 3. Select the desired setting.

Via the Central Information Display (CID) 1. "My MINI" 2. "Vehicle settings" 3. "Configure GREEN" 4. Select the desired setting.
Activating/deactivating the functions The following functions can be activated/ deactivated: "GREEN speed warning" "GREEN climate control" "Coasting" Settings are stored for the driver profile currently used.
GREEN Limit "GREEN speed warning": GREEN Limit
is activated. A GREEN tip is displayed if the speed of the set GREEN Limit is exceeded. "Tip at:" Set the desired speed for the GREEN Limit.
GREEN climate control Climate control is set to be efficient. By making a slight change to the set temperature and adjusting the rate of heating or cooling of the car's interior consumption can be economized. The power output to the seat heater and exterior mirror is reduced.
Coasting Efficiency can be optimized by disengaging the engine and coasting, refer to page 239, with the engine idling. This function is only available in GREEN drive mode.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

237

DRIVING TIPS

Reducing fuel consumption

Deactivate the function to use the braking effect of the engine when traveling downhill.
GREEN potential savings Shows potential savings with the current settings in percentages.
Display in the instrument cluster
GREEN bonus range A modified driving style helps you extend your driving distance. The range extension can be displayed as the bonus range
in the instrument cluster. The bonus range is shown in the range display. The bonus range is automatically reset every time the vehicle is refueled.
Green display: efficient driving style. Gray display: modify driving style, for
instance by backing off the accelerator pedal.
Efficiency display A bar display in the instrument cluster indicates your current driving efficiency. Mark in the left area, arrow 1: display for energy recovered
by coasting or when braking. Mark in the right area, arrow 2: display when accelerating. The efficiency of your driving style is shown by the position of the mark: Mark inside the green range: efficient
driving style.

Mark outside the green range: modify driving style, for example by backing off the accelerator.
GREEN tip, driving instruction General information The GREEN tip indicates that your driving style can be modified to be more efficient, for example by backing off the accelerator. Instrument cluster without enhanced features: display
Instrument cluster with enhanced features: display
Activating/deactivating the display Activate information relating to the driving style and GREEN tips in the instrument cluster using the Central Information Display (CID): 1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings"

238

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Reducing fuel consumption

DRIVING TIPS

3. "Displays" 4. "Instrument panel" 5. "GREEN info"
GREEN tip, symbols An additional icon and text instructions are displayed. Icon Measure
For an efficient driving style, look well ahead when driving, accelerate conservatively, and delay accelerating. Reduce speed to the selected GREEN speed.
Steptronic transmission: Switch from M/S to D and avoid manual shift interventions. Manual transmission: Follow the shift instructions.
Manual transmission: Engage neutral for an engine stop.
Indications on the Control Display
Displaying MINIMALISM information The current efficiency of the functions in GREEN drive mode can be displayed on the Control Display. Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. "My MINI" 2. "Technology in action" 3. "MINIMALISM" Information is shown on the following functions: Auto Start/Stop function. Energy recovery.

Coasting.
Displaying the MINIMALISM analyzer Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. "My MINI" 2. "Technology in action" 3. "MINIMALISM Analyser" Further information on the MINIMALISM analyzer, refer to page 241.
Coasting
Concept The function helps to conserve fuel. To do this, under certain conditions the engine is automatically decoupled from the transmission when selector lever position D is set. The vehicle continues traveling with the engine idling to reduce consumption. Selector lever position D remains engaged. This driving condition is referred to as coasting. As soon as you step on the brake or accelerator pedal, the engine is automatically coupled again.
General information Coasting is a component of the GREEN drive mode. Coasting is automatically activated when the GREEN drive mode is called via the MINI Driving Modes switch, refer to page 177. A proactive driving style helps the driver to use the function often and supports the efficient effect of coasting.
Functional requirements The function is available in the speed range from approx. 15 mph/25 km/h up to 100 mph/160 km/h.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

239

DRIVING TIPS

Reducing fuel consumption

Accelerator pedal and brake pedal are not operated.
The selector lever is in selector lever position D.
Engine and transmission are at operating temperature.
With a camera in the area of the interior mirror: the system does not detect any vehicles ahead of you.
Operation via shift paddles Concept Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the coasting mode can be influenced with the shift paddles. Activating/deactivating coasting via shift paddles 1. Shift to the highest gear by pulling the
right shift paddle. 2. To activate coasting mode, actuate the
right shift paddle again. To deactivate, actuate the left shift paddle. Display Instrument cluster without enhanced features
The bar display below the tachometer is filled in green and the mark appears at the zero point. The tachometer indicates idle speed.

Instrument cluster with enhanced features
The bar display below the tachometer is filled in green and the mark appears at the zero point. The tachometer indicates idle speed.
Indications on the Control Display The coasting driving condition is displayed in the MINIMALISM Info while driving. The distance traveled in the coasting driving condition is indicated by a counter. Displaying MINIMALISM information Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. "My MINI" 2. "Technology in action" 3. "MINIMALISM" System limits The function is not available if one of the following conditions applies: DSC OFF and TRACTION are activated. Cruise control is activated. If driving in the dynamic limit range. If driving on steep uphill or downhill
grades. The battery charge state is temporarily
too low. The vehicle electrical system is drawing
excessive current.

240

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Reducing fuel consumption

DRIVING TIPS

MINIMALISM analyzer
Concept The function helps develop an especially efficient driving style and to conserve fuel. For this purpose, the driving style is analyzed. The assessment is done in various categories and is displayed on the Control Display. This display will help you adjust your driving style and save some fuel. The range of the vehicle can be extended by adopting an efficient driving style. This gain in range is displayed as a bonus range in the instrument cluster and on the Control Display.

fish's mood worsens, and a reduced number of stars is displayed. The table of values contains stars and evaluates the driving style in different categories. The more efficient the driving style, the more stars are displayed in the table. The bonus range achieved by a driving style that minimizes consumption is displayed below the table of values. The more efficient the driving style, the faster the bonus range increases. To assist with an efficient driving style, GREEN tips are displayed while driving. Tips for an energy-saving driving style, Saving fuel, refer to page 235.

Functional requirement This function is available in GREEN drive mode.

Displaying the MINIMALISM analyzer Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI" 2. "Technology in action" 3. "MINIMALISM Analyser"

Display on the Control Display The display of the MINIMALISM analyzer consists of a fish in a water glass, a table of values and the display of the achieved bonus range. The fish and the movements of the water in the bowl symbolize the efficiency of the driving style. Depending on the equipment, the fish is shown with efficient and inefficient driving style or only with inefficient driving style. The more efficient the driving style, the less the water sloshes around in the bowl and the better is the fish's mood. If the driving style is inefficient, the water oscillates, the

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

241

MOBILITY
Refueling

Refueling

Vehicle features and options Fuel cap

Opening
1. Grasp the fuel filler flap at the rear edge and open it.

General information
Follow the fuel recommendation, refer to page 244, prior to refueling.

2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.

Safety information

NOTICE With a driving distance of less than 30 miles/50 km the engine may no longer have sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not ensured anymore. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Refuel promptly.

3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached to the fuel filler flap.

242

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Refueling

MOBILITY

Closing

Safety information

Warning The retaining strap of the fuel cap can be jammed and crushed during closing. The cap cannot be correctly closed. Fuel or fuel vapors can escape. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Pay attention that the retaining strap is not jammed or crushed when closing the cap.
1. Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you clearly hear a click.
2. Press on the fuel filler flap until it engages.
Emergency unlocking
It may be necessary in certain situations to unlock the fuel filler flap manually, for instance with an electrical fault. Have fuel filler flap unlocked by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

NOTICE Fuels are toxic and aggressive. Overfilling of the fuel tank can damage the fuel system. Painted surfaces may be damaged by contact with fuel. Escaping fuel can harm the environment. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Avoid overfilling.

Follow the following when refueling
General information
When refueling, insert the filler nozzle completely into the filler pipe. Lifting up the fuel pump nozzle during refueling causes: Premature switching off. Reduced return of the fuel vapors. The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks off the first time. Make sure that the fuel cap is closed properly after refueling, otherwise the emissions warning light may light up. Follow safety regulations posted at the gas station.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

243

MOBILITY

Fuel

xx: comply with the current standard in each case.
Safety information
NOTICE Even small quantities of the wrong fuel or wrong fuel additives can damage the fuel system and engine. Furthermore, the catalytic converter is permanently damaged. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Do not refuel or add the following in the case of gasoline engines: Leaded gasoline. Metallic additives, for instance man-
ganese or iron. Do not press the Start/Stop button after refueling with the wrong fuel. Contact a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Gasoline
General information For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline should be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content. Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as containing metal must not be used. Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of 25 %, i. e. E10 or E25, may be used for refueling. Ethanol should meet the following quality standards: US: ASTM 4806xx CAN: CGSB-3.511xx

NOTICE Incorrect fuels can damage the fuel system and the engine. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Do not use fuels with a higher percentage of ethanol than recommended. Do not refuel with fuels containing methanol, e.g. M5 to M100.
NOTICE Fuel that does not comply with the minimum quality can compromise engine function or cause engine damage. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Do not fill with fuel that

244

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Fuel
does not comply with the minimum quality.
CAUTION The use of poor-quality fuels may result in harmful engine deposits or damage. Additionally, problems relating to drivability, starting and stalling, especially under certain environmental conditions such as high ambient temperature and high altitude, may occur. If drivability problems are encountered, we recommend switching to a high quality gasoline brand and a higher octane grade -- AKI number -- for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful engine deposits, it is highly recommended to purchase gasoline from Top Tier retailers. Failure to comply with these recommendations may result in the need for additional maintenance.
Recommended fuel grade MINI recommends AKI 91. John Cooper Works: MINI recommends AKI 93. Refuel with this gasoline to achieve the rated performance and consumption values.
Minimum fuel grade MINI recommends AKI 89. John Cooper Works: MINI recommends AKI 91. If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rating, the engine may produce knocking sounds when starting at high external temperatures. This has no effect on the engine life.

MOBILITY

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

245

MOBILITY

Wheels and tires

Vehicle features and options Tire pressure specifications

This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.
Tire inflation pressure
General information
The tire characteristics and tire inflation pressure influence the following: The service life of the tires. Road safety. Driving comfort. Fuel consumption.
Safety information
Warning A tire with too little or no tire inflation pressure may heat up significantly and sustain damage. This will have a negative impact on aspects of handling, such as steering and braking response. There is a risk of accident. Regularly check the tire inflation pressure, and correct it as needed, for instance twice a month and before a long trip.

In the tire inflation pressure table The tire inflation pressure table, refer to page 247, contains all tire inflation pressure specifications for the specified tire sizes at the ambient temperature. The tire inflation pressure values apply to tire sizes approved by the manufacturer of the vehicle for the vehicle type. To identify the correct tire inflation pressure, please note the following: Tire sizes of your vehicle. Maximum speed for driving.
Checking the tire inflation pressure
General information Tires heat up while driving. The tire inflation pressure increases with the tire temperature. Tires have a natural, consistent loss of tire inflation pressure. The displays of inflation devices may underread by up to 0.1 bar/2 psi.
Checking using tire inflation pressure specifications in the tire inflation pressure table The tire inflation pressure specifications in the tire inflation pressure table only relate to cold tires or tires at the same temperature as the ambient temperature. Only check the tire inflation pressure levels when the tires are cold, i.e.: Driving distance of max.
1.25 miles/2 km has not been exceeded. If the vehicle has not moved again for at
least 2 hours after a trip.

246

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Wheels and tires

MOBILITY

1. Determine the intended tire inflation pressure levels for the mounted tires.
2. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four tires, using a pressure gage, for example.
3. Correct the tire inflation pressure if the actual tire inflation pressure deviates from the intended tire inflation pressure.
4. Check whether all valve caps are screwed onto the tire valves.
After correcting the tire inflation pressure For run-flat tires: reinitialize run-flat tires. For the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM: reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM.
Checking the tire inflation pressure of the emergency wheel

These pressure values can also be found on the tire inflation pressure label on the driver's door pillar. Do not exceed a speed of 100 mph/ 160 km/h.

Tire pressure values up to 100 mph/160 km/h

On 3-door models: COOPER

Tire size Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires

Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Located behind the bumper on the underside of the vehicle is an opening for checking the tire inflation pressure.
Tire pressures up to 100 mph/ 160 km/h
For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for optimum driving comfort, note the pressure values in the tire inflation pressure table, refer to page 247, and adjust as necessary.

195/55 R 16 87 V A/S 195/55 R 16 87 W 195/55 R 16 87 H M+S

2.2 / 32

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

247

MOBILITY

Wheels and tires

Tire size
175/65 R 15 84 H A/S 205/45 R 17 88 V XL A/S 205/45 R 17 88 W XL 175/65 R 15 88 H XL M+S 205/45 R 17 88 V XL M+S 205/40 R 18 86 W XL 175/60 R 16 86 H XL M+S 185/50 R 17 86 H XL M+S

Pressure specifications in bar/PSI 2.4 / 35 2.2 / 32
2.6 / 38 2.2 / 32

On 3-door models: COOPER S

Tire size Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires

Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

195/55 R 16 87 V A/S 195/55 R 16 87 W 195/55 R 16 87 H M+S

2.3 / 33

2.2 / 32

Tire size
205/45 R 17 88 V XL A/S 205/45 R 17 88 W XL 205/45 R 17 88 V XL M+S 205/40 R 18 86 W XL 185/50 R 17 86 H XL M+S

Pressure specifications in bar/PSI 2.5 / 36 2.2 / 32
2.7 / 39 2.3 / 33

On 3-door models: JOHN COOPER WORKS

Tire size Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires

Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

205/45 R 17 88 V XL A/S 205/45 R 17 88 W XL 205/45 R 17 88 Y XL 205/45 R 17 88 V XL M+S
205/40 R 18 86 W XL 185/50 R 17 86 H XL M+S

2.6 / 38 2.8 / 41

2.2 / 32 2.4 / 35

248

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Wheels and tires

MOBILITY

On 5-door models: COOPER

Tire size Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires

Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

On 5-door models: COOPER S

Tire size Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires

Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

195/55 R 16 87 V A/S 195/55 R 16 87 W 195/55 R 16 87 H M+S
175/65 R 15 84 H A/S 205/45 R 17 88 V XL A/S 205/45 R 17 88 W XL 175/65 R 15 88 H XL M+S 205/45 R 17 88 V XL M+S
205/40 R 18 86 W XL 175/60 R 16 86 H XL M+S 185/50 R 17 86 H XL M+S

2.3 / 33 2.6 / 38
2.7 / 39

2.2 / 32 2.3 / 33
2.5 / 36

195/55 R 16 87 V A/S 195/55 R 16 87 W 195/55 R 16 87 H M+S
205/45 R 17 88 V XL A/S 205/45 R 17 88 W XL 205/45 R 17 88 V XL M+S
205/40 R 18 86 W XL 185/50 R 17 86 H XL M+S

2.4 / 35 2.6 / 38 2.8 / 41

2.2 / 32 2.3 / 33 2.5 / 36

Tire inflation pressures at max. speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h

Warning In order to drive at maximum speeds in excess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe, and, if necessary, adjust tire pressures for speeds exceeding 100 mph/ 160 km/h from the relevant table on the following pages. Otherwise, tire damage and accidents could occur.
For speeds over 100 mph/160 km/h and for optimum driving comfort, note the pressure values in the tire inflation pressure table, refer to page 250, and adjust as necessary.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

249

MOBILITY

Wheels and tires

Tire pressure values over 100 mph/ 160 km/h

On 3-door models: COOPER

Tire size Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires

Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

2.5 / 36 2.7 / 39
2.9 / 42

2.2 / 32 2.3 / 33
2.4 / 35

On 3-door models: COOPER S

Tire size Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires

Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

195/55 R 16 87 V A/S 195/55 R 16 87 W 195/55 R 16 87 H M+S
205/45 R 17 88 V XL A/S 205/45 R 17 88 W XL 205/45 R 17 88 V XL M+S
205/40 R 18 86 W XL 185/50 R 17 86 H XL M+S

2.8 / 41 3.1 / 45 3.2 / 46

2.3 / 33 2.6 / 38 2.7 / 39

250

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Wheels and tires

MOBILITY

On 3-door models: JOHN COOPER WORKS

Tire size Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires

Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

205/45 R 17 88 V XL A/S 205/45 R 17 88 W XL 205/45 R 17 88 Y XL 205/45 R 17 88 V XL M+S
205/40 R 18 86 W XL 185/50 R 17 86 H XL M+S

3.2 / 46 3.3 / 48

2.7 / 39 2.8 / 41

On 5-door models: COOPER

Tire size Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires

Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Tire size
175/65 R 15 84 H A/S 205/45 R 17 88 V XL A/S 205/45 R 17 88 W XL 175/65 R 15 88 H XL M+S 205/45 R 17 88 V XL M+S 205/40 R 18 86 W XL 175/60 R 16 86 H XL M+S 185/50 R 17 86 H XL M+S

Pressure specifications in bar/PSI 2.8 / 41 2.5 / 36
3.0 / 44 2.7 / 39

195/55 R 16 87 V A/S 195/55 R 16 87 W 195/55 R 16 87 H M+S

2.6 / 38

2.3 / 33

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

251

MOBILITY

Wheels and tires

On 5-door models: COOPER S

Tire size Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires

Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

195/55 R 16 87 V A/S 195/55 R 16 87 W 195/55 R 16 87 H M+S
205/45 R 17 88 V XL A/S 205/45 R 17 88 W XL 205/45 R 17 88 V XL M+S 205/40 R 18 86 W XL 185/50 R 17 86 H XL M+S

3.0 / 44 3.3 / 48

2.6 / 38 2.9 / 42

Tire identification marks
Tire size
205/45 R 17 84 V 205: nominal width in mm 45: aspect ratio in % R: radial tire code 17: rim diameter in inches 84: load rating, not for ZR tires V: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires

Maximum tire load
Maximum tire load is the maximum permissible weight for which the tire is approved. Locate the maximum tire load on the tire sidewall and the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR on the certification label on the driver's door pillar. Divide the tire load by 1.1. It must be greater than one-half of the vehicle's Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR. Note, front vs. rear GAWR and tire loads, respectively.
Speed letter

Designation Q R S T H V W Y

Maximum speed up to 100 mph/160 km/h up to 106 mph/170 km/h up to 112 mph/180 km/h up to 118 mph/190 km/h up to 131 mph/210 km/h up to 150 mph/240 km/h up to 167 mph/270 km/h up to 186 mph/300 km/h

Tire Identification Number
DOT-Code: DOT xxxx xxx 0121 xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand xxx: tire size and tire design 0121: tire age Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of the U.S. Department of Transportation.
Tire age

Recommendation Regardless of the tire tread, replace tires at least every 6 years.

252

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Wheels and tires

MOBILITY

Manufacture date You can find the manufacture date of the tire on the tire's sidewall.

Designation

Manufacture date

DOT ... 0121

1st week 2021

Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. E.g.: Treadwear 200; Traction AA; Temperature A
DOT Quality Grades
Treadwear Traction AA A B C Temperature A B C All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. E.g., a tire graded 150 would wear one and onehalf, 1 g, times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under

controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature
The temperature grades are A, the highest, B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades Band A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.
Warning The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
RSC Run-flat tires
Run-flat tires, refer to page 256, are labeled with a circular icon containing the letters RSC marked on the sidewall.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

253

MOBILITY

Wheels and tires

M+S
Winter and all-season tires with better cold weather performance than summer tires.
Tire tread
Summer tires
Do not drive with a tire tread of less than 0.12 in/3 mm, otherwise there is an increased risk of hydroplaning.
Winter tires
Do not drive with a tire tread of less than 0.16 in/4 mm, as such tires are less suitable for winter operation.
Minimum tread depth
Wear indicators are distributed around the tire's circumference and have the legally required minimum height of 0.063 inches/1.6 mm. The positions of the wear indicators are marked on the tire sidewall with TWI, Tread Wear Indicator.

Tire damage
General information
Inspect your tires regularly for damage, foreign objects lodged in the tread, and tread wear. Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces, as well as debris, curbs and other obstacles can cause serious damage to wheels, tires and suspension parts. This is more likely to occur with low-profile tires, which provide less cushioning between the wheel and the road. Be careful to avoid road hazards and reduce your speed, especially if your vehicle is equipped with low-profile tires. Indications of tire damage or other vehicle malfunctions: Unusual vibrations. Unusual tire or running noises. Unusual handling such as a strong ten-
dency to pull to the left or right. Damage can be caused by the following situations, for instance: Driving over curbs. Road damage. Tire inflation pressure too low. Vehicle overloading. Incorrect tire storage.
Safety information
Warning Damaged tires can lose tire inflation pressure, which can lead to loss of vehicle control. There is a risk of accident. If tire damage is suspected while driving, immediately reduce speed and stop. Have wheels and tires checked. For this purpose, drive carefully to the nearest dealer's service center or another qualified service

254

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Wheels and tires

MOBILITY

center or repair shop. Have vehicle towed or transported as needed. Do not repair damaged tires, but have them replaced.
Warning Tires can become damaged by driving over obstacles, e.g., curbs or road damage, at high speed. Larger wheels have a smaller tire cross-section. The smaller the tire cross-section, the higher the risk of tire damage. There is a danger of accidents and property damage. If possible, avoid driving over objects or road conditions that may damage tires, or drive over them slowly and carefully.
Changing wheels and tires
Mounting and wheel balancing
Have mounting and tire and wheel balancing carried out by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.
Wheel and tire combination General information
You can ask the dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop about the correct wheel/tire combination and wheel rim versions for the vehicle. Safety information
Warning Wheels and tires which are not suitable for your vehicle can damage parts of the vehicle, for instance due to contact with the body due to tolerances despite the same official size rating. There is a risk of

an accident. The manufacturer of your vehicle strongly suggests that you use wheels and tires that have been recommended by the vehicle manufacturer for your vehicle type.
Warning Incorrect wheel/tire combinations will have a negative impact on the vehicle's handling and on the function of a variety of systems, such as the ABS Antilock Braking System or DSC Dynamic Stability Control. There is a risk of accident. To maintain good handling and vehicle response, use only tires with a single tread configuration from a single manufacturer. The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends that you use wheels and tires that have been recommended by the vehicle manufacturer for your vehicle type. Following tire damage, have the original wheel/tire combination remounted on the vehicle as soon as possible.
Recommended tire brands
For each tire size, the manufacturer of the vehicle recommends certain tire brands. The tire brands can be identified by a star on the tire sidewall.
New tires
Tire traction is not optimal due to manufacturing circumstances when tires are brand-

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

255

MOBILITY

Wheels and tires

new; they achieve their full traction potential after a break-in time. Drive conservatively for the first 200 miles/300 km.
Retreaded tires
Warning Retreaded tires can have different tire casing structures. With advanced age the service life can be limited. There is a risk of an accident. The manufacturer of your vehicle does not recommend the use of retreaded tires.
The manufacturer of the vehicle does not recommend the use of retreaded tires.
Winter tires
Winter tires are recommended for operating on winter roads. Although so-called all-season M+S tires provide better winter traction than summer tires, they usually do not provide the same level of performance as winter tires.
Maximum speed of winter tires If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher than the permissible speed for the winter tires, then attach a label showing the permissible maximum speed in the field of view. The label is available from a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. With winter tires mounted, observe and do not exceed the permissible maximum speed.
Changing runflat tires
When changing from run-flat tires to standard tires, it must be ensured that the vehicle contains a compact spare tire ("donut") or tire mobility kit. Further information is available from a dealer's service center or

another qualified service center or repair shop.
Rotating wheels between axles
Different wear patterns can occur on the front and rear axles depending on individual driving conditions. The tires can be rotated in pairs between the axles to achieve even wear. Further information is available from a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. After rotating, check the tire pressure and correct, if needed.
Storing tires
Tire inflation pressure Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pressure indicated on the side wall of the tire.
Storage Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry and dark place. Always protect tires against all contact with oil, grease, and solvents. Do not leave tires in plastic bags. Remove dirt from wheels or tires.
Run-flat tires
Concept
Run-flat tires permit continued driving under restricted conditions even in the event of a complete loss of tire inflation pressure.
General information
The wheels are composed of tires that are self-supporting to a limited degree.

256

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Wheels and tires

MOBILITY

The support of the sidewall allows the tire to remain drivable to a restricted degree in the event of a tire inflation pressure loss. Follow the instructions for continued driving with a flat tire.
Safety information
Warning The vehicle handles differently when a run-flat tire has insufficient or no tire pressure; for instance, reduced lane stability when braking, braking distances are longer and the self-steering properties will change. There is a risk of accident. Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
Label
The tires are marked on the tire sidewall with RSC Run-flat System Component.
Repairing a flat tire
Safety measures
Park the vehicle as far away as possible from passing traffic and on solid ground.
Switch on the hazard warning system. Secure the vehicle against rolling away
by setting the parking brake.

Turn the steering wheel until the front wheels are in the straight-ahead position and engage the steering wheel lock.
Have all vehicle occupants get out of the vehicle and ensure that they remain outside the immediate area in a safe place, such as behind a guardrail.
If necessary, set up a warning triangle at an appropriate distance.
Mobility System
Concept
With the Mobility System, minor tire damage can be sealed temporarily to enable continued travel. To accomplish this, sealant is pumped into the tires, which seals the damage from the inside.
General information
Follow the instructions on using the Mobility System found on the compressor and sealant container.
Use of the Mobility System may be ineffective if the tire puncture measures approx. 1/8 inches/4 mm or more.
Contact a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop if the tire cannot be made drivable.
Do not remove foreign bodies that have penetrated the tire. Only remove foreign objects if they are visibly protruding from the tire.
Pull the speed limit sticker off the sealant container and apply it to the steering wheel.
The use of a sealant can damage the TPM wheel electronics. In this case, have the TPM wheel electronics replaced at the next opportunity.
The compressor can be used to check the tire inflation pressure.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

257

MOBILITY

Wheels and tires

Overview Storage
The Mobility System is located under the cargo floor panel. Sealant container
Sealant container, arrow 1. Filling hose, arrow 2. Observe use-by date on the sealant container. Compressor

Safety measures
Park the vehicle as far away as possible from passing traffic and on solid ground.
Switch on the hazard warning system. Secure the vehicle against rolling away
by setting the parking brake. Turn the steering wheel until the front
wheels are in the straight-ahead position and engage the steering wheel lock. Have all vehicle occupants get out of the vehicle and ensure that they remain outside the immediate area in a safe place, such as behind a guardrail. If necessary, set up a warning triangle at an appropriate distance.
Filling the tire with sealant
Safety information
DANGER If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can enter into the vehicle. The exhaust gases contain pollutants which are colorless and odorless. In enclosed areas, exhaust gases can also accumulate outside of the vehicle. There is danger to life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and ensure sufficient ventilation.

1 Sealant container unlocking 2 Sealant container holder 3 Tire pressure gage 4 Reduce tire inflation pressure button 5 On/off switch 6 Compressor 7 Connector/cable for socket 8 Connection hose

NOTICE The compressor can overheat during extended operation. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Do not run the compressor for more than 10 minutes.

258

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Filling 1. Shake the sealant container.

Wheels and tires

MOBILITY

4. Screw the filling hose of the sealant container onto the tire valve of the nonworking wheel.

2. Pull filling hose completely out of the cover of the sealant container. Do not kink the hose.

5. With the compressor switched off, insert the connector into the power socket in the vehicle interior.

3. Slide the sealant container into the holder on the compressor housing, ensuring that it engages audibly.

6. With the ignition switched on or the engine running, switch on the compressor.

Let the compressor run for max. 10 minutes to fill the tire with sealant and achieve a tire inflation pressure of approx. 2.5 bar. While the tire is being filled with sealant, the tire inflation pressure may sporadically reach approx. 5 bar. Do not switch off the compressor at this point.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

259

MOBILITY

Wheels and tires

Checking and adjusting the tire inflation pressure

4. Insert the connector into the power socket in the vehicle interior.

Checking 1. Switch off the compressor. 2. Read the tire inflation pressure on the
tire pressure gage. To continue the trip, a tire inflation pressure of at least 2 bar must be reached.

Removing and stowing the sealant container 1. Unscrew the filling hose of the sealant
container from the tire valve. 2. Press the red unlocking device. 3. Remove the sealant container from the
compressor. 4. Wrap and store the sealant container in
suitable material to avoid dirtying the cargo area.
Minimum tire inflation pressure is not reached 1. Pull the connector out of the power
socket in the vehicle interior. 2. Drive 33 ft/10 m forward and back to
distribute the sealant in the tire. 3. Screw the connection hose of the com-
pressor directly onto the tire valve stem.

5. With the ignition switched on or the engine running, switch on the compressor. If a tire inflation pressure of at least 2 bar cannot be reached, contact your dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. If a tire inflation pressure of at least 2 bar is reached, see Minimum tire inflation pressure is reached.
6. Unscrew the connection hose of the compressor from the tire valve.
7. Pull the connector out of the power socket in the vehicle interior.
8. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.
Minimum tire inflation pressure is reached 1. Unscrew the connection hose of the
compressor from the tire valve. 2. Pull the connector out of the power
socket in the vehicle interior. 3. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle. 4. Immediately drive approx.
5 miles/10 km to ensure that the sealant is evenly distributed in the tire. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. If possible, do not drive at speeds less than 12 mph/20 km/h.

260

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Wheels and tires

MOBILITY

Adjustment 1. Stop at a suitable location. 2. Screw the connection hose of the com-
pressor directly onto the tire valve stem.

Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to page 160. Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 155. Replace the nonworking tire and the sealant container of the Mobility System promptly.

Tire chains

3. Insert the connector into the power socket in the vehicle interior.
4. Correct the tire inflation pressure to at least 2.0 bar. Increase tire inflation pressure: with the ignition switched on or the engine running, switch on the compressor. Reduce tire inflation pressure: press the button on the compressor.
5. Unscrew the connection hose of the compressor from the tire valve.
6. Pull the connector out of the power socket in the vehicle interior.
7. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.
Continuing the trip
Do not exceed the maximum permissible speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

General information
The manufacturer of the vehicle has determined certain wheels and tires to be suitable for operation on the vehicle. Follow the tire chain manufacturer's instructions. Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor after mounting tire chains, as doing so may result in incorrect readings. Do not reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM after mounting tire chains, as doing so may result in incorrect readings. When driving with tire chains, briefly activate Dynamic Traction Control DTC, if needed.
Safety information
Warning With the mounting of tire chains on unsuitable tires, the tire chains can come into contact with vehicle parts. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Only mount tire chains on tires that are designated by their manufacturer as suitable for the use of tire chains.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

261

MOBILITY

Wheels and tires

Warning Insufficiently tight tire chains may damage tires and vehicle components. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the tire chains are always sufficiently tight. Re-tighten as needed according to the tire chain manufacturer's instructions.
Fine-link tire chains
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends the use of fine-link tire chains. Certain types of fine-link tire chains have been tested by the manufacturer of the vehicle and recommended as road-safe and suitable. Information regarding suitable tire chains is available from a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.
Use
Use only in pairs on the front wheels, equipped with the tires of the following size: 175/65 R 15. 175/60 R 16. 185/50 R 17. John Cooper Works: 185/50 R 17.
Maximum speed with tire chains
Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h when using tire chains.
Changing wheels/tires
General information
When using run-flat tires or a flat tire kit, a wheel does not always need to be changed

immediately when there is a loss of tire inflation pressure due to a flat tire. If needed, the tools for changing wheels are available as accessories from a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.
Safety information
DANGER The vehicle jack is only provided for shortterm lifting of the vehicle for wheel changes. Even if all safety measures are observed, there is a risk of the raised vehicle falling, if the vehicle jack tips over. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. If the vehicle is raised, do not lie under the vehicle and do not start the engine.
DANGER Supports such as wooden blocks under the vehicle jack reduce the capacity of the vehicle jack to bear weight. They have the potential to exert too much strain on the vehicle jack, causing it to tip over and the vehicle to fall. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not place supports under the vehicle jack.
Warning The jack, issued by the vehicle manufacturer, is provided in order to perform a wheel change in the event of a breakdown. The jack is not designed for frequent use; for example, changing from summer to winter tires. Using the jack frequently may cause it to become jammed or damaged. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to property. Only use the jack to attach an emergency or spare wheel in the event of a breakdown.

262

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Wheels and tires

MOBILITY

Warning On soft, uneven or slippery ground, for example snow, ice, tiles, etc., the vehicle jack can slip away. There is a risk of injury. If possible, change the wheel on a flat, solid, and slip-resistant surface.
Warning The vehicle jack is optimized for lifting the vehicle and for the jacking points on the vehicle only. There is a risk of injury. Do not lift any other vehicle or cargo using the vehicle jack.

Securing the vehicle against rolling
General information The vehicle manufacturer recommends to additionally secure the vehicle against rolling away when changing a wheel.
On a level surface

Warning When the vehicle jack is not inserted into the jacking point provided for this purpose, the vehicle may be damaged or the vehicle jack may slip when it is being cranked up. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. When cranking up the vehicle jack, ensure that it is inserted in the jacking point next to the wheel housing.

Place wheel chocks or other suitable objects in front and behind the wheel that is diagonal to the wheel to be changed. On a slight downhill gradient

Warning A vehicle that is raised on a vehicle jack may fall off of the jack if lateral forces are exerted on it. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to property. While the vehicle is raised, do not exert lateral forces on the vehicle or pull abruptly on the vehicle. Have a stuck wheel removed by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

If you need to change a wheel on a slight downhill grade, place chocks and other suitable objects, for instance rocks, under the wheels of both the front and rear axles against the rolling direction.
Preparing the vehicle
Park the vehicle on solid and non-slip ground at a safe distance from traffic.
Switch on the hazard warning system.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

263

MOBILITY

Wheels and tires

Set the parking brake. Engage a gear or move the selector lever
to position P. As soon as permitted by the traffic flow,
have all vehicle occupants get out of the vehicle and ensure that they remain outside the immediate area in a safe place, such as behind a guardrail. Depending on the vehicle equipment, get wheel change tools and, if necessary, the emergency wheel from the vehicle. If necessary, set up a warning triangle or portable hazard warning light at an appropriate distance. Secure the vehicle additionally against rolling. Loosen the lug bolts a half turn.

1. Hold the vehicle jack with one hand, arrow 1, and grasp the vehicle jack crank or lever with your other hand, arrow 2.
2. Insert the vehicle jack into the rectangular recess of the jacking point closest to the wheel to be changed.

Jacking points for the vehicle jack

3. Extend the vehicle jack by turning the vehicle jack crank or lever clockwise.

The jacking points for the vehicle jack are located at the marked positions.
Jacking up the vehicle
Warning Hands and fingers can be jammed when using the vehicle jack. There is a risk of injury. Comply with the described hand position and do not change this position while using the vehicle jack.

4. Take your hand away from the vehicle jack as soon as the vehicle jack is under load and continue turning the vehicle jack crank or lever with one hand.

264

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Wheels and tires

MOBILITY

5. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot stands vertically and at a right angle beneath the jacking point.
6. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot stands vertically and perpendicularly beneath the jacking point after extending the vehicle jack.
7. Crank the vehicle up, until the vehicle jack is with the entire surface on the ground and the relevant wheel is maximum 1.2 inches/3 cm above ground.
Mounting a wheel
Mount one emergency wheel only, as required. 1. Unscrew the lug bolts. 2. Remove the wheel. 3. Put the new wheel or emergency wheel
on and screw in at least two lug bolts in a crosswise pattern until hand-tight. If non-original light-alloy wheels of the vehicle manufacturer are mounted, the accompanying lug bolts may have to be used as well.

4. Hand-tighten the remaining lug bolts and tighten all lug bolts well in a crosswise pattern.
5. Turn the vehicle jack crank counterclockwise to retract the vehicle jack and lower the vehicle.
6. Remove the vehicle jack and stow it securely.
After the wheel change
1. Tighten the lug bolts crosswise. The tightening torque is 101 lbs ft/140 Nm.
2. Stow the nonworking wheel in the cargo area, if necessary. The nonworking wheel cannot be stored under the cargo floor panel because of its size.
3. Check tire inflation pressure at the next opportunity and correct as needed.
4. Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor. Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM.
5. Check to make sure the lug bolts are tight with a calibrated torque wrench.
6. Have the damaged tire replaced at the nearest dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.
Emergency wheel
Concept
In the event of a flat tire, the emergency wheel can be used in place of the wheel with the defective tire. The emergency wheel is only intended for temporary use until the defective tire/wheel has been replaced.
General information
Mount one emergency wheel only.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

265

MOBILITY

Wheels and tires

Also check the tire inflation pressure of the emergency wheel in the cargo area regularly, and correct it as needed.
Safety information

3. Screw wheel lug wrench onto the thread and hold in place with one hand.

Warning The emergency wheel has particular dimensions. When driving with an emergency wheel, changed driving properties may occur, for instance reduced lane stability when braking, longer braking distance, and changed self-steering properties in the limit area. There is a risk of accident. Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

4. Unlock the locking hexagon of the emergency wheel well using the hexagon attached to retaining plate.

Overview
The emergency wheel is housed in a well on the underbody of the vehicle. The screw connection of the emergency wheel is under the cargo floor panel, on the floor of the storage compartment for the onboard vehicle tool kit. The wheel change tools are under the cargo floor panel.
Removing the emergency wheel
1. Loosen the nut using the wheel wrench from the onboard vehicle tool kit.

5. Lower the emergency wheel with the wheel wrench.
6. Unscrewing the wheel wrench 7. Pull out the well with emergency wheel
under the vehicle toward the rear. 8. Remove the spacer and emergency
wheel from the well. 9. Stow the well and spacer in the vehicle.

Replacing the tires
1. Have the damaged tire replaced. 2. Replace the emergency wheel with the
new wheel.

2. Remove the retaining plate.

Installing the emergency wheel
Have the emergency wheel installed back into the vehicle by a dealer's service center

266

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Wheels and tires or another qualified service center or repair shop.

MOBILITY

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

267

MOBILITY

Engine compartment

Overview

1 Filler neck for washer fluid 2 Vehicle identification number 3 Oil filler neck

4 Jump-starting, positive terminal 5 Jump-starting, negative terminal 6 Coolant reservoir

268

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Engine compartment

MOBILITY

Hood
Safety information
Warning Improperly executed work in the engine compartment can damage vehicle components and impair vehicle functions. There is a risk of an accident and damage to property. Have work in the engine compartment performed by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.
Warning The engine compartment accommodates moving components. Certain components in the engine compartment can also move with the vehicle switched off, for instance the radiator fan. There is a risk of injury. Do not reach into the area of moving parts. Keep articles of clothing and hair away from moving parts.
Warning There are protruding parts, for instance locking hook, on the inside of the hood. There is a risk of injury. If the hood is open, pay attention to protruding parts and keep clear of these areas.

Warning Body parts can be jammed when opening and closing the hood. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the hood is clear during opening and closing.
NOTICE Folded-away wipers can be jammed when the hood is opened. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Make sure that the wipers with the wiper blades mounted are folded down onto the windshield before opening the hood.
NOTICE When the hood is closed, it must engage on both sides. Pressing again can damage the hood. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Open the hood again and then close it energetically. Avoid pressing again.
Opening the hood
1. Pull lever, arrow 1. Hood is unlocked.

Warning An incorrectly locked hood can open while driving and restrict visibility. There is a risk of accident. Stop immediately and correctly close the hood.

2. After the lever is released, pull the lever again, arrow 2. Hood can be opened.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

269

MOBILITY

Engine compartment

Indicator/warning lights When the hood is opened, a Check Control message is displayed.
Closing the hood

Energetically close the hood from approx. 20 in/50 cm. The hood must engage on both sides.

270

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Engine oil

MOBILITY

Vehicle features and options Safety information

This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.
General information
The engine oil consumption is dependent on your driving style and driving conditions. Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level after refueling by taking a detailed measurement. The engine oil consumption can increase in the following situations, for instance: Sporty driving style. Break-in of the engine. Idling of the engine. With use of engine oil types that are
classified as not suitable. Different Check Control messages appear, depending on the engine oil level.

NOTICE An engine oil level that is too low causes engine damage. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Immediately add engine oil.
NOTICE Too much engine oil can damage the engine or the catalytic converter. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Do not add too much engine oil. When too much engine oil is added, have the engine oil level corrected by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.
Electronic oil measurement
General information
The electronic oil measurement has two measuring principles: Monitoring. Detailed measurement. When making frequent short-distance trips or using a dynamic driving style, for instance when taking curves aggressively, regularly perform a detailed measurement.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

271

MOBILITY

Engine oil

Monitoring
Concept The engine oil level is monitored electronically while driving and can be shown on the Control Display. If the engine oil level is outside its permissible operating range, a Check Control message is displayed.
A red indicator light indicates that the engine oil pressure is too low.

Functional requirements A current measured value is available after approx. 30 minutes of normal driving.

Displaying the engine oil level Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

"Engine oil level"

The engine oil level is displayed.

System limits When making frequent short-distance trips or using a dynamic driving style, it may not be possible to calculate a measured value. In this case, the measured value for the last, sufficiently long trip is displayed.

Detailed measurement

Concept The engine oil level is checked when the vehicle is stationary and displayed via a scale. If the engine oil level is outside its permissible operating range, a Check Control message is displayed.

General information During the measurement, the idle speed is increased somewhat.

Functional requirements Vehicle is parked in a horizontal posi-
tion. Manual transmission: shift lever in neu-
tral position, clutch and accelerator pedals not depressed. Steptronic transmission: selector lever in selector lever position N or P and accelerator pedal not depressed. Engine is running and is at operating temperature.

Performing a detailed measurement Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

"Engine oil level"

4. "Measure engine oil level"

5. "Start measurement"

The engine oil level is checked and displayed via a scale.

Adding engine oil
General information
Only add engine oil when the message is displayed in the instrument cluster. The quantity to be added is indicated in the message displayed in the instrument cluster. Only add suitable types of engine oil, refer to page 274. Safely park the vehicle and switch off the ignition before adding engine oil. Take care not to add too much engine oil.

272

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Engine oil

MOBILITY

Safety information
Warning Operating materials, for instance oils, greases, coolants, fuels, can contain harmful ingredients. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Follow the instructions on the containers. Avoid the contact of articles of clothing, skin or eyes with operating materials. Do not refill operating materials into different bottles. Store operating materials out of reach of children.
NOTICE An engine oil level that is too low causes engine damage. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Immediately add engine oil.
NOTICE Too much engine oil can damage the engine or the catalytic converter. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Do not add too much engine oil. When too much engine oil is added, have the engine oil level corrected by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.
Overview
The oil filler neck is located in the engine compartment, refer to page 268.

Adding engine oil
1. Open the hood, refer to page 269. 2. Open the lid counterclockwise.
3. Add engine oil. 4. Close the lid.
Engine oil types to add
General information
The engine oil quality is critical for the life of the engine. Only add the types of engine oil which are listed.
Safety information
NOTICE Oil additives can damage the engine. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Do not use oil additives.
NOTICE Incorrect engine oil can cause malfunctions in the engine or damage it. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. When selecting an engine oil, make sure that the engine oil has the correct oil rating.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

273

MOBILITY

Engine oil

Suitable engine oil types
Add engine oils that meet the following oil rating standards: Gasoline engine BMW Longlife-01 FE. BMW Longlife-14 FE+. BMW Longlife-17 FE+.
Alternative engine oil types
If an engine oil suitable for continuous use is not available, up to 1 US quart/liter of an engine oil with the following oil rating can be added: Oil rating API SL. API SM. API SN.

Engine oil change
NOTICE Engine oil that is not changed in timely fashion can cause increased engine wear and thus engine damage. There is a risk of damage to property. It is recommended that you do not exceed the service intervals indicated in the vehicle. The vehicle manufacturer recommends that you have a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop change the engine oil.

Viscosity grades
When selecting an engine oil, make sure that the engine oil belongs to one of the following viscosity grades: Viscosity grades SAE 0W-20. SAE 0W-30.

More information about suitable oil ratings and viscosity grades of engine oils can be requested from a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

274

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Coolant

MOBILITY

Warning Additives are harmful and incorrect additives can damage the engine. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to property. Do not allow additives to come into contact with skin, eyes or articles of clothing. Use suitable additives only.
Coolant level

General information
Coolant consists of water and additives. Not all commercially available additives are suitable for the vehicle. Do not mix additives of different colors. Observe the water additive mixing ratio of 50:50. Information about suitable additives is available from a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Checking
There are yellow Min and Max marks in the coolant reservoir.
1. Let the engine cool. 2. Open the hood, refer to page 269. 3. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir
slightly counterclockwise to allow any excess pressure to dissipate, then open it.

Safety information

Warning With the engine hot and the cooling system open, coolant can escape and lead to scalding. There is a risk of injury. Only open the cooling system with the engine cooled down.

4. Open the coolant reservoir lid.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

275

MOBILITY

Coolant

5. The coolant level is correct if it lies between the minimum and maximum marks in the filler neck.

Disposal
Comply with the relevant environmental protection regulations when disposing of coolant and coolant additives.

6. Close the lid.
Adding coolant
1. Let the engine cool. 2. Open the hood, refer to page 269. 3. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir
slightly counterclockwise to allow any excess pressure to dissipate, then open it.

4. Open the coolant reservoir lid. 5. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant
up to the specified level; do not overfill. 6. Close the lid. 7. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi-
nated as soon as possible.

276

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Maintenance

MOBILITY

Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.
MINI maintenance system
The maintenance system provides service notifications and thereby provides support in maintaining road safety and the operational reliability of the vehicle. In some cases, scopes and intervals of the maintenance system may vary according to the country version. Replacement work, spare parts, fuels and lubricants, and wear materials are calculated separately. Further information is available from a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.
Condition Based Service CBS
Concept
Sensors and special algorithms take into account the driving conditions of the vehicle. CBS uses these to provide maintenance recommendations. The system makes it possible to adapt the amount of maintenance corresponding to your user profile.

General information
Information on service notifications, refer to page 133, can be displayed on the Control Display.
Service data in the vehicle key
Information on the service notifications is continuously stored in the vehicle key. The service center can read this data out and suggest a maintenance scope for the vehicle. Therefore, hand the service advisor the vehicle key with which the vehicle was driven most recently.
Storage periods
Storage periods during which the vehicle battery was disconnected are not taken into account. If this occurs, have a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop update the time-dependent maintenance procedures, such as checking brake fluid and, if necessary, changing the engine oil and the microfilter/activated-charcoal filter.
Maintenance Manual and Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models
Please consult your Maintenance Manual and Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

277

MOBILITY

Maintenance

Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models for additional information on the performance of service and maintenance work. The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that maintenance and repair be performed by a service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Records of regular maintenance and repair work should be retained.

Position

Socket for OBD Onboard Diagnosis
General information
Devices connected to the OBD socket trigger the alarm system when the vehicle is locked. Remove any devices connected at the OBD socket before locking the vehicle.
Safety information
NOTICE The socket for Onboard Diagnosis is an intricate component intended to be used in conjunction with specialized equipment to check the vehicle's primary emissions system. Improper use of the socket for Onboard Diagnosis, or contact with the socket for Onboard Diagnosis for other than its intended purpose, can cause vehicle malfunctions and creates risks of personal and property damage. Given the foregoing, the manufacture of your vehicle strongly recommends that access to the socket for Onboard Diagnosis be limited to a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop or other persons that have the specialized training and equipment for purposes of properly utilizing the socket for Onboard Diagnosis.

There is an OBD socket on the driver's side for checking the primary components in the vehicle's emissions.
Emissions
The warning light lights up: Emissions are deteriorating. Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible.
The warning light flashes under certain circumstances: This indicates that there is excessive misfiring in the engine. Reduce the vehicle speed and have the system checked immediately; otherwise, serious engine misfiring within a brief period can seriously damage emission control components, in particular the catalytic converter.

278

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Replacing components
Replacing components

MOBILITY

Vehicle features and options Wiper blades

Safety information
NOTICE The window may sustain damage if the wiper falls onto it without the wiper blade installed. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Hold the wiper firmly when changing the wiper blade. Do not fold or switch on the wiper without a wiper blade installed.
NOTICE Folded-away wipers can be jammed when the hood is opened. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Make sure that the wipers with the wiper blades mounted are folded down onto the windshield before opening the hood.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the onboard vehicle tool kit is located on the right side under the cargo floor panel or in a bag on the right side of the cargo area. After use, secure the bag with the onboard vehicle tool kit on a lashing eye again.

Replacing the front wiper blades
1. To change the wiper blades, fold up the wiper arms.
2. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly. 3. Open the wiper blade lock, arrow.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

279

MOBILITY

Replacing components

4. Pull the wiper blade down out of the holder on the wiper arm, arrow 1.

Light and bulb replacement
General information

5. Pull the wiper blade free from the holder of the wiper arm, arrow 2.
6. Insert and latch a new wiper blade in reverse order.
7. Fold down the wiper arm.
Replacing the rear wiper blade
1. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly. 2. Turn the wiper blade all the way back.
3. Push the wiper blade out of the fastening by continuing to turn it all the way.
4. Insert the new wiper blade by following the steps in reverse order. The wiper blade must engage audibly.
5. Fold down the wiper arm.

Lights and bulbs Lights and bulbs make an essential contribution to vehicle safety. Except for the reversing light, all headlights and lights are designed in LED technology. The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends that you have appropriate work performed by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop if you are unfamiliar with it or if it has not been described here. A spare light box is available from a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Follow the safety information, refer to page 280.
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs) Some items of equipment use light-emitting diodes installed behind a cover as a light source. These light-emitting diodes are related to conventional lasers and are officially designated as Class 1 light-emitting diodes. Follow the safety information, refer to page 280.
Safety information
Lights and bulbs
Warning Bulbs can get hot during operation. Contact with the bulbs can cause burns. There is a risk of injury. Only change bulbs after they have cooled off.

280

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Replacing components

MOBILITY

Warning Work on switched-on lighting systems can cause short circuits. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. When working on the lighting system, switch off the lights in question. If necessary, heed the bulb manufacturer's instructions.

Tail lights, bulb replacement Overview
All rear lights

NOTICE Dirty bulbs have a reduced service life. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Do not hold new bulbs with your bare hands. Use a clean cloth or something similar, or hold the bulb by its base.
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)
Warning Intensive brightness can irritate or damage the retina of the eye. There is a risk of injury. Do not look directly into the headlights or other light sources. Do not remove the LED covers.

1 Side tail lights 2 Rear fog light 3 License plate light 4 Center brake light
Side tail lights

Headlight glass
Condensation can form on the inside of the headlight glass in cool or humid weather. When driving with the lights switched on, the condensation evaporates after a short time. The headlight glass does not need to be changed. If despite driving with the headlights switched on, increasing humidity forms, for instance water droplets in the light, have the headlights checked.

1 Tail lights 2 Turn signals/brake lights 3 Turn signals/brake lights 4 Reversing lights
Side tail lights Follow the general instructions on lights and bulbs, refer to page 280. Bulb, reversing lights: P21W.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

281

MOBILITY

Replacing components

1. Open the tailgate. 2. Remove left or right cover.

Central brake light and license plate lights Follow the general instructions on lights and bulbs, refer to page 280. The lights feature LED technology. In the case of a malfunction, contact a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

3. Turn the bulb holder for the reversing light, arrow, counterclockwise and remove it.

Vehicle battery
General information
The battery is maintenance-free. More information about the battery can be requested from a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.
Safety information

4. Remove the bulb holder from the opening.
5. Press the nonworking bulb gently into the socket, turn counterclockwise and remove.
6. Proceed in the reverse order to insert the new bulb and attach the bulb holder. Make sure that the bulb holder engages in all fasteners.

DANGER Contact with live components can lead to an electric shock. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not touch any components that are under voltage.
Warning Vehicle batteries that are not compatible can damage vehicle systems and impair vehicle functions. There is a risk of an accident and damage to property. Only vehicle batteries that are compatible with your vehicle type should be installed in your vehicle. Information on compatible vehicle batteries is available at your dealer's service center.

282

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Replacing components

MOBILITY

Register the battery to the vehicle
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends that you have a service center or another qualified service center or repair shop register the vehicle battery to the vehicle after the battery has been replaced. Once the battery has been registered again, all comfort features will be available without restriction and any Check Control messages displayed which relate to comfort features will disappear.
Charging the battery
General information Make sure that the battery is always sufficiently charged to guarantee that the battery remains usable for its full service life.
A discharged battery is indicated by a red indicator light.
Charge the battery when acceleration is insufficient. The following circumstances can have a negative effect on the performance of the battery: Frequent short-distance drives. The vehicle is not used for more than a
month.
Safety information

Charging the battery Charge the battery only when the engine is off and via the starting aid terminals, refer to page 288, in the engine compartment.
Power failure
After a power loss, some equipment needs to be newly initialized or individual settings updated, for example: Memory function: store the positions
again. Time: update. Date: update. Glass sunroof: initialize the system.
Disposing of old batteries
Have old batteries disposed of by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop or take them to a collection point. Maintain the filled battery in an upright position for transport and storage. Secure the battery so that it does not tip over during transport.
Fuses
Safety information

Warning Incorrect and repaired fuses can overload electrical lines and components. There is a risk of fire. Never attempt to repair a blown fuse. Do not replace a nonworking fuse with a substitute of another color or amperage rating.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

283

MOBILITY

Replacing components

Accessing the fuses
The fuses are located in the glove compartment.
1. Open the glove compartment. 2. Swing the cover down, arrow.

Information on the fuse types and locations, as well as the positions of any other fuse boxes, is available on the Internet: www.mini.com/fusecard. Where applicable, information on the fuse types and locations is also found on a separate sheet in the fuse box.
Replacing fuses
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that you have a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop replace the fuses.

284

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Breakdown assistance
Breakdown assistance

MOBILITY

Vehicle features and options Warning triangle

The warning triangle is located in the tailgate. To remove, loosen the brackets.
First-aid kit

The button is located above the Control Display. The red light in the button flashes when the hazard warning flashers are activated.

General information
Some of the articles have a limited service life. Check the expiration dates of the contents regularly and replace any expired items promptly.
Storage
Storage for the first-aid kit is provided in the cargo area.
MINI Roadside Assistance

Concept
MINI Roadside Assistance can be contacted if assistance is needed in the event of a breakdown.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

285

MOBILITY

Breakdown assistance

General information
In the event of a breakdown, data on the vehicle's condition is sent to the vehicle manufacturer. There are various ways of making contact. Via a Check Control message, refer to
page 126. Calling with a mobile phone.
Requirements
Active MINI Connected contract or equipment version with intelligent emergency call.
Cellular network reception. The ignition is switched on.
Starting
If the vehicle is equipped with Teleservices, support is offered through Teleservice Diagnosis. Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "MINI Connected" 2. "MINI Assist" 3. "MINI Roadside Assistance"
The contact to the Roadside Assistance of the manufacture is established. A telephone number is displayed, if needed. Select to dial the telephone number on a connected mobile phone.
Teleservice Diagnosis
Teleservice Diagnosis enables the wireless transmission of detailed vehicle data that is important for vehicle diagnosis. This data is transmitted automatically.
Teleservice Help
Depending on the country, the Teleservice Help enables a more in-depth diagnosis of the vehicle via wireless transmission.

You can launch Teleservice Help by requesting it through the Service Specialist. 1. Park the vehicle in a safe place. 2. Set the parking brake. 3. Control Display is switched on. 4. Confirm Teleservice Help. The driving ability of the vehicle can be restored for specific functions. If this is not possible, further measures will be initiated, for instance Roadside Assistance will be informed.
Emergency Call
Intelligent emergency call
Concept In case of an emergency, an emergency call can be triggered automatically by the system or manually.
General information Only press the SOS button in an emergency. The Intelligent Assist system establishes a connection with the MINI Response Center. For technical reasons, the Emergency Call cannot be guaranteed under unfavorable conditions.

286

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Breakdown assistance

MOBILITY

Overview
SOS button in the roofliner Functional requirements The ignition is switched on. The Assist system is functional. If the vehicle is equipped with intelli-
gent emergency call: the SIM card integrated in the vehicle has been activated.

The MINI Response Center then makes contact with you and takes further steps to help you. Even if you are unable to respond, the MINI Response Center can take further steps to help you under certain circumstances. For this purpose, data that serves to determine the necessary rescue measures, for instance the current position of the vehicle when it can be determined, is transmitted to the MINI Response Center. If you can no longer hear the MINI Response Center through the loudspeakers, the hands-free system, for instance, may be broken. However, the MINI Response Center may still be able to hear you. The MINI Response Center ends the emergency call.

Automatic triggering Under certain conditions, for instance if the airbags trigger, an emergency call is automatically initiated immediately after an accident of corresponding severity. Automatic Collision Notification is not affected by pressing the SOS button.
Manual triggering 1. Press the cover briefly to open it. 2. Press the SOS button until the LED at
the button lights up green. The LED is illuminated green when an
emergency call has been initiated. If the situation allows, wait in your vehicle until the voice connection has been established. The LED flashes green when a connection to the MINI Response Center has been established.

Jump-starting
General information
If the battery is discharged, the engine can be started using the battery of another vehicle and two jumper cables. Only use jumper cables with fully insulated clamp handles.
Safety Instructions
DANGER Contact with live components can lead to an electric shock. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not touch any components that are under voltage.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

287

MOBILITY

Breakdown assistance

Warning If the jumper cables are connected in the incorrect order, sparking may occur. There is a risk of injury. Pay attention to the correct order during connection.
NOTICE In the case of body contact between the two vehicles, a short circuit can occur during jump-starting. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Make sure that no body contact occurs.
Preparation
1. Check whether the battery of the other vehicle has a voltage of 12 volts. The voltage information can be found on the battery.
2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehicle.
3. Switch off any electrical components in both vehicles.
Starting aid terminals
The starting aid terminal in the engine compartment, refer to page 268, acts as the positive battery terminal. Open the cover of the starting aid terminal. The body ground or a special connection on the body in the engine compartment, refer to page 268, acts as the negative battery terminal.
Connecting the cables
To prevent personal injury or damage to both vehicles, adhere strictly to the following procedure.

1. Pull off the lid of the starting aid terminal.
2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive jumper cable to the positive battery terminal, or to the corresponding starting aid terminal of the vehicle providing assistance.
3. Attach the terminal clamp on the other end of the cable to the positive battery terminal, or to the corresponding starting aid terminal of the vehicle to be started.
4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative jumper cable to the negative battery terminal, or to the corresponding engine or body ground of assisting vehicle.
5. Attach the second terminal clamp to the negative battery terminal, or to the corresponding engine or body ground of the vehicle to be started.
Starting the engine
Never use spray fluids to start the engine.
1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle and let it run for several minutes at an increased idle speed.
2. Start the engine of the vehicle that is to be started in the usual way. If the first starting attempt is not successful, wait a few minutes before making another attempt in order to allow the discharged battery to recharge.
3. Let both engines run for several minutes.
4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the reverse order.
Check the battery and recharge, if needed.

288

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Breakdown assistance

MOBILITY

Tow-starting and towing
Safety information
Warning Due to system limits, individual functions can malfunction during tow-starting/ towing with the Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a risk of accident. Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to tow-starting/towing.

Pushing the vehicle To remove a broken-down vehicle from the danger area, it can be pushed for a short distance. For rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to page 118.
Tow truck

Steptronic transmission with driven front axle: transporting the vehicle
General information The vehicle must not be towed if the front wheels are touching the ground.
Safety information
NOTICE The vehicle can be damaged when towing the vehicle with a lifted rear axle. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Have vehicle transported only with lifted front axle or on a loading platform.
NOTICE The vehicle can become damaged when lifting and securing it. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Lift the vehicle using suitable means. Do not lift or secure the vehicle by its
tow fitting, body parts, or suspension parts.

Your vehicle should be transported with a tow truck with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed.
Manual transmission
Towing or pushing the vehicle A broken-down vehicle can be towed or pushed. For rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to page 116.
NOTICE If manual unlocking of the parking brake is not possible, the vehicle cannot be moved or towed. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. The vehicle should only be transported on a loading platform.
Follow the following instructions: Make sure that the ignition is switched
on; otherwise, the low beams, tail lights, turn signals, and wipers may be unavailable.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

289

MOBILITY

Breakdown assistance

Do not tow the vehicle with the rear axle tilted, as the front wheels could turn.
When the engine is stopped, there is no power assist. Consequently, more force needs to be applied when braking and steering.
Larger steering wheel movements are required.
The towing vehicle must not be lighter than the vehicle being towed; otherwise, it will not be possible to control the vehicle's response.
Do not exceed a towing speed of 30 mph/50 km/h.
Do not exceed a towing distance of 30 miles/50 km.
Tow truck
With driven front axle

a sign or a warning triangle in the rear window. Safety information
Warning If the approved gross vehicle weight of the towing vehicle is lighter than the vehicle to be towed, the tow fitting can tear off or it will not be possible to control the vehicle's response. There is a risk of accident. Make sure that the gross vehicle weight of the towing vehicle is heavier than the vehicle to be towed.
NOTICE If the tow bar or tow rope is attached incorrectly, damage to other vehicle parts can occur. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Correctly attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow fitting.

Your vehicle should be transported with a tow truck with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed.
Towing other vehicles
General information Switch on the hazard warning system, depending on local regulations. If the electrical system has failed, clearly identify the vehicle being towed by placing

Tow bar The tow fittings used should be on the same side on both vehicles. Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting the tow bar at an offset angle, please follow the following: Maneuvering capability is limited going
around corners. The tow bar will generate lateral forces
if it is secured with an offset.
Tow rope Observe the following notes when using the tow rope: Use nylon ropes or straps, which will en-
able the vehicle to be towed without jerking.

290

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Breakdown assistance

MOBILITY

Make sure the tow rope is not twisted when fastening.
Check the fastening of the tow fitting and tow rope in regular intervals.
Do not exceed a towing speed of 30 mph/50 km/h.
Do not exceed a towing distance of 3 miles/5 km.
When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure that the tow rope is taut.
Tow fitting
General information

Safety information
NOTICE If the tow fitting is not used as intended, there may be damage to the vehicle or to the tow fitting. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Follow the notes on using the tow fitting.
Screw thread for tow fitting

The screw-in tow fitting should always be carried in the vehicle. The tow fitting can be screwed in at the front or rear of the vehicle. The tow fitting and the onboard vehicle tool kit, refer to page 279, are together in the cargo area. Use of the tow fitting: Use only the tow fitting provided with
the vehicle and screw it all the way in. Use the tow fitting for towing on paved
roads only. Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting,
for instance do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting. Check the fastening of the tow fitting in regular intervals.

Threaded holes for the tow fitting are located in the front and rear of the vehicle on the right side with respect to the direction of travel. Press on the mark on the edge of the cover to push it out.
Tow-starting
Steptronic transmission Do not tow-start the vehicle. Tow-starting the engine is not possible due to the Steptronic transmission. Have the reasons for the starting difficulties corrected by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.
Manual transmission If possible, do not tow-start the vehicle but start the engine by jump-starting, refer to page 287. If the vehicle is equipped with a

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

291

MOBILITY

Breakdown assistance

catalytic converter, only tow-start while the engine is cold.
1. Switch on the hazard warning system and comply with local regulations.
2. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 98. 3. Engage third gear. 4. Have the vehicle tow-started with the
clutch pedal pressed and slowly release the pedal. After the engine starts, immediately press on the clutch pedal again. 5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the tow bar or tow cable, and switch off the hazard warning system. 6. Have the vehicle checked by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

292

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Care

MOBILITY

Distances and temperature Maximum temperature: 140 /60 . Minimum distance from sensors, cam-
eras, seals: 12 inches/30 cm. Minimum distance from glass sunroof:
31.5 in/80 cm.
Automatic washing systems or car washes
Safety information

Washing the vehicle
General information
Regularly remove foreign objects such as leaves in the area below the windshield when the hood is raised. Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in winter. Intense soiling and road salt can damage the vehicle.
Steam jets or high-pressure washers Safety information
NOTICE When cleaning with high-pressure washers, components can be damaged due to the pressure or temperatures being too high. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Maintain sufficient distance and do not spray too long continuously. Follow the operating instructions for the high-pressure washer.

NOTICE Using a car wash with high pressure washers may result in water penetration of window areas. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Do not drive into high-pressure car wash systems.
NOTICE Improper use of automatic washing systems or car washes can cause damage to the vehicle. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Follow the following instructions: Give preference to cloth car washes
or those that use soft brushes in order to avoid paint damage. Do not drive through a car wash with guide rails higher than 4 in/10 cm to avoid damage to the chassis. Observe the tire width of the guide rail to avoid damage to tires and rims. Fold in exterior mirrors to avoid damage to the exterior mirrors.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

293

MOBILITY

Care

Unscrew the rod antenna to avoid the rod antenna breaking off.
Deactivate the wiper and, if necessary, rain sensor to avoid damage to the wiper system.
Driving into a car wash with a manual transmission In car washes, the vehicle must be able to roll freely. Rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to page 116.
Driving into a car wash with a Steptronic transmission In car washes, the vehicle must be able to roll freely. Rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to page 118. Some car washes do not permit persons in the vehicle. The vehicle cannot be locked from the outside when in selector lever position N. A signal is sounded when an attempt is made to lock the vehicle.
Driving out of a car wash Ensure that the vehicle key is in the car. Start the engine, refer to page 99.
Headlights
Do not rub wet headlights dry and do not use abrasive or acidic cleaning agents. Soak areas that have been dirtied, for instance from insects, with shampoo and wash off with water. Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an ice scraper.
After washing the vehicle
After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action can be reduced. The heat generated

during braking dries brake discs and brake pads and protects them against corrosion. Completely remove all residues on the windows, to minimize loss of visibility due to smearing and to reduce wiper noises and wiper blade wear.
Vehicle care
Vehicle care products General information
MINI recommends using vehicle care and cleaning products from MINI. Suitable care products are available from a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Safety information
Warning Cleansers can contain substances that are dangerous and harmful to your health. There is a risk of injury. When cleaning the interior, open the doors or windows. Only use products intended for cleaning vehicles. Follow the instructions on the container.
Vehicle paint General information
Regular care contributes to driving safety and value retention. Environmental influences in areas with elevated air pollution or natural contaminants, such as tree resin or pollen can affect the vehicle's paintwork. Tailor the frequency and extent of your vehicle care to these influences. Corrosive substances such as spilled fuel, oil, grease or bird droppings, must be re-

294

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Care

MOBILITY

moved immediately to prevent the finish from being altered or discolored.
Matte finish Only use cleaning and care products suitable for vehicles with matte finish.
Leather care
Remove dust from the leather regularly, using a cloth or vacuum cleaner. Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime chafe in pores and folds, and lead to increased wear and premature degradation of the leather surface. To guard against discoloration, such as from clothing, clean leather and provide leather care roughly every two months. Clean light-colored leather more frequently because soiling on such surfaces is substantially more visible. Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and grease will gradually break down the protective layer of the leather surface.
Upholstery material care
General information Vacuum the upholstery regularly with a vacuum cleaner. If upholstery is very dirty, for instance with beverage stains, use a soft sponge or microfiber cloth with a suitable interior cleaner. Clean the upholstery down to the seams using large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the material vigorously.

Safety information
NOTICE Open Velcro® fasteners on articles of clothing can damage the seat covers. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Ensure that any Velcro® fasteners are closed.
Caring for special components
Light-alloy wheels When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral wheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to 9. Do not use abrasive cleaning agents or steam jets above 140 /60 . Follow the manufacturer's instructions. Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agents can destroy the protective layer of adjacent components, such as the brake disc. After cleaning, apply the brakes shortly to dry them. The heat generated during braking dries brake discs and brake pads and protects them against corrosion.
Chrome surfaces Carefully clean components such as the radiator grille or door handles with plenty of water, if necessary, with shampoo added, particularly when they have been exposed to road salt.
Rubber components Environmental influences can cause surface soiling of rubber parts and a loss of gloss. Use only water and suitable cleaning agents for cleaning. Treat especially worn rubber parts with rubber care agents at regular intervals. When cleaning rubber seals, do not use any sili-

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

295

MOBILITY

Care

con-containing vehicle care products in order to avoid damage or noises.
Fine wood parts Clean fine wood facing and fine wood components only with a moist rag. Then dry with a soft cloth.
Plastic components
NOTICE Cleaning agents that contain alcohol or solvents, such as lacquer thinners, heavyduty grease removers, fuel and such, can damage plastic parts. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Clean with a microfiber cloth. Dampen the cloth lightly with water, if needed.
Clean with a microfiber cloth. Dampen the cloth lightly with water, if needed. Do not soak the roofliner.
Safety belts
Warning Chemical cleansers can destroy the safety belt webbing. Missing protective effect of the safety belts. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Use only a mild soapy solution for cleaning the safety belts.
Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and thus have a negative impact on safety. Use only a mild soapy solution, with the safety belts clipped into their buckles. Safety belts should only be allowed to retract if they are dry.

Carpets and floor mats
Warning Objects in the driver's floor area can limit the pedal distance or block a depressed pedal. There is a risk of accident. Stow objects in the vehicle such that they are secured and cannot enter into the driver's floor area. Use floor mats that are suitable for the vehicle and can be safely attached to the floor. Do not use loose floor mats and do not layer several floor mats. Make sure that there is sufficient clearance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastened again after they were removed, for instance for cleaning.
Floor mats can be removed from the car's interior for cleaning. If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a microfiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner. To prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and forth in the direction of travel only. Sensor/camera lenses To clean sensors and camera lenses, use a cloth moistened with a small amount of glass detergent. Displays/Screens/Projection lenses
NOTICE Chemical cleaning agents, moisture or fluids of any kind can damage the surface of displays and screens. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth.

296

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Care
NOTICE The surface of displays can be damaged with improper cleaning. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Avoid pressure that is too high and do not use any scratching materials. Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth. For stubborn soiling on the projection lens of the Head-up Display, dampen the microfiber cloth with alcohol. Projection lens, refer to page 141.
Long-term vehicle storage
When the vehicle is shut down for longer than three months, special measures must be taken. Further information is available from a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

MOBILITY

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

297

REFERENCE

Technical data

General information
The technical data and specifications in the Owner's Manual are used as guidance values. The vehicle-specific data can deviate from this, for instance due to the selected special equipment, country version or country-specific measurement method. Detailed

values can be found in the approval documents, on labels on the vehicle or can be obtained from a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Dimensions

The dimensions can vary depending on the model version, equipment or country-specific measurement method. The specified heights do not take into account attached parts, for instance a roof anMINI 3-door Width with mirrors Width without mirrors Height Length Wheelbase Smallest turning radius diam.

tenna, roof racks or spoiler. The heights can deviate, for instance due to the selected special equipment, tires, load and chassis version.

in/mm in/mm in/mm in/mm in/mm ft/m

75.9/1,928 68/1,727 55.7/1,414 152.8/3,880 98.2/2,495 35.4/10.8

298

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Technical data

REFERENCE

MINI 5-door Width with mirrors Width without mirrors Height Length Wheelbase Smallest turning radius diam.
Weights
MINI Cooper, 3-door Approved gross vehicle weight Manual transmission Steptronic transmission Load Manual transmission Steptronic transmission Approved front axle load Manual transmission Steptronic transmission Approved rear axle load Manual transmission Steptronic transmission
MINI Cooper, 5-door Approved gross vehicle weight Manual transmission Steptronic transmission Load Manual transmission

in/mm in/mm in/mm in/mm in/mm ft/m

75.9/1,928 68/1,727 56.1/1,425 159.1/4,040 101.1/2,567 36.4/11.1

lbs/kg lbs/kg
lbs/kg lbs/kg
lbs/kg lbs/kg
lbs/kg lbs/kg

3,505/1,590 3,549/1,610
697/316 694/315
1,973/895 2,028/920
1,664/755 1,664/755

lbs/kg lbs/kg
lbs/kg

3,781/1,715 3,836/1,740
838/380

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

299

REFERENCE

Technical data

MINI Cooper, 5-door Steptronic transmission Approved front axle load Manual transmission Steptronic transmission Approved rear axle load Manual transmission Steptronic transmission
MINI Cooper S, 3-door Approved gross vehicle weight Manual transmission Steptronic transmission Load Manual transmission Steptronic transmission Approved front axle load Manual transmission Steptronic transmission Approved rear axle load Manual transmission Steptronic transmission
MINI Cooper S, 5-door Approved gross vehicle weight Manual transmission Steptronic transmission Load Manual transmission Steptronic transmission

lbs/kg
lbs/kg lbs/kg
lbs/kg lbs/kg
lbs/kg lbs/kg
lbs/kg lbs/kg
lbs/kg lbs/kg
lbs/kg lbs/kg
lbs/kg lbs/kg
lbs/kg lbs/kg

847/384
2,061/935 2,116/960
1,863/845 1,863/845
3,616/1,640 3,627/1,645
710/322 692/314
2,061/935 2,094/950
1,687/765 1,687/765
3,869/1,755 3,913/1,775
840/381 858/389

300

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Technical data

REFERENCE

MINI Cooper S, 5-door Approved front axle load Manual transmission Steptronic transmission Approved rear axle load Manual transmission Steptronic transmission
MINI John Cooper Works, 3-door Approved gross vehicle weight Manual transmission Steptronic transmission Load Manual transmission Steptronic transmission Approved front axle load Manual transmission Steptronic transmission Approved rear axle load Manual transmission Steptronic transmission

lbs/kg lbs/kg
lbs/kg lbs/kg

2,150/975 2,183/990
1,896/860 1,896/860

lbs/kg lbs/kg
lbs/kg lbs/kg
lbs/kg lbs/kg
lbs/kg lbs/kg

3,715/1,685 3,770/1,710
787/357 772/350
2,072/940 2,150/975
1,764/800 1,764/800

Capacities
MINI Fuel tank, approx. Observe further information on fuel quality, refer to page 244.

US gal/liters

11.6/44.0

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

301

REFERENCE
Appendix

Appendix

Any updates to the Owner's Manual of the vehicle are listed here.
Updates made after the editorial deadline
The following chapters were updated in the printed version of the Owner's Manual after the editorial deadline for the Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle had closed: Operation: opening and closing: vehicle
key: safety Instructions. Operation: opening and closing: vehicle
key: change battery: note. Operation: seats, mirrors and steering
wheel: seats and head restraints: safety belts: general. In contrast to the description in the Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle, the MINI FindMate equipment is not available.

302

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Appendix

REFERENCE

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

303

REFERENCE

Everything from A to Z

Index A
ABS Antilock Braking System 175 Acceleration Assistant, see Launch Control 121 Accessories and parts 8 ACC, see Camera-based cruise control 179 Activated charcoal filter 206 Activation times, parked-car ventilation 207 Active Cruise Control, see Camera-based
cruise control 179 Active Guard, see Intelligent Safety 162 Adaptive chassis 177 Additives, engine oil types 273 Adjusting menu contents, Central Information Display (CID) 40 Adjustments, steering wheel 91 Airbags 151 Airbags, indicator and warning light 153 Air circulation, see Recirculated-air mode 202, 205 Air conditioner 201 air conditioning, climate 204 Air distribution, manual 202, 206 Air drying, see air conditioning 204 Air flow, air conditioner 202 Air flow, automatic climate control 205 Air outlets, see Ventilation 206 Air pressure, tires 246 Alarm system 75 Alarm triggering 75 Alarm, unintentional 77 All-season tires, see Winter tires 256 Amazon Alexa Car Integration 46 Antifreeze, see Washer fluid 114 Antilock Braking System ABS 175 Anti-slip control, see DSC 175 Apps, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6

Arrival time 138 Ash tray 214 Assistance when driving off, see Drive-off assistant 178 Assistance with breakdown 285 Audio, see Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Entertainment and Communication 6 Automatic car wash 293 Automatic climate control 203 Automatic Curb Monitor, exterior mir-
ror 90 Automatic deactivation, front-seat passenger airbags 153 Automatic headlight control 146 Automatic locking 74 Automatic transmission, see Steptronic transmission 116 Automatic unlocking 75 AUTO program, automatic climate control 205 AUTO program, intensity 205 Auto Start/Stop function 101 Average consumption 137 Average speed 137 Axle loads, approved 299
B
Backrest curvature, see Lumbar support 83 Backrest, seats 82 Bad weather light 148 Battery, disposing of 283 Battery, vehicle 282 Being towed, see Tow-starting and towing 289 Belts, see Safety belts 85 Beverage holder, see Cup holders 222 Blocking, power window, see Safety switch 79 Bluetooth connection 53

304

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Everything from A to Z

REFERENCE

Bonus range, GREEN Mode 238 Bottle holder, see Cup holders 222 Brake assistant 175 Brake discs, break-in 230 Brake pads, break-in 230 Braking, information 232 Breakdown assistance 285 Breaking in 230 Brightness, Control Display 49 Bulb replacement 280 Bulb replacement, rear 281 Bulbs and lights 280 Buttons on the steering wheel 32 Button, SOS 286 Button, Start/Stop 98 Bypassing, see Jump-starting 287
C
California Proposition 65 Warning 8 Camera-based assistance systems, see Intelligent Safety 162 Camera-based cruise control 179 Camera lenses, care 296 Camera, rearview camera 192 Can holder, see Cup holders 222 Care 293 Care, light-alloy wheels 295 Care of displays, screens 296 Care, vehicle 294 Cargo area 224 Cargo area, adapting size 228 Cargo area, enlarging 226 Cargo area lid 70 Cargo area, storage compartments 226 Cargo cover 226 Cargo position, rear seat backrest 226 Cargo, stowing and securing 224 Cargo straps 225 Carpet, care 296 Car wash 293 Car wash, automatic 293 Catalytic converter, see Hot exhaust gas system 231 CBS Condition Based Service 277

Cell phone, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communication 6 Center armrest 221 Center console 34 Central Information Display (CID) 36 Central Information Display (CID), see Control Display 38 Central instrument cluster, LED ring 140 Central locking system, unlocking, from inside 68 Central screen, see Control Display 38 Changes, technical, see For Your Own Safety 7 Changing parts 279 Changing wheels 262 Changing, wheels and tires 255 Charging smartphone, see Wireless charging tray 216 Charging tray for smartphones, see Wireless charging tray 216 Chassis number, see Vehicle identification number 13 Check Control 126 Check engine oil level 271 Checking the engine oil level electronically 271 Checking the oil level electronically 271 Children, seating position 92 Children, transporting safely 92 Child restraint system 92 Child restraint system LATCH 95 Child restraint systems, mounting 93 Child safety locks 97 Child seat, mounting 93 Child seats 92 Chrome parts, care 295 Cigarette lighter 214 Cleaning displays, screens 296 Clearance, water 232 Climate control 201, 203 Clothes hooks 222 Coasting 239 Coasting with engine decoupled, see Coasting 239 Coasting with idling engine 239 Combination switch, see Turn signals 106

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

305

REFERENCE

Everything from A to Z

Combination switch, see Washer/wiper system 107, 111 Comfort Access 68 Comfort entry 63 Compartments in the doors 221
Compass 212 Compatible devices, see Suitable devices 53 Computer, see Trip computer 136 Condensation on windows 203, 206 Condensation under the vehicle 233 Condition Based Service CBS 277 Configuring driving program 178 Confirmation signal 75 Connect device 52 Connecting electrical devices, see Sockets 215 Connections 52 Consumption, see Average consumption 137 Consumption, see Current consumption 132 Contacts, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Continued driving with a flat tire 158, 161 Control Display 38 Control Display, brightness 49 Controller 39 Control systems, driving stability 175 Convenient closing, vehicle key 64 Convenient opening, vehicle key 63 Cooling, maximum 204 Cornering light 147 Corrosion on brake discs 233 Cosmetic mirror 214 Coupling, see Pairing 52 Courtesy lights during unlocking 63 Courtesy lights with the vehicle locked 64 Cruise control 186 Cruise control, active 179 Cruise control with distance control, see Camera-based cruise control 179 Cruise control without distance control, see Cruise control 186 Cruising range 132 Cup holder 222

Current consumption 132 Customer service, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6
D
Damage, tires 254 Dashboard 32, 214 Data memory 10 Data protection, settings 51 Data, see Deleting personal data 51 Data, technical 298 Date 48 Date, display 132 Daytime running lights 147 DCC, see Cruise control 186 Decorative trim 214 Defrosting, see Windows, defrosting 203, 206 Deleting personal data 51 Departure schedule, see Pre-ventila-
tion 207 Destination distance 138 Device list 52 Digital clock 132 Digital compass 212 Dimensions 298 Dimmable exterior mirrors 90 Dimmable interior mirror 91 Direction indicator, see Turn signals 106 Display, date 132 Display, electronic, instrument cluster 125, 126 Display, engine temperature 138 Display, GREEN Mode 236 Display, iDrive 36 Display lighting, see Instrument lighting 149 Displays 123 Disposal, coolant 276 Disposal, vehicle battery 283 Distance control, see PDC 189 Distance to destination 138 Divided screen view, split screen 38 Drive-off assistant 178

306

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Everything from A to Z

REFERENCE

Drive-off assistant, see DSC 175 Driver assistance, see Intelligent Safety 162 Driver profiles 71 Driver profiles, exporting profiles 73 Driver profiles, importing profiles 73 Driving Dynamics Control, see MINI Driv-
ing Modes switch 177 Driving Excitement, SPORT 139 Driving instructions, breaking in 230 Driving mode, GREEN 236 Driving mode, GREEN Driving style analysis 241 Driving modes 177 Driving notes, general 231 Driving notes, things to remember when
driving 230 Driving on racetracks 234 Driving stability control systems 175 Driving, Start/Stop button 98 Driving style analysis 241 Driving through water 232 Driving tip, GREEN tip 238 Driving tips 231 DSC Dynamic Stability Control 175 DTC Dynamic Traction Control 176 DVD, video, see Owner's Handbook for Nav-
igation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Dynamic damping, see Adaptive chassis 177 Dynamic Stability Control DSC 175 Dynamic Traction Control DTC 176
E
Electronic displays, instrument cluster 125, 126 Electronic oil measurement 271 Electronic Stability Program ESP, see DSC 175 E-mail, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Emergency braking, see PostCrash iBrake 174 Emergency Request 286

Emergency service, see MINI Roadside Assistance 285 Emergency unlocking, fuel filler flap 243 Emergency unlocking, transmission lock 120 Emergency wheel, compact wheel, see Emergency wheel 265 Energy control 132 Engine, automatic Start/Stop function 101 Engine compartment 268 Engine coolant 275 Engine idling when driving, see Coasting 239 Engine oil 271 Engine oil, adding 272 Engine oil change 274 Engine oil filler neck 272 Engine oil types to add 273 Engine start, see Jump-starting 287 Engine start, see Starting the engine 99 Engine stop 100 Engine temperature, display 138 Entering a destination, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Entering an address, navigation, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communication 6 Entertainment, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communication 6 Equipment, interior 209 Error displays, see Check Control 126 ESP Electronic Stability Program, see DSC 175 Exchanging, wheels and tires 255 Exhaust gas system 231 Exhaustion warner 173 Exhaust, see Exhaust gas system 231 Exterior mirror, Automatic Curb Monitor 90 Exterior mirror, automatic dimming feature 90 Exterior mirrors 89 Exterior mirrors, malfunction 90 External start, see Jump-starting 287

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

307

REFERENCE

Everything from A to Z

External temperature display 131 External temperature warning 131 Eyes for securing cargo 225
F
Failure message, see Check Control 126 False alarm, see Avoiding unintentional alarms 77 Fan, see Air flow 202, 205 Fastening safety belts, see Safety belts 85 Fatigue alert 173 Filler neck for engine oil 272 Filter, see Microfilter 203 Fine wood, care 296 First-aid kit 285 Fish, MINIMALISM display 241 Flat tire, changing wheels 262 Flat tire, continued driving 158, 161 Flat tire, Flat Tire Monitor TPM 160 Flat tire message, FTM 160 Flat tire message, TPM 156 Flat Tire Monitor TPM 160 Flat tire, repairing 257 Flat tire, warning light 156, 160 Flooding, driving through 232 Floor carpet, care 296 Floor mats, care 296 Fold-away position, windshield wip-
ers 110, 113 Foot brake 232 Forward Collision Warning with collision mitigation 163 For Your Own Safety 7 Front airbags 151 Front-seat passenger airbags, automatic de-
activation 153 Front-seat passenger airbags, indicator light 154 Front seats 82 Fuel 244 Fuel cap 242 Fuel filler flap 242 Fuel filler flap, emergency unlocking 243 Fuel gauge 130 Fuel quality 244

Fuel recommendation 244 Fuel tank, see Filling capacity 301 Fuse 283
G
Garage door opener, see Integrated Universal Remote Control 209 Gasoline 244 Gear shift indicator 134 General driving notes 231 General settings 48 Glare shield 214 Glass sunroof, initialize the system 81 Glass sunroof, see Panoramic glass sunroof 79 Glove compartment 220 GPS geolocation, vehicle position 49 GPS, navigation, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6 GREEN bonus range 238 GREEN Mode 236 GREEN - program, driving dynamics 177 GREEN tip, driving tip 238 Gross vehicle weight, approved 299 Ground clearance 233
H
Handbrake, electric, see Parking brake, electric 104 Handbrake, manual, see Parking brake, manual 104 Hand-held transmitter, alternating code 210 Hands-free device, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Hazard warning flashers 285 Head airbag 152 Headlight control, automatic 146 Headlight flasher 107 Headlight glass 281 Headlights, care 294

308

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Everything from A to Z

REFERENCE

Head restraints and seats 82 Head restraints, front 87 Head restraints, rear 88 Head-up Display 141 Head-up Display, shift point indicator 144 Head-up Display, sport displays 143 Head-up Display, standard view 142 Heated steering wheel 91 Heavy cargo, stowing 224 Height, vehicle 298 High-beam Assistant 147 High beams 107 High beams/low beams, see High-beam Assistant 147 Hills 233 Hill start assistant, see Drive-off assistant 178 Holder for beverages, see Cup holders 222 HomeLink, see Integrated Universal Remote Control 209 Homepage, see Internet 6 Hood 269 Horn 32 Hot exhaust gas system 231 HUD Head-up Display 141 Hydroplaning 232
I
iBrake - PostCrash 174 Ice warning, see External temperature warning 131 Icy roads, see External temperature warn-
ing 131 Identification marks, tires 252 Identification number, see Vehicle identification number 13 Ignition off 98 Ignition on 98 Illuminated ring, central instrument cluster 140 Indicator and warning lights, see Check Control 126 Indicator light, front-seat passenger air-
bags 154 Indicator light, see Check Control 126

Individual air distribution 202, 206 Individual settings, see Driver profiles 71 Inductive charging, smartphone, see Wireless charging tray 216 Inflation pressure, tires 246 Inflation pressure warning TPM, tires 160 Info Display 125 Information 6 Initialization, Flat Tire Monitor FTM 160 Input, iDrive 36 Instrument cluster 123 Instrument cluster, electronic dis-
plays 125, 126 Instrument lighting 149 Integrated key 67 Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehi-
cle 60 Integrated Universal Remote Control 209 Intelligent emergency call 286 Intelligent Safety 162 Intended use 8 Intensity, AUTO program 205 Interior equipment 209 Interior lights 149 Interior lights during unlocking 63 Interior lights with the vehicle locked 64 Interior mirror 89 Interior mirror, automatic dimming feature 91 Interior mirror, compass 212 Interior mirror, manually dimmable 90 Interior motion sensor 76 Interval display, service notifications 133 Interval mode 108, 111 In the vicinity of the center console 34 In the vicinity of the roofliner 35
J
Jacking points for the vehicle jack 264 Jam protection system, glass sunroof 81 Jam protection system, windows 78 Jump-starting 287

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

309

REFERENCE

Everything from A to Z

K
Keyless Go, see Comfort Access 68 Key, see Integrated key 67 Key, see Vehicle key 62 Kickdown, Steptronic transmission 118 Knee airbag 152
L
Label on recommended tires 255 Lane departure warning 169 Lane threshold, warning 169 Language, set 48 Lashing eyes 225 LATCH child restraint fixing system 95 Launch Control 121 Leather care 295 LED ring, central instrument cluster 140 LEDs, light-emitting diodes 280 Length, vehicle 298 Letters and numbers, entering 37 Light-alloy wheels, care 295 Light-emitting diodes, LEDs 280 Lighter 214 Lighting 145 Light replacement 280 Light replacement, rear 281 Lights 145 Lights and bulbs 280 Light switch 145 LIM button, see Manual Speed Limiter 171 List, instrument cluster, see Selection lists 136 List of all messages 50 Load 225 Loading 224 Loading position 226 Loading the cargo area, see Stowing cargo 224 Location, vehicle position 49 Locking, automatic 74 Locking, from inside 68 Locking, settings 74

Low beams, automatic, see High-beam Assistant 147 Low beams, operation 145 Lower back support, see Lumbar support 83 Luggage rack, see Roof-mounted luggage rack 233 Lumbar support 83
M
Maintenance 277 Maintenance recommendations, see Condition Based Service CBS 277 Maintenance, service notifications 133 Maintenance system, MINI 277 Make-up mirror 214 Malfunction displays, see Check Control 126 Manual air flow 202 Manual brake, electric, see Parking brake, electric 104 Manual brake, manual, see Parking brake, manual 104 Manual control, air distribution 202, 206 Manual control, air flow 205 Manual mode, transmission 119 Manual operation, PDC Park Distance Control 190 Manual operation, rearview camera 193 Manual Speed Limiter 171 Manual transmission 115 Manufacturer of the MINI 7 Map update, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Matt paint, care 295 Maximum cooling 204 Maximum speed display, see Speed Limit Info 134 Maximum speed, winter tires 256 Measuring units 49 Mechanical key 67 Media of the Owner's Manual 60 Medical supplies, see First-aid kit 285 Menu, instrument cluster, see Selection lists 136

310

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Everything from A to Z

REFERENCE

Menus, Central Information Display (CID) 40 Messages 50 Messages, see Check Control 126 Microfilter 203, 206 MID - program, driving dynamics 177 MINI Connected, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6 MINI driving modes 177 MINI logo projection during unlocking 63 MINI maintenance system 277 MINIMALISM analyzer 241 MINIMALISM information 239 Minimum tread, tires 254 MINI Roadside Assistance 285 Mirrors 89 Mobile communication devices in the vehicle 231 Mobile phone, connecting 52 Mobile phone, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communication 6 Mobile Service, see MINI Roadside Assistance 285 Mobility System 257 Modifications, technical, see For Your Own Safety 7 Moisture in headlight 281 Monitor, see Control Display 38 Mounting of child restraint systems 93 MP3 player, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Multifunction steering wheel, buttons 32 Multimedia, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communication 6
N
Navigation, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communication 6 Neck restraints, front, see Head restraints front 87 Neck restraints, rear, see Head restraints rear 88

Neutral cleaner, see Light-alloy wheels, care 295 New wheels and tires 255 Notifications 50
O
OBD Onboard Diagnosis 278 OBD, see OBD Onboard Diagnosis 278 Obstacle marking, rearview camera 194 Octane rating, see Recommended fuel grade 245 Odometer 131 Oil 271 Oil, adding 272 Oil change 274 Oil filler neck 272 Oil service interval, service notifications 133 Oil types to add, engine 273 Onboard literature, printed 60 Onboard vehicle tool kit 279 On-call service, see MINI Roadside Assistance 285 Opening and closing 62 Opening, from inside 68 Operating concept Central Information Display (CID) operating concept 36 Operating menus, Central Information Display (CID) 36 Operation via the Controller 40 Operation via touchscreen 42 Operation via voice 44 Optional equipment, see Vehicle equipment 7 Overwintering, see Long-term vehicle storage 297 Owner's Manual, printed 60
P
Paint, car care 294 Pair device 52 Panic alarm, see Panic mode 76 Panic mode 76

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

311

REFERENCE

Everything from A to Z

Panoramic glass sunroof 79 Parallel parking assistant 195 Park Distance Control PDC 189 Parked vehicle, condensation 233 Parking aid, see PDC 189 Parking assistant 195 Parking brake, electric 104 Parking brake, manual 104 Parking lights 145 Parts and accessories 8 Passenger's side exterior mirror, tilt down, see Automatic Curb Monitor 90 Pathway lighting 146 Pathway lines, rearview camera 193 Payload, technical data 299 PDC Park Distance Control 189 Pedestrian Collision Warning with City Collision Mitigation 167 Performance Control 177 Personal data, deleting 51 Personal profile, see Driver profiles 71 Phone, connecting 52 Plastic, care 296 PostCrash - iBrake 174 Power failure 283 Power windows 77 Pressure, tires 246 Pre-ventilation 207 Printed onboard literature 60 Profiles, see Driver profiles 71 Programmable memory buttons, Central Information Display (CID) 43 Protective function, glass sunroof, see Jam protection system 81 Protective function, windows, see Jam protection system 78 Push-and-turn reel, see Controller 39
R
Racetrack operation 234 Radio-ready state 99 Radio, see Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Entertainment and Communication 6 Rain sensor 108, 111 Ratchet straps 225

Rear lights 281 Rear seat backrests, folding down 226 Rearview camera 192 Rear-view mirrors, exterior 89 Rear window defroster 203, 206 Rear window wiper, operation 109, 113 Recirculated-air filter, see Microfilter/acti-
vated-charcoal filter 206 Recirculated-air mode 202, 205 Recommended fuel grade 245 Recommended tire brands 255 Refueling 242 Remaining range 132 Remote control, universal 209 Remote services, app, see Owner's Hand-
book for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Replacing parts 279 Replacing the battery, vehicle key 65 Replacing, wheels and tires 255 Reporting safety malfunctions 14 RES CNCL button, camera-based cruise control 179 RES CNCL button, cruise control 186 Reserve warning, see Range 132 Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 156 Retreaded tires 256 Roadside parking lights 146 Rolling code hand-held transmitter 210 RON recommended fuel grade 245 Roofliner 35 Roof-mounted luggage rack 233 Route, navigation, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6 RTTI, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Rubber components, care 295 Run-flat tire 256
S
Safe braking 232 Safety belt reminder for driver's seat and front passenger seat 86 Safety belt reminder for the rear seats 86

312

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Everything from A to Z

REFERENCE

Safety belts 85 Safety belts, care 296 Safety locks, doors, and windows 97 Safety switch, windows 79 Safety systems, see Airbags 151 Saving fuel 235 Screen, see Control Display 38 Screwdriver 279 Sealant, see Mobility System 257 Seat heating, front 85 Seating position for children 92 Seats and head restraints 82 Seats, front 82 Securing, cargo 224 Selection list in the instrument cluster 136 Sensors, care 296 Service and warranty 9 Service Center, see MINI Roadside Assis-
tance 285 Service notifications, display 133 Service notifications, see Condition Based Service CBS 277 Servotronic 178 SET button, camera-based cruise control 179 SET button, cruise control 186 Setting, Control Display 49 Settings, general 48 Settings, locking/unlocking 74 Settings, mirrors 89 Settings, seats and head restraints 82 Shift paddles on the steering wheel 120 Shift point indicator, Head-up Display 144 Side airbag 151 Signaling, horn 32 Signals when unlocking 75 Sitting safely 82 Slide/tilt glass roof 79 Smallest turning circle, vehicle 298 Smartphone, connecting 52 Smartphone, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communication 6 Socket, OBD Onboard Diagnosis 278 Sockets, electrical devices 215 Software update 58

Software, updating 58 SOS button 286 Sound output, see Owner's Handbook for
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Spare tire, see Emergency wheel 265 Speech recognition 44 Speed Limit Device, see Speed Limiter 171 Speed limit display, see Speed Limit Info 134 Speed Limiter 171 Speed Limit Info 134 Speed Limit Info, trip computer 138 Speed limit, see Speed Limiter 171 Speed, see Average speed 137 Speed warning 140 Split screen 38 Sport displays 139 Sport displays, Head-up Display 143 SPORT program, driving dynamics 178 Sport program, transmission 118 Stability control systems 175 Standard equipment, see Vehicle equipment 7 Standard view, Head-up Display 142 Stars, MINIMALISM display 241 Start/stop, automatic function 101 Start/Stop button 98 Starting the engine 99 Stations, AM/FM, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Status control display, tires 155 Status information, Central Information Display (CID) 37 Status of Owner's Manual 7 Status, vehicle 144 Steering assistance 178 Steering column adjustment 91 Steering wheel, adjusting 91 Steering wheel, buttons 32 Steptronic Sport transmission, see Steptronic transmission 116 Steptronic Sport transmission with double clutch, see Steptronic transmission 116 Steptronic transmission 116

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

313

REFERENCE

Everything from A to Z

Steptronic transmission with double clutch, see Steptronic transmission 116
Stopping the engine 100 Storage compartments 220 Storage, tires 256 Storing the vehicle 297 Stowing, cargo 224 Suitable devices 53 Suitable mobile phones 53 Summer tires, tread 254 Sun visor 214 Supplementary Owner's Manuals 60 Supplementary text message 130 Switches, see Dashboard 32 Switch for driving dynamics 177 Symbols 6
T
Tachometer 131 Tailgate 70 Tailgate via vehicle key 64 Tail lights 281 Tank capacity 301 Technical changes, see For Your Own Safety 7 Technical data 298 Telephone, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communication 6 Teleservices, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Temperature, air conditioner 201 Temperature, automatic climate control 204 Temperature display for external temperature 131 Temperature, engine 138 Terminal, starting aid 288 Text message, Check Control 130 Theft alarm system, see Alarm system 75 Thigh support 84 Third-party provider, voice assistant 46 Tilt alarm sensor 76 Tilt down, passenger's side exterior mirror, see Automatic Curb Monitor 90

Time 48 Time of arrival 138 Tire brands, recommended 255 Tire chains 261 Tire damage 254 Tire identification marks 252 Tire inflation pressure 246 Tire inflation pressure monitoring, see
TPM 160 Tire inflation pressure monitor TPM 160 Tire pressure 246 Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 155 Tire repair kit, see Mobility System 257 Tires 246 Tires, changing 255 Tire sealant, see Mobility System 257 Tires, run-flat 256 Tire tread 254 Tone, see Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Entertainment and Communication 6 Tools 279 Touchscreen 42 Towing 289 Tow-starting 289 TPM Flat Tire Monitor 160 TPM Tire Pressure Monitor 155 Traction control 176 TRACTION, see Dynamic Traction Control, DTC 176 Traffic bulletins, see Owner's Handbook for
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Transmission lock, electronic unlocking 120 Transmission, manual transmission 115 Transmission, see Steptronic transmission 116 Transporting children safely 92 Travel computer 138 Tread, tires 254 Trip computer 136 Triple turn signal activation 106 Trip odometer 131 Trip recorder, see Trip odometer 131 Trunk, see Cargo area 224 Turning circle, vehicle 298

314

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Everything from A to Z

REFERENCE

Turning radius lines, rearview camera 193 Turn signal, indicator light 129 Turn signals, operation 106 Turn signals, rear, bulb replacement 281
U
Unintentional alarm, avoiding 77 Units, see Measuring units 49 Universal remote control 209 Unlocking, automatic 75 Unlocking, settings 74 Updates made after the editorial deadline 7 Updating, software 58 Upholstery care 295 Upper retaining strap, top tether 96 USB connection 55 USB port, position in vehicle 216 Used battery, disposing of 283 Use, intended 8 Using a smartphone via voice control 46
V
Vanity mirror 214 Vehicle battery 282 Vehicle breakdown, see Breakdown assistance 285 Vehicle, breaking in 230 Vehicle care 294 Vehicle care products 294 Vehicle equipment 7 Vehicle identification number 13 Vehicle jack 264 Vehicle key, additional 65 Vehicle key, loss 65 Vehicle key, malfunction 66 Vehicle key, opening/closing 62 Vehicle key, replacing the battery 65 Vehicle key, see Vehicle key 62 Vehicle paint, care 294 Vehicle position, vehicle location 49 Vehicle status 144 Vehicle storage 297 Vehicle washing 293

Ventilation 206 Ventilation, see Pre-ventilation 207 Venting, see Ventilation 206 Vent, see Ventilation 206 VIN, see Vehicle identification number 13 Voice assistant, third-party provider 46 Voice command response 44 Voice control 44 Voice control system 44
W
Warning and indicator lights, see Check Control 126 Warning displays, see Check Control 126 Warning messages, see Check Control 126 Warning triangle 285 Warranty 8 Washer fluid 114 Washer nozzles, windshield 109, 113 Washer system 107, 111 Washing the vehicle 293 Washing, vehicle 293 Water on roads 232 Website 6 Weights 299 Welcome lights 146 Welcome lights during unlocking 63 Wheel base, vehicle 298 Wheels 246 Wheels, changing 255 Width, vehicle 298 Windows, powered 77 Windshield defroster 203, 206 Windshield washer fluid, see Washer fluid 114 Windshield washer nozzles 109, 113 Windshield wiper, see Wiper system 107, 111 Windshield wipers, fold-away position 110, 113 Winter storage, see Long-term vehicle storage 297 Winter tires, suitable tires 256 Winter tires, tread 254 Wiper blades, replacing 279

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

315

REFERENCE

Everything from A to Z

Wiper fluid, see Washer fluid 114 Wiper, see Washer/wiper system 107, 111 Wiper system 107, 111 Wireless charging, smartphone, see Wireless charging tray 216 Wireless charging tray for smartphones 216 Wood, care 296 Word match concept, navigation 37 Working in, engine compartment 269 Wrench 279

316

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

01405A2C1C9 ue
*BL5A2C1C900V*
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

California Proposition 65 Warning
For vehicles sold in California:
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

MINI MOTORER'S GUIDE APP.
Your customized information about the vehicle in an app. Optimized for smartphones & tablets. Can be used offline.
01405A2C1C9 ue
*BL5A2C1C900V*
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

AH XSL Formatter V6.2 MR9 for Linux64 : 6.2.11.20953 (2015/05/28 17:24JST) Antenna House PDF Output Library 6.2.693 (Linux64)